fcbb-el-paso-tx-272

A Strong Business but a Modest Multiple

Mon, 16 Jun 2025 20:22:51 GMT

When Sean McAuliffe sold his company, he had a lot going for him. His distribution business was generating nearly $19 million in revenue. Margins were healthy. Growth was solid. And yet, when it came time to sell, his company was valued at around four times EBITDA, a relatively modest value for a $19 million company.

The reason? Sean didn’t fully control his supply chain—and buyers noticed.

Dependency Makes Buyers Nervous

Sean’s model was simple. He bought car key fobs from suppliers in Asia and sold them to locksmiths across the U.S. It was a classic distribution play: source cheap, sell smart, and manage relationships. Sean executed well. He even created his own brand, Keyless to Go, and FCC-registered his products—moves that set him apart from competitors.

But despite these efforts, Sean was still reliant on third-party suppliers. He didn’t own the factories. He didn’t control manufacturing. His business was exposed to the decisions of vendors half a world away. In today’s environment—where tariffs and geopolitical tensions can change the cost and availability of overseas goods almost overnight—relying on foreign suppliers feels riskier to acquirers than ever.

This kind of dependency is exactly what The Value Builder System™ measures through the Switzerland Structure—one of the eight key drivers of company value. The Switzerland Structure assesses whether your business is overly dependent on any one customer, employee, or supplier. Buyers pay a premium for companies that aren’t beholden to any single relationship.

Why Monopoly Control Drives Value

Contrast that with businesses that own their brand, control their production, or have proprietary products. Companies with a defendable moat—what we call Monopoly Control—are 40% more likely to have received a written offer to acquire their business, according to analysis of more than 80,000 business owners who have completed their Value Builder Score report.

When you control your product and customer experience, you influence your valuation upward—giving buyers fewer reasons to discount your business.

The Takeaway for Owners

Sean still built a great business. His execution created life-changing wealth. But if he had owned the supply chain or had exclusive manufacturing rights, he likely would have commanded a higher multiple.

The takeaway for business owners: Building a valuable company isn’t just about revenue and profit. It’s about creating a business that can thrive without being dependent on any one customer, employee, or supplier.

How to Double Your Chances of a Premium Acquisition Offer

Mon, 21 Apr 2025 16:55:11 GMT

Value Builder Analytics, drawing on proprietary data from over 80,000 business owners, found that companies that can run without the owner for at least three months are twice as likely to receive an acquisition offer above 6x EBITDA.

The concept is simple. The execution? Not so much.

Take Kristie Shifflette for example. She was an early master franchisee with Orangetheory Fitness, a one-hour, coach-led workout that uses heart rate zones to boost calorie burn during and after exercise. When she opened her first location, she did it all—marketing, hiring, payroll, and even handling construction headaches. It worked but only because she was working constantly.

As she expanded, things started to break. With two locations, she was stretched. At three, it became clear: The model only worked when Kristie was the model.

She knew she needed to change. Kristie stopped focusing on being in the business and started focusing on building the business.

From Operator to Owner

Kristie started documenting everything. From pre-sale processes to day-to-day studio operations, Kristie developed detailed playbooks that codified exactly how her Orangetheory locations should run—without her. She created a compensation structure for studio managers that gave them ownership over their results: modest base salaries paired with meaningful bonuses tied to net member growth and total revenue. Top-performing managers could double their pay, and they were treated like mini-CEOs with full responsibility for their studio’s performance.

By the time she sold her business, Kristie had built a company with 13 locations generating well north of $10 million in annual revenue. Some of her top-performing studios, like the Chapel Hill location, were bringing in revenue of $2 million a year, with EBITDA margins around 40%.

Kristie’s story includes an important lesson: Make yourself less essential, and your business becomes more valuable. If you’re still the one opening the door in the morning and locking up at night—literally or metaphorically—it’s worth asking: What would break if I stepped away for 90 days? Start there. Whether it’s building a playbook, empowering your team, or simply learning to let go, taking even one step toward reducing your involvement makes your company not just more valuable but more enjoyable to own.

Why Imperfections in Your Business Don’t Make It Unsellable

Mon, 14 Apr 2025 19:16:38 GMT

For business owners considering their endgame, learning what makes a company valuable can feel overwhelming. Buyers prioritize factors like recurring revenue, a differentiated product or service, and a leadership team that operates independently from the owner. If a business doesn’t check every box, it can seem as though selling is perpetually just out of reach.

But perfection is not a prerequisite for a sale. While improving the key drivers of value is important, an imperfect business can still be highly desirable to the right buyer. In fact, some acquirers actively look for businesses with fixable flaws because they see an opportunity to increase value.

Blake Hutchison on Why Imperfections Can Be to an Acquirer’s Advantage

Blake Hutchison, CEO of Flippa, has witnessed thousands of business acquisitions. Flippa is an online marketplace where business owners can buy and sell companies, particularly small to mid-sized digital businesses. The platform connects sellers with buyers looking for opportunities to grow or optimize an acquisition.

In a recent Built to Sell Radio interview, Hutchison explained that many business owners assume their company won’t attract buyers because it has shortcomings. In reality, most acquirers aren’t looking for perfection—they’re looking for potential. Many buyers have a strategic advantage, whether it’s a strong distribution network, operational expertise, or access to capital, that allows them to take an imperfect business and make it more valuable.

A prime example of this is the acquisition of PetCoach.

How PetCoach Turned an Imperfection into a Selling Point

PetCoach, co-founded by Brock Weatherup, was a two-sided marketplace designed to connect pet owners with veterinarians. The challenge for any marketplace business is keeping both sides in balance—generating enough demand from pet owners while ensuring there are enough veterinarians to meet that demand.

PetCoach had built a strong product, but it lacked a broad distribution channel to acquire pet owners at scale. Without a solution, growth would remain limited. Instead of seeing this as a dealbreaker, Weatherup positioned it as an opportunity for the right buyer.

That buyer was Petco. With more than 1,500 locations across the U.S., Mexico, and Puerto Rico, Petco had access to millions of pet owners. By acquiring PetCoach, Petco could instantly expand its offerings while solving PetCoach’s biggest challenge.

Weatherup didn’t need to fix the scalability issue before selling. He needed to find an acquirer for whom the business’s weakness was actually a competitive advantage.

Your Business Has Value—Even if It’s Not Perfect

This doesn’t mean business owners should ignore the fundamentals of value creation. Strengthening factors like recurring revenue, customer retention, and operational efficiency will always increase a company’s attractiveness. However, not every issue needs to be resolved before an exit.

Instead of viewing imperfections as obstacles, business owners should consider how an acquirer might perceive them:

A company struggling with customer acquisition may be a great fit for a buyer with an established customer base.

A business with inefficient operations might attract an acquirer with expertise in streamlining processes.

A company overly dependent on its owner could be appealing to a buyer with a strong leadership team ready to step in.

As Blake Hutchison explains, acquirers are often looking for businesses where they can add value. The key is to position the company in a way that highlights its strengths while framing its imperfections as untapped potential. The right acquirer won’t see weaknesses as dealbreakers—they’ll see them as opportunities.

Is Your Industry Next for a Roll-Up? Here’s How to Tell—and What to Do

Mon, 07 Apr 2025 18:23:02 GMT

The garage door industry isn’t the most obvious place for a business empire. Yet in just a few years, Guild has emerged as a dominant force, consolidating a fragmented market into a scalable platform worth millions. If you’re a business owner in a fragmented industry, Guild’s story raises two pressing questions: Could my industry be next for a roll-up, and if it is, should I lead the charge or sell to someone else?

The roll-up model—acquiring and integrating small businesses in a fragmented market to create economies of scale—isn’t new, but its reach has expanded. From veterinary clinics to plumbing companies, private equity firms are creating billion-dollar platforms from businesses once considered too small to attract institutional capital.

Roll-ups are like waves. Catch one early, and you can ride it to a lucrative exit. Private equity firms often pay a premium to consolidate a market, and the scarcity of scaled businesses drives multiples higher. Wait too long, however, and the wave dissipates. You’re left competing with a PE-backed giant with better pricing, marketing budgets, and scale. Timing is everything.

How to Know if Your Industry Is Ripe for a Roll-Up

When Guild co-founders Jordan Dubin, Joe Delaney, and Sean Slavzic set out to create a roll-up platform, they didn’t stumble into garage doors—they chose it methodically. Their approach offers a roadmap for owners wondering if their market is next.

Fragmentation

The more small, independent businesses in your market, the easier it is to consolidate. In the garage door industry, 92% of operators were small, local businesses—an ideal setup for Guild.

Market Size

A fragmented market needs to be large enough to justify consolidation. Guild found a $14 billion residential garage door market with plenty of room to scale.

Growth Potential

Growing markets attract investors. Garage doors were growing at 7–8% annually, compared to 3–4% for more saturated sectors like HVAC.

Precedent Transactions

A notable sale in your industry can validate its attractiveness. The sale of A1 Garage Doors to CoreTech at 21 times EBITDA signaled strong demand for scaled players.

Scalability

Industries with standardized, repeatable processes are easier to integrate and scale. Garage door companies focus on repairs and installations, making them well suited for roll-ups.

Timing

By the time Guild entered, private equity had already saturated HVAC and plumbing, leaving fewer opportunities. Garage doors offered Guild the chance to be a first mover and capture value early.

Should You Sell or Lead the Roll-Up?

If your industry meets these criteria, you’re likely at a crossroads. Do you sell to a roll-up or lead one yourself? Both options have merit, but the best choice depends on your goals and appetite for growth.

Selling to a Roll-Up

Selling offers liquidity and the chance to step back. To maximize your exit:

Focus on EBITDA.

Build systems. Make your business less dependent on you.

Clean up financials. Transparent books boost valuation.

“Private equity doesn’t want to buy a job; they want to buy an asset,” says Dubin. Failing to position your business as turnkey could mean leaving money on the table.

Leading the Roll-Up

If you’re not ready to sell, consider consolidating your industry. By acquiring competitors, you can scale your business, increase its value, and become the dominant player in your market.

Dubin and his partners raised $35 million to launch Guild. “There’s too much money in the world and not enough good opportunities,” he says. Starting a roll-up requires capital, operational expertise, and a clear vision, but it lets you control your industry’s future instead of waiting for someone else to define it.

The Wave Won’t Wait

Markets ripe for roll-ups don’t stay that way forever. Once private equity enters, competition drives valuations higher and makes acquisitions less attractive. Early movers capture the lion’s share of value, whether they’re selling or leading the charge.

Supplier Dependence: The Silent Killer of Business Valuations

Mon, 31 Mar 2025 17:36:01 GMT

Supplier risk can erode the value of your company. When a potential acquirer examines your business, they look for red flags. A major one: relying too heavily on a single supplier—whether that’s a sole raw material provider or a platform like Amazon that controls your primary sales channel. If that key supplier vanishes or changes terms, your profits might vanish as well. This risk often leads to lower valuations in the eyes of buyers.

Why Supplier Risk Hurts Valuation

Over-dependence on one supplier—or on a single selling channel—makes you vulnerable. Buyers don’t like gambling on a business that hinges on factors outside the owner’s control. If an online marketplace tweaks its algorithm or suspends your account, your revenue may plummet. Acquirers see this fragility and adjust their offer downward.

Adi Gullia’s Diversification Example

Entrepreneur Adi Gullia saw this firsthand. He built his beauty brand, Grace & Stella, on Amazon’s platform. At first, it looked like a goldmine—his foot-peeling mask soared to $100,000 in monthly sales within nine months. Yet Adi recognized the risk. He knew Amazon could change rules or restrict listings at any moment, putting his entire business at risk.

Instead of waiting for that to happen, Adi expanded. He forged relationships with subscription box partners to reach new customers outside Amazon’s control. Next he launched his own ecommerce site, selling directly to consumers. Adi also ventured into retail, signing a major deal with Target. These partnerships allowed him to diversify his revenue streams and build a more resilient business. Retailers like Target appreciated Grace & Stella’s success on Amazon, which served as proof of demand. By reducing his dependence on any single channel, Adi created a business that acquirers found far more appealing.

The Impact on Valuation

When it came time to sell, Adi’s diversification efforts paid off. His company fetched a valuation of 5.8 times EBITDA—a significant premium over what a typical Amazon reseller might expect. Most Amazon-only brands are valued at three to four times EBITDA, reflecting the higher risks tied to their reliance on the platform. Buyers of Amazon-centric businesses worry about potential account suspensions, de-listings, or increased competition driving down margins. Adi’s diversified revenue streams mitigated these risks, making his business more stable and attractive to acquirers.

Practical Steps to Lower Supplier Risk

1. Add Channels: If you rely on one marketplace, consider starting your own ecommerce store. Test alternative platforms or retail partners.

2. Secure Multiple Suppliers: If raw materials come from one producer, find a backup or two. Even if your costs rise slightly, you’re buying peace of mind.

3. Build Direct Relationships: Capture customer data through your own site. Invest in ways to reach buyers directly—email, social media, subscriptions—so no single platform can cut you off from your audience.

Conclusion

Supplier risk is a value killer. Buyers pay less for a company balanced on a single weak pillar. Don’t let one supplier or one platform control your future. Take a page from Adi Gullia’s playbook. By branching out to retail with Target, leveraging subscription boxes, and launching an ecommerce site, he reduced his supplier risk. These moves not only stabilized his business but also helped him command a premium valuation. At 5.8 times EBITDA, Adi’s sale was far above the norm for Amazon resellers—proof that diversification strengthens both your business and its ultimate value.

The Power of Working on, Not in, Your Business

Mon, 24 Mar 2025 16:44:39 GMT

Have you ever considered that knowing too much about your company’s product or service could be a disadvantage? Sometimes, not being a technical expert can help you avoid a common trap many founders fall into.

Carrie Kelsch, who founded A Plus Garage Doors in 2005, had no experience in garage door repair. Instead of seeing that as a disadvantage, she turned it into an edge by focusing on growth, leadership, and building a high-performing team rather than getting stuck in the technical side of the business.

“I didn’t, and I still don’t, know how to fix a garage door,” she says. Instead, Carrie leaned on her team to handle operations so she could dedicate her energy to marketing and growth. This approach reflects the advice in Michael Gerber’s The E-Myth Revisited: to work on your business, not in it.

Not Getting Taken Advantage Of

You might worry that if you don’t understand the technical side of your business, employees or vendors could take advantage of you by claiming tasks take longer or cost more than they actually do. To address this, consider tying key employees’ compensation to your company’s long-term success.

One powerful strategy is implementing phantom equity. This gives employees a stake in the financial upside of your business without transferring actual ownership. It ensures their decisions are aligned with your goals and motivates them to contribute to the growth of your company.

Carrie used a similar approach, rewarding loyal team members with phantom shares. This gave her team a sense of ownership and accountability, which helped her retain top talent. With her team handling the delivery of their service and aligned to the company’s success, Carrie was free to focus on growth.

A Transformative Exit

In 2024 Carrie sold a majority stake of A Plus Garage Doors to Guild Garage Group, a private equity-backed roll-up in the home services space. Guild valued her business at approximately $70 million, recognizing the strong financial foundation and brand she had built.

This deal allowed Carrie to take significant capital off the table while keeping a stake in the company’s future growth. It’s proof that you don’t have to master every technical detail to build a business worth millions.

Carrie’s journey shows that you don’t need to be a technical expert to succeed. By focusing on growth, empowering your team, and aligning incentives with performance, you can build a valuable asset that attracts buyers or investors. Working on your business—not in it—frees you to focus on the big picture, turning what might seem like a disadvantage into a competitive edge.

Your business is more than the product or service it offers. It’s a system, a brand, and, ultimately, an asset. Sometimes the less you know about how the sausage is made, the better.

From Reseller to Brand Builder: Luke Peters’ $80M Success

Mon, 17 Mar 2025 23:07:29 GMT

A lot of companies are tempted to resell other people’s products and services as a quick path to hitting their next revenue milestone. While this approach might boost your top line, it often comes at the cost of your company’s long-term value. Acquirers aren't just looking for companies that generate revenue—they usually want businesses that bring something unique to the table, something they can't easily replicate.

Finding a Quiet Corner of the Market

In the early days, Luke Peters sold portable air conditioners and thermostats online. When he made a sale, he’d head to a local industrial supply store, buy the unit, and ship it to his customer. He added no value and operated as a thinly veiled reseller with razor-thin margins.

But Luke began thinking more strategically about his business. Instead of competing in crowded categories like air conditioners, he found a quiet, underserved corner of the HVAC market: portable beer and wine fridges. That’s when he started to build his own brand, NewAir. By focusing on this niche, Luke didn’t have to battle the big players like Whirlpool in traditional appliance categories. Instead, he carved out a segment where NewAir could dominate and create a brand that stood out.

This strategic shift allowed him to build a brand that was recognized for delivering products that were easy to ship, fun to own, and specifically appealing to a target audience. By owning his niche, Luke unlocked a path to profitability and business value that wasn't dependent on thin reseller margins.

The Value of a Brand

In The Value Builder System™, product or brand differentiation is referred to as Monopoly Control—the ability to dominate a niche with an offering so unique that competitors can’t easily replicate it. Achieving Monopoly Control boosts your company’s value in three key ways:

1.Commanding Higher Prices

Differentiated products deliver unique value, making it easier to charge premium prices. Luke transitioned from reselling low-margin portable air conditioners to the relatively untapped market of premium bar and wine fridges. This shift raised his gross margin and net profitability—two of the most critical metrics in valuing a company.

2.Increasing Customer Loyalty

When customers see your product as distinct, they are less likely to switch to competitors. Luke’s products weren’t just functional; they delivered an experience, fostering emotional connections that encouraged repeat purchases and stabilized revenue.

3.Acquirers Pay a Premium for Differentiated Brands

When acquirers evaluate your company, they’re making a “build vs. buy” decision. They’re asking, “Should we buy this business or simply compete with it?” Acquirers pay top dollar when they conclude that replicating your point of differentiation would be too costly and time-consuming.

Lasko Acquires Luke’s $80 Million Business

By finding an underserved niche and building NewAir around it, Luke Peters grew the company into a business generating $80 million in annual revenue. His success culminated in NewAir being acquired by Lasko Products in 2021, marking a significant milestone in his journey from reseller to brand builder.

Listening & Leveling: How Customer Feedback Turned a $50 Idea into a 7-Figure Business

Mon, 10 Mar 2025 17:12:39 GMT

In the early days of Airbnb, co-founder Brian Chesky went to surprising lengths to gather customer feedback. He would stay with Airbnb hosts to experience the platform as they did, asking detailed questions about their needs and frustrations. Chesky’s commitment to listening wasn’t just about making improvements—it was about truly understanding the customer experience in a way few founders do.

Sara Blakely, the founder of Spanx, took a similar approach. In the early days of her business, Blakely would personally visit department stores to watch customers try on her shapewear and listen to their feedback. She also spoke directly with store employees to learn what worked and what didn’t.

As Spanx grew, Blakely continued reading customer emails and social media comments to stay connected to their needs. When women began asking for more than just shapewear—like leggings and bras—Blakely expanded her product line in response, fueling Spanx’s growth. Her hands-on approach to capturing feedback helped Spanx evolve into a billion-dollar brand.

It’s not just giant companies like Airbnb and Spanx that benefit from this kind of founder obsession with customer feedback. Small business owners can unlock tremendous value by taking the same approach.

William Brown’s Journey: From $50 to Seven Figures

William Brown’s story shows how the Listening & Leveling approach can directly increase business value. Brown began with a simple $50 Word document designed to teach beginners how to trade online. What set him apart was his commitment to listening to customer feedback and using it to continually improve.

When customers asked, “What broker do you use?” or “How do I navigate the market?”, Brown didn’t just answer—he adapted his product to better meet their needs. Over time, his offering evolved into a full-fledged educational program with videos, coaching, and additional resources. This not only enhanced the product but transformed Brown’s business, WB Trading, into a far more valuable asset.

By responding to feedback, Brown’s product improved and so did its perceived value. This allowed him to raise prices from $50 to $2,000, significantly boosting profitability. His focus on continuous improvement also deepened customer loyalty, reducing churn and driving long-term value in his business.

Through these strategies, William didn’t just build a better product—he built a more valuable business, leading to a seven-figure exit.

Applying Listening & Leveling to Your Business

How can you apply the Listening & Leveling approach to grow your business?

 Open Feedback Channels: Actively seek customer insights through surveys, follow-up emails, or direct outreach. These insights reveal opportunities to refine your offering and build customer loyalty.

 Act on Feedback: Quickly implement changes based on what you learn. As your product improves, you can increase prices and boost retention, directly enhancing your business’s value.

No matter how big your business becomes, you’re never too big to listen to your customers. Whether you’re building a billion-dollar empire like Sara Blakely or fine-tuning a niche product like William Brown, customer feedback is the key to staying relevant, evolving your offering, and maximizing your company’s value.

Why a Strong Moat Made Boondockers Welcome an Acquisition Target

Mon, 03 Mar 2025 16:28:02 GMT

What Makes You Tough to Compete With?

It’s that thing customers value but competitors can’t seem to match.

For Apple, it’s their integrated ecosystem of devices and services. Apple’s ecosystem binds together iPhones, iPads, Macs, Apple Watches, and services like iCloud, Apple Music, and Apple Pay into a seamless experience. Once you own one Apple product, the additional benefits and ease of using multiple devices and services from the same company make it difficult to switch to competitors.

The strength of Apple’s ecosystem lies in how all their products and services work together, enhancing convenience and functionality. This integration creates a powerful moat that other tech companies struggle to cross, contributing to Apple’s dominant market position.

And this doesn’t just work for large tech companies. We refer to your moat as having Monopoly Control, and it can significantly increase your company’s value. A study done by The Value Builder System™ shows that companies with a monopoly are 40% more likely to receive acquisition offers, and these offers are typically 25% higher than businesses without a virtual monopoly.

How Boondockers Welcome Built a Moat

Let’s look at Boondockers Welcome, founded by Marianne Edwards and her daughter, Anna Maste.

Boondockers Welcome is like Airbnb for RVers. RV enthusiasts can find hosts willing to let them park their RVs on their land for free. The RVers get a free place to stay, and the hosts enjoy meeting like-minded travelers.

As with any two-sided market, the challenge lies in quickly growing both sides—hosts and guests. This challenge of establishing a thriving marketplace created the moat that made Boondockers Welcome tough to compete with. The success of a two-sided market depends on achieving critical mass; without enough hosts, guests won’t join, and vice versa.

Edwards and Maste had an advantage here. Edwards had spent years writing travel guides and had a dedicated list of followers who made ideal hosts. By tapping into this community, they quickly populated the site with high-quality hosts, giving Boondockers Welcome a head start that was hard for others to replicate.

This early success allowed the Boondockers Welcome network to grow to more than 3,500 locations across the country, creating a robust marketplace that was difficult for any new entrant to challenge.

The Sale to Harvest Host

This well-established network caught the attention of Harvest Host, a membership service for RVers offering unique camping experiences at locations like wineries and farms. CEO Joel Holland saw the potential synergy and reached out to Maste and Edwards for a partnership.

Initially, Maste and Edwards declined. But Holland, recognizing the strength of their moat, persisted and asked them to name their price.

Maste and Edwards considered their ideal number and doubled it. After some negotiation, Holland agreed, and the deal closed just weeks later.

Your moat may make your company attractive to customers, but it also makes your business more valuable. Focus on widening and hardening your moat, and watch the value of your business grow.

THE DANGER OF MARKET TIMING THE SALE OF YOUR BUSINESS

Fri, 21 Feb 2025 16:33:56 GMT

The other day I was speaking with a successful CEO in his fifties who runs a heating and air conditioning company generating eight million dollars in revenue and over one million dollars in profit before tax.

Even though he was tired and nearing burnout, he was planning to wait another five to seven years before selling his business because he “wanted to sell at the peak of the next economic cycle.”

On the surface, his rationale seems to make sense. If you speak with mergers and acquisitions professionals, they’ll tell you that an economic cycle can impact valuations by up to “two turns,” which means that a business selling for five times earnings at the peak of an economic cycle may go for as low as three times earnings at a low point in the economy.

The problem is, when you sell your business, you have to do something with the money you receive, which usually means buying into another asset class that is being affected by the same economy.

Let’s say, for example, you had a business generating $100,000 in pre-tax profit in an industry that trades between three times earnings and five times earnings, depending on the point in the economic cycle.

Furthermore, let’s imagine you sat stealthy on the sideline until the economy reached the absolute peak and sold your business for $500,000 (five times your pre-tax profit) in October 2007. You took your $500,000 and bought into a Dow Jones index fund when it was trading above 14,000. Eighteen months later – after the Dow Jones had dropped to 6,547.05– you’d be left with less than half of your money.

Even though you cleverly waited till the economic peak, by March 9, 2009, you would have effectively sold your business for less than 2.5 times earnings.

The inverse is also true. Let’s say you waited “too long” and sold the same business in March 2009. And because you were at the lowest possible point in the economic cycle, you only got three times earnings: $300,000. Notice that’s 20% more than if you’d sold at the peak and bought an index fund at the top of the market.

Just like when you sell your house in a good real estate market, unless you’re downsizing, you usually buy into an equally frothy market. Which is why timing the sale of your business on external economic cycles is usually a waste of energy.

External vs. internal economic cycles

Instead, I’d recommend timing the sale of your business when internal economic factors are all pointing in the right direction: employees are happy, revenue and profits are on an upward trend, and there is still lots of market share for an acquirer to capture.

When internal economic factors are pointing up, you’ll fetch a price at the top end of what the market is paying for businesses like yours right now, which means that – for good or bad – you get to use your newfound cash and buy into the same economic market you’re selling out of.

WHAT YOUR BIRTH CERTIFICATE SAYS ABOUT YOUR EXIT PLAN

Thu, 20 Feb 2025 16:57:21 GMT

In our experience, your age has a big effect on your attitude towards your business and how you feel about one day getting out. Here's what we have found:

Business owners between 25 and 46 years old

Twenty- and thirty-something business owners grew up in an age where job security did not exist. They watched as their parents got downsized or packaged off into early retirement, and that caused a somewhat jaded attitude towards the role of a business in society. Business owners in their 20’s and 30’s generally see their companies as means to an end and most expect to sell in the next five to ten years. Similar to their employed classmates who have a new job every three to five years; business owners in this age group often expect to start a few companies in their lifetime.

Business owners between 47 and 65 years old

Baby Boomers came of age in a time where the social contract between company and employee was sacrosanct. An employee agreed to be loyal to the company, and in return, the company agreed to provide a decent living and a pension for a few golden years.

Many of the business owners we speak with in this generation think of their company as more than a profit center. They see their business as part of a community and, by extension, themselves as a community leader. To many boomers, the idea of selling their company feels like selling out their employees and their community, which is why so many CEO’s in their fifties and sixties are torn. They know they need to sell to fund their retirement, but they agonize over where that will leave their loyal employees.

Business owners who are 65+

Older business owners grew up in a time when hobbies were impractical or discouraged. You went to work while your wife tended to the kids (today, more than half of businesses are started by women, but those were different times), you ate dinner, you watched the news and you went to bed.

With few hobbies and nothing other than work to define them, business owners in their late sixties, seventies and eighties feel lost without their business, which is why so many refuse to sell or experience depression after they do.

Of course, there will always be exceptions to general rules of thumb but we have found that – more than your industry, nationality, marital status or educational background – your birth certificate defines your exit plan.

SEVEN POWERFUL RATIOS TO START TRACKING NOW

Wed, 19 Feb 2025 17:17:20 GMT

Doctors in the developing world measure their progress not by the aggregate number of children who die in childbirth but by the infant mortality rate, a ratio of the number of births to deaths.

Similarly, baseball’s leadoff batters measure their “on-base percentage” – the number of times they get on base as a percentage of the number of times they get the chance to try.

Acquirers also like tracking ratios and the more ratios you can provide a potential buyer, the more comfortable they will get with the idea of buying your business.

Better than the blunt measuring stick of an aggregate number, a ratio expresses the relationship between two numbers, which gives them their power.

If you’re planning to sell your company one day, here’s a list of seven ratios to start tracking in your business now:

1. Employees per square foot

By calculating the number of square feet of office space you rent and dividing it by the number of employees you have, you can judge how efficiently you have designed your space. Commercial real estate agents use a general rule of 175–250 square feet of usable office space per employee.

2. Ratio of promoters and detractors

Fred Reichheld and his colleagues at Bain & Company and Satmetrix, developed the Net Promoter Score® methodology, which is based around asking customers a single question that is predictive of both repurchase and referral. Here’s how it works: survey your customers and ask them the question “On a scale of 0 to 10, how likely are you to recommend <insert your company name> to a friend or colleague?” Figure out what percentage of the people surveyed give you a 9 or 10 and label that your ratio of “promoters.” Calculate your ratio of detractors by figuring out the percentage of people surveyed who gave you a 0–6 score. Then calculate your Net Promoter Score by subtracting your percentage of detractors from your percentage of promoters.

The average company in the United States has a Net Promoter Score of between 10 and 15 percent. According to Satmetrix’s 2011 study, the U.S. companies with the highest Net Promoter Score are:

USAA Banking 87%

Trader Joe’s 82%

Wegmans 78%

USAA Homeowner’s Insurance 78%

Costco 77%

USAA Auto Insurance 73%

Apple 72%

Publix 72%

Amazon.com 70%

Kohl’s 70%

3. Sales per square foot

By measuring your annual sales per square foot, you can get a sense of how efficiently you are translating your real estate into sales. Most industry associations have a benchmark. For example, annual sales per square foot for a respectable retailer might be $300. With real estate usually ranking just behind payroll as a business’s largest expenses, the more sales you can generate per square foot of real estate, the more profitable you are likely to be.

Specialty food retailer Trader Joe’s ranks among companies with the highest sales per square foot; Business Week estimates it at $1,750 – more than double that of Whole Foods.

4. Revenue per employee

Payroll is the number-one expense of most businesses, which explains why maximizing your revenue per employee can translate quickly to the bottom line. In a 2010 report, Business Insider estimated that Craigslist enjoys one of the highest revenue-per-employee ratios, at $3,300,000 per employee, followed by Google at $1,190,000 per bum in a seat. Amazon was at $1,010,000, Facebook at $920,000, and eBay rounded out the top five at $530,000. More traditional people-dependent companies may struggle to surpass $100,000 per employee.

5. Customers per account manager

How many customers do you ask your account managers to manage? Finding a balance can be tricky. Some bankers are forced to juggle more than 400 accounts and therefore do not know each of their customers, whereas some high-end wealth managers may have just 50 clients to stay in contact with. It’s hard to say what the right ratio is because it is so highly dependent on your industry. Slowly increase your ratio of customers per account manager until you see the first signs of deterioration (slowing sales, drop in customer satisfaction). That’s when you know you have probably pushed it a little too far.

6. Prospects per visitor

What proportion of your website’s visitors “opt in” by giving you permission to e-mail them in the future? Dr. Karl Blanks and Ben Jesson are the cofounders of Conversion Rate Experts, which advises companies like Google, Apple and Sony how to convert more of their website traffic into customers. Dr. Blanks and Mr. Jesson state that there is no such thing as a typical opt-in rate, because so much depends on the source of traffic. They recommend that rather than benchmarking yourself against a competitor, you benchmark against yourself by carrying out tests to beat your site’s current opt-in rate.

Dr. Blanks and Mr. Jesson suggest the easiest way of increasing opt-in rate is to reward visitors for submitting their e-mail addresses by offering them a gift they’d find valuable. Information products – such as online white papers, videos and calculators – make ideal gifts, because their cost per unit can be almost zero. Using this technique and a few others, Conversion Rate Experts achieved a 66 percent increase in the prospects-per-visitor rate for SOS Worldwide, a broker of office space.

7. Prospects to customers

Similar to prospects per visitor, another metric to keep an eye on is the efficiency with which you convert prospects – people who have opted in or expressed an interest in what you sell – into customers.

Conversion Rate Experts’ Dr. Blanks and Mr. Jesson recommend you monitor the rate at which you are converting qualified prospects into customers, and then carry out tests to identify factors that improve that ratio. Conversion Rate Experts more than doubled the revenues of SEOBook.com, the leading community for search marketers, by converting many of SEOBook’s free subscribers into customers. Techniques that were found to be effective included (perhaps counter intuitively) restricting the number of places available; allowing easier comparison between SEOBook and the alternatives; communicating the company’s value proposition more effectively; and simplifying its sign-up process. The trick is to establish your benchmark and tinker until you can improve it.

Acquirers have a healthy appetite for data. The more data you can give them – in the ratio format they’re used to examining – the more attractive your business will be in their eyes.

Copy of Four ways to protect your turf

Mon, 17 Feb 2025 17:22:22 GMT

If you were to draw a picture that visually represents your role in your business, what would it look like? Are you at the top of a traditional Christmas-tree-like organizational chart, or are you stuck in the middle of your business, like a hub in a bicycle wheel?

As anyone who has tried to fly United when O’Hare has been hit by a snowstorm knows, a hub-and-spoke model is only as strong as the hub. The moment the hub is overwhelmed, the entire system fails. Acquirers generally avoid hub-and-spoke managed businesses because they understand the dangers of buying a company too dependent on the owner. Here’s a list of nine warning signs you’re a hub-and-spoke owner and some suggestions for pulling yourself out of the middle of your business:

1. You sign all of the checks

Most business owners sign the checks, but what happens if you’re away for a couple of days and an important supplier needs to be paid? Consider giving an employee signing authority for checks up to an amount you’re comfortable with, and then change the mailing address on your bank statements so they are mailed to your home (not the office). That way, you can review all signed checks and make sure the privilege isn’t being abused.

2. Your mobile phone bill is over $200 a month

If your employees are out of their depth a lot, it will show up in your mobile phone bill because staff will be calling you to coach them through problems. Ask yourself if you’re hiring too many junior employees. Sometimes people with a couple of years of industry experience will be a lot more self-sufficient and only slightly more expensive than the greenhorns. Also consider getting a virtual assistant (VA), who can act as a first line of defense in protecting your time. You can find a VA by filling out the request for proposal at http://www.ivaa.org/.

3. Your revenue is flat when compared to last year’s

Flat revenue from one year to the next can be a sign you are a hub in a hub-and-spoke model. Like forcing water through a hose, you have only so much capacity. No matter how efficient you are, every business dependent on its owner reaches capacity at some point. Consider narrowing your product and service line by eliminating technically complex offers that require your personal involvement, and instead focus on selling fewer things to more people.

4. Your vacations suck

If you spend your vacations dispatching orders from your mobile, it’s time to cut the tether. Start by taking one day off and seeing how your company does without you. Build systems for failure points. Work up to a point where you can take a few weeks off without affecting your business.

5. You spend more time negotiating than a union boss

If you find yourself constantly having to get involved in approving discount requests from your customers, you are a hub. Consider giving front-line, customer-facing employees a band within which they have your approval to negotiate. You may also want to tie salespeople’s bonuses to gross margin for sales they generate so you’re rewarding their contribution to profit, not just chasing skinny margin deals.

6. You close up every night

If you’re the only one who knows the close-up routine in your business (count the cash, lock the doors, set the alarm), then you are very much a hub. Write an employee manual of basic procedures (close-up routine, e-mail footer to use, voice mail protocol) for your business and give it to new employees on their first day on the job.

7. You know all of your customers by first name

It’s good to have the pulse of your market, but knowing every single customer by first name can be a sign that you’re relying too heavily on your personal relationships being the glue that holds your business together. Consider replacing yourself as a rain maker by hiring a sales team, and as inefficient as it seems, have a trusted employee shadow you when you meet customers so over time your customers get used to dealing with someone else.

8. You get the tickets

Suppliers’ wooing you by sending you free tickets to sports events can be a sign that they see you as the key decision maker in your business for their offering. If you are the key contact for any of your suppliers, you will find yourself in the hub of your business when it comes time to negotiate terms. Consider appointing one of your trusted employees as the key contact for a major supplier and give that employee spending authority up to a limit you’re comfortable with.

9. You get cc’d on more than five e-mails a day

Employees, customers and suppliers constantly cc’ing you on e-mails can be a sign that they are looking for your tacit approval or that you have not made clear when you want to be involved in their work. Start by asking your employees to stop using the cc line in an e-mail; ask them to add you to the “to” line if you really must be made aware of something – and only if they need a specific action from you.

Four ways to protect your turf

Fri, 14 Feb 2025 17:32:05 GMT

Warren Buffett famously invests in businesses that have what he calls a protective “moat” around them – one that inoculates them from competition and allows them to control their pricing.

Big companies lock out their competitors by out-slugging them in capital infrastructure investments, but smaller businesses have to be smarter about how they defend their turf. Here are four ways to deepen and widen the protective moat around your business:

Get certified

Is there a certification program that you could take to differentiate your business? A Canadian company that disposes of radioactive waste decided to get licensed by the Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission. It was a lot of paperwork and training, but the certification process acts as a barrier against other people jumping into the market and competing.

Is there a certification you could get that would make it more difficult for others to compete with you?

Create an army of defenders

Ecstatic customers act as defenders against other competitors entering your market, a factor that has enabled companies like Trader Joe’s to defend their market share in the bourgeois bohemian (bobo) market, despite a crowded market of stores hawking groceries

Get your customers to integrate

Is there a way you can get your customers to integrate your product or service into their operations?

The basic switching costs of Customer Relationship Management (CRM) software are virtually nil. Everyone from 37signals to Salesforce.com will give you a free trial to test their wares.

The real expenses associated with changing CRM software only come when a business starts to customize the software and integrate it into the way they work. Once a sales manager has trained his salespeople in creating a weekly sales funnel in a CRM platform, try to convince him to switch software.

Can you offer your customers training in how to use what you sell to make your company stickier?

Become a verb

Think back to the last time you looked for a recipe. You probably “googled” it. Part of Google’s competitive shield is that the company name has become a verb. Now every time someone refers to searching for something online, it reinforces the competitive position of a single company.

Is there a way you could control the vocabulary people use to refer to your category or specialty?

Widening your protective moat triggers a virtuous cycle: differentiation leads to having control over your pricing, which allows for healthier margins, which in turn lead to greater profitability and the cash to further differentiate your offering.

Prevention is better than cure

Thu, 13 Feb 2025 23:24:35 GMT

To grow a valuable business – one you can sell – you need to set up your company so that it is no longer reliant on you.

This can be easier said than done, especially when, like a PR consultant or plumber, what you are selling is your expertise.

To scale up a knowledge-based business, you first have to figure out how to impart your knowledge to your employees, so that they can deliver the goods. However it can be difficult to condense years of school and on-the-job learning into a few weeks of employee training. The more specialized your knowledge, the harder it is to hand off work to juniors.

The key to scaling up a service business can often be found by offering the service that prevents customers from having to call you in the first place. You have to shift from selling the cure to selling the prevention.

Fixing what is broken is typically a hard task to teach; however, preventing things from breaking in the first place can be easier to train others to do.

For example, it takes years for a dentist to acquire the education and experience to successfully complete a root canal, but it’s relatively easy to train a hygienist to perform a regularly scheduled cleaning.

It’s almost effortless for a real estate manager to hire someone to clean the eaves trough once a month, but repairing the flooded basement caused by the clogged gutters can be quite complex.

For a master car mechanic, overhauling an engine that has seized up takes years of training, but preventing the problem by regularly changing a customer’s oil is something a high school student can be taught to do.

For an IT services company, restoring a customer’s network after a virus has invaded often takes the know-how of the boss, but preventing the virus by installing and monitoring the latest software patches is something a junior can easily be trained to do.

When you’re selling your expertise, it can be tough to hire a team to do the work for you. As ironic as it sounds, sometimes the key to getting out of doing the work is to offer a preventive service, which not only maintains your business income, but also eliminates the need for someone to call you in the first place.

Planning to Sell? How to answer THE most important question

Wed, 12 Feb 2025 16:51:18 GMT

Many business owners believe the act of selling their business is similar to passing the baton in a 400 meter relay: once you’re finished running, you get to relax. In reality, buyers will insist that you stay on for a transition period – anywhere from six months to five years – during which time you continue to work in your business to help the buyer capitalize on the investment they’re making.

THE Question

At some point in the process of selling your business, a prospective buyer will ask you – oftentimes casually – “Why do you want to sell your business?” These eight seemingly innocuous words have derailed more deals than any others.

Buyers ask THE question to evaluate how likely and willing you are to stay on or if you already have one foot out the door.

Obviously you don’t want to lie, but there is a right and wrong way to answer THE question. Answers like “I want to slow down a bit” or “I want to travel” or “we’ve got a baby on the way and I want to spend more time at home” communicate to a potential buyer that you plan on winding down when they take over. However, what they want to hear is your intention to help them realize the potential locked inside your business.

Here are some suggested responses based on your age.

If you’re under 40, you clearly aren’t ready to “retire” so you need to communicate that you see an upside in merging your business with theirs:

“In order for us to get to the next level, we need to find a partner with more <insert sales people, distribution, geographic reach, capital or whatever the partner brings to the table>.”

If you’re between 40-55 years old, most people will understand the need to shore up your personal balance sheet:

“I’ve reached a time in my life where I want to create some liquidity from the value I’ve created so far, and at the same time I want to find a partner who can help us get to the next level.”

If you’re over 55 , you can start to talk about retirement, but you want to make sure you communicate that you still have lots of energy and passion for your business.

“I’m at a stage where I need to start thinking about retirement. It’s a long way off yet, but I want to be proactive.”

Rehearse your answer to THE question so it becomes a natural response when you are inevitably asked THE question by a potential acquirer.

The C-word and 7 Others to Avoid at Work

Tue, 11 Feb 2025 20:04:38 GMT

The majority of businesses in America today started out as service companies.

If you want to own a web design firm, you don’t need a lot of money, just a technical knack. Enterprising professionals who know how to get the media’s attention can start their own public relations firms without much more than a mobile phone. No capital required.

But if you want to build a valuable company – one you can sell – you’ll want to stop presenting yourself as a service firm. Consultancies are not usually valuable businesses, because acquirers generally view them as a collection of people who peddle their time on a hamster wheel. The typical way to sell a consultancy is for the consultants themselves to trade their equity for a job, in the form of an earn-out that may or may not have an upside.

If you want to build a valuable company consider re-positioning your business out of the ‘consultancy’ box. Depending on your business, you may need to change your business model and ‘productize’ your service. One of the first things to do is to stop using consulting company terminology and replace it with the terminology of a valuable business:

Consultancy

Defining your company as a ‘consultancy’ will announce to the market you are a collection of people who have banded together around an area of expertise. Consultancies rarely get acquired, and when they do, it is usually with an earn-out. Replace ‘consultancy’ with ‘business’ or ‘company’.

Engagement

An engagement is something that happens before two people get married; therefore, using the word in a business context reinforces the people-dependent nature of your company. Replace the word ‘engagement’ with ‘contract’, and you’ll sound a lot more like a business with some lasting value.

Deck

A deck is a place to have a glass of wine. It’s not a word to use to describe a PowerPoint presentation unless you want to look like a ‘consultancy’.

Consultant

Instead of describing yourself using the vague term ‘consultant’, describe what you consult on. If you are a search engine optimization consultant, who has developed a methodology for improving a website’s natural search performance, say you ‘run an SEO company’ or ‘help companies improve their ranking on search engines, such as Google’.

Deliverables

Consultants promise ‘deliverables’. The rest of the world guarantees the features and benefits of their product or service.

Associate, engagement manager, partner

If you refer to your employees with the telltale labels of a consultancy, consider replacing ‘associate’, ‘engagement manager’ and ‘partner’ with titles like ‘manager’,” ‘director’ and ‘vice-president’, and you’ll reduce the chance of your customers expecting a bill calculated at 10-minute increments.

Clients

The word ‘client’ implies a sense of hierarchy in which service providers serve at the pleasure of their client. Companies with ‘clients’ are usually prepared to do just about anything to serve their clients’ needs, which sounds great to clients, but also telegraphs to outsiders that you customize your work to a point where you have no leverage or scalability in your business model. Would your ‘clients’ really care if you started referring to them as ‘customers’?

It’s easy to get stuck in a low-growth consulting company. ‘Clients’ expect to deal with a ‘partner’ on their ‘engagements’, so the business stalls when the partners run out of time to sell. If a company ever decides it wants to buy your consultancy, acquirers will know they have to tie up the partners on an earn-out, to transfer any of the value. When it comes to the value of your business, optics matter and the first step in avoiding the consulting company valuation discount is to stop using the lingo.

Does Your Business Have Curb Appeal?

Mon, 10 Feb 2025 17:14:53 GMT

Let’s say you’re in the market for buying a house and you go to view one that looks appealing in the ad. How does it look on the inside? The outside? What about the location? What is your general impression?

Like your house, your business projects an image to potential buyers. When they come to see your business for the first time, your “curb appeal” can attract a buyer to your business—or cause them to walk away from it.

Do you need to improve your curb appeal? Here's a three-step plan:

1. Fix Your Leaky Faucets
Perhaps, like many other business owners, you started your business from scratch with one or two employees and now you have 20 people working for you. But do you have the appropriate HR infrastructure in place for that size of a company? Perhaps you even take pride in your informal management style, but it can prove to be a liability when it comes time to sell.

Make sure your human resources policies are at least as stringent as those of the company you hope will buy your business. Some basics to have in place:

A written policy making it clear you forbid any form of harassment or discrimination;
A written letter of employment for each staff member;
A written description of your bonus system;
Written policies for employee expenses, travel and benefits.

2. Assemble Your Binder
When you go to buy a house, it will give you confidence if the owner has the instruction manuals for the appliances, information on where they were purchased, and who to call if one of them breaks down.

Similarly, when a potential buyer looks at your company, he wants to see that you have your business information in order. Documenting your office procedures, core processes, and other intellectual capital can help you attract more bidders and a higher price for your company, while also lowering the chance of the deal falling apart during diligence.

If you want to attract a buyer one day, your business needs a binder with instructions for basic functions, such as:

Opening up in the morning and closing down at night;
Forms and step-by-step instructions for routine tasks;
Templates for key documents;
Emergency numbers for service providers;
Billing procedures for customers.
How your company is positioned in the market and your marketing tools.

3. Document Your Intangibles
Intangibles for house buying might include: Is the house near a good school or daycare? What kind of neighborhood is it? What kind of commute are you looking at to get to work?

Your business also has intangible, often intellectual, assets that a potential buyer needs to be made aware of, such as:

Proprietary research you’ve conducted;
A formula for acquiring new customers;
Criteria you use to evaluate a potential new location;
Your unique approach to satisfying a customer.

As with selling a house, your company's curb appeal can go a long way toward closing a deal.

Is Now the Time To Sell Your Business?

Fri, 07 Feb 2025 17:00:58 GMT

Have you been thinking about selling your business but just can’t decide if now is the best time? Do you find yourself repeatedly analyzing the economic situation and wishing you had a crystal ball? There are positive signs and there are negative signs….

If you’re still up in the air and can’t quite decide whether or not to hit the eject button, here are six reasons you might want to consider getting out now.

1. You’re less interested in fighting the good fight

A lot of business owners took the Great Recession in the teeth. If you’ve got your business stabilized and the prospect of possibly having to fight through another recession leaves you panic-stricken, it could be time for you to get out.

2. The worst is behind you
Let’s say you were mentally ready to consider selling a few years ago and then 2008 hit and 2009 was bad, and in 2010 and 2011 you made cuts and adjustments, so now you’re starting to see some profit and revenue growth. With your numbers going in the right direction, now might be just the right time to make your move.

3. The tax man is coming

Governments around the world are looking for money to fund the cost of an aging population. At some point this will mean increased taxes.

4. Nobody is lucky forever
If you’re lucky enough to be in a business that actually benefits from a bad economy, congratulations... you’ve probably just had the four best years of your business life. But no cycle lasts forever and right now might be a great time to take some chips off the table.

5. The coming glut

As a business owner, demographics are not on your side. As the baby boomers start to retire in droves, we’re going to have a glut of small businesses coming on the market. That’s great if you’re buying; but if you’re a seller, you may want to avoid the flood and head for higher ground now.

6. The closing window

Since 2008, it’s been tougher for private equity companies to raise money; so many firms had their last successful round of fundraising a number of years ago. Many of these funds have a five-year window in which to invest or they have to give the money back to the people who gave it to them. Some boutique private equity firms will make investments in companies that have at least one million dollars in pre-tax profits (larger private equity firms will not go below $3 million in EBITDA); so if you’re in the seven-figure club, you could get a bidding war going for your business among private equity buyers keen to invest their money before they have to give it back.

CAUTION: DO NOT POKE THE GIANT

Thu, 06 Feb 2025 17:29:59 GMT

On June 1, 2011, both Floyd’s Coffee Shops in Portland, Oregon were busier than usual. The regulars were elbowed out of the way by new customers visiting the store for the first time to redeem their coupon and get $10 worth of coffee for $3.

This tempting offer was made because Floyd’s had been picked as the first-ever Google Offers “deal.” Google Offers is the company’s first baby step into the world of “social buying” style promotions where a special, limited time offer is made by a business hoping that the deal will spread virally and thereby introduce a new legion of customers to their business.

Google, of course, did not invent the deal-of-the-day category; they were goaded into it after their generous $6 billion dollar offer to buy Groupon was turned down.

Now Groupon is starting to feel the pinch after thumbing their nose at one of the world’s most valuable companies. According to compete.com , Groupon’s traffic went from 33.7 million unique visitors in June 2011 to just 18.3 million unique visitors in January 2012. That’s a drop of almost half inside less than a year. Not surprisingly, Groupon’s stock is also down around 25% since its IPO last year.

Over-playing your hand

The moral of the story is to be careful not to over-play your hand when being approached by someone who wants to buy your company. Acquirers usually have deep pockets and, while you may think your business is unique, never underestimate the resolve of a big company with lots of cash.

They do have an alternative to buying you: they can simply compete with you.

Typically when they make the decision to walk away from the negotiation table they do not leave empty-handed. They come away with new-found insight on how you run your business, what works, and what flops; so they have an enormous head start to launch a competitive company.

And it doesn’t just happen in Silicon Valley. Take a hypothetical example of a home security company generating $500,000 per year in profit (before tax) installing and monitoring home alarms. One day a big alarm company comes along and says they want to buy the business and they’re willing to pay four times pre tax profit. The alarm company owner turns up his nose and demands six times earnings.

Now the suitor has a choice. They can try and negotiate with the owner, but that would undermine the economics of the model they’ve used to buy hundreds of similar alarm companies across the country, or they can simply hire someone to start an office to compete with him.

Let’s say they pick door number two and hire a young, aggressive manager. They guarantee her $200,000 a year in the first 12 months on the job while she is building her business. You have not only lost the opportunity to sell your business; you’re now competing against a young, motivated rival with a parent company who has an extra $1,800,000 ($2,000,000 withdrawn offer minus the $200,000/ year salary for their manager) that they didn’t use to buy you and they’re putting it towards helping your new competitor build her business.

If you’re lucky enough to get approached by a big company who wants to buy yours, remember that they are usually not choosing between buying you or buying your competitor. They are often choosing between buying you or setting up shop to compete with you.

7 things to do before signing a Letter of Intent

Wed, 05 Feb 2025 16:59:42 GMT

You may be years away from selling your business, but it’s never too early to understand what the process involves.

If you have ever promised your child a treat in return for good behavior, you know all about negotiating leverage. When selling an attractive business, you also have leverage—but only up to the point where you sign a letter of intent (LOI), which almost always includes a “no shop” clause requiring you to terminate discussions with other potential buyers while your newfound “fiancé” does due diligence.

After you sign the LOI, however, the balance of power in the negotiation swings heavily in favor of the buyer, who can then take their time investigating your company. At the same time, with each passing day, you will likely become more psychologically committed to selling your business. Savvy buyers know this and can drag out diligence for months, coming up with things that justify lowering their offer price or demanding better terms.

With your leverage diminished and other suitors sidelined, you are then left with the unattractive options of either accepting the inferior terms or walking away.

Here are seven things you can do—before you even put your business up for sale, and before signing an LOI—to minimize the chances of your deal dragging on for months and becoming watered down:

1. Make sure your customer contracts have “successor” clauses.

Have customers sign long-term, standardized contracts, including a clause stating that the obligations of the contract survive any change in company ownership.

2. Nurture and prepare a group of 10 to 15 “reference-able” customers.

Acquirers will want to ask your customers why they do business with you and not your competitors. Before you sign the LOI, cultivate a group of customers to act as references.

3. Ensure your management team is all on the same page.

During due diligence, acquirers will want to interview your managers without you in the room. They want to find out if everyone in your company is pulling in the same direction.

4. Consider getting audited financials.

An acquirer will have more confidence in your numbers and will perceive less risk if your books are audited by a recognized accounting firm.

5. Disclose the risks up front.

Every company has some risk factors. Disclose any legal or accounting hiccups before you sign the LOI.

6. Negotiate down the due diligence period.

Most acquirers will ask for a period of 60 or 90 days to complete their due diligence. You may be able to negotiate this down to 45 days—perhaps even 30 with some financial buyers. If nothing else, you'll alert the acquirer to the fact that you're not willing to see the diligence drag out past the agreed-to close date.

7. Make it clear there are others at the table.

Explain that, while you think the acquirer's offer is the strongest and you intend to honor the “no shop” agreement, there are other interested parties at the table.

If you take all seven of these steps, you will protect the value of your business as the balance of power in the negotiations to sell your company swings from you to the buyer.

8 Questions You’ll Be Asked When Selling Your Business

Tue, 04 Feb 2025 17:04:18 GMT

One of the most intimidating aspects of selling your business can be facing the barrage of questions during the various management presentations you’ll be doing for potential acquirers. Be prepared to be grilled on all facets of your operations. Of course every meeting will be different, but here are some questions you can expect to be asked when you’re in the hot seat:

1. Why do you want to sell your business?

It's a slippery question because if your business truly does have a bright future—and you want the buyer to believe that's the case—the obvious question is: “Why do you want to sell it, and do would you want to sell it now?”

2. What is your cost per new customer acquired?

The potential acquirer wants to find out if you have a predictable, economical and scalable formula for finding new customers.

3. What is your market penetration rate?

The acquirer, with an eye to future growth, is trying to understand how big the potential market is for your product or service and what part of the field remains to be harvested.

4. Who are the critical members of your team?

The acquirer wants to understand the breadth and depth of your team and determine specifically which members need to be motivated and retained post-purchase.

5. Who buys what you sell?

Strategic buyers will be searching for any possible synergies between what you sell and what they sell. The more you know about your customer demographics, the better the buyer will be able to assess the strategic fit. If your customers are other businesses, a buyer will want to know what functional role (e.g., training manager, VP of sales and marketing) buys your product or service.

6. How do you make what you sell?

This question is asked in an effort to size up the uniqueness of your formula for creating your product or service. Potential buyers want to know if you have any proprietary systems that would be hard for a competitor to replicate. For various reasons, they will also want to understand if the creation of your product or service is dependent on any one person.

7. What makes your product truly unique?

A buyer is trying to understand how big the moat is around your business and what kind of protection it offers from competitors who may decide to compete with you in the future. What have you done to safeguard yourself against the competition?

8. Can you describe your back-office setup?

Most buyers will try to understand how easily they can integrate your back office into their operation. They'll want to know what bookkeeping and billing software you use, how customers pay, and how you pay suppliers.

Of course this is not an exhaustive list, but it’s a good start when you’re preparing to represent your company to your potential buyers.

The Hierarchy of Recurring Revenue

Mon, 03 Feb 2025 17:31:30 GMT

How to make your company irresistible to potential buyers

One of the biggest factors in determining the value of your company is the extent to which an acquirer can see where your sales will come from in the future. If you’re in a business that starts from scratch each month, the value of your company will be lower than if you can demonstrate the source or sources of your future revenue. A recurring revenue stream acts like a powerful pair of binoculars for you – and your potential acquirer – to see months or years into the future; creating an annuity stream is the best way to increase the desirability and value of your company.

The surer your future revenue is, the higher the value the market will place on your business. Here is the hierarchy of recurring revenue presented from least to most valuable in the eyes of an acquirer.

No. 6: Consumables (e.g., shampoo, toothpaste)

These are disposable items that customers purchase regularly, but they have no particular motivation to repurchase from one seller or to be brand loyal.

No. 5: Sunk-money consumables (e.g., razor blades)

This is where the customer first makes an investment in a platform. For example, once you buy a razor you have a vested interest in buying compatible blades.

No. 4: Renewable subscriptions (e.g., magazines)

Typically, subscriptions are paid for in advance, creating a positive cash-flow cycle.

No. 3: Sunk-money renewable subscriptions (e.g., the Bloomberg Terminal)

Traders and money managers swear by their Bloomberg Terminal; and they have to first buy or lease the terminal in order to subscribe to Bloomberg’s financial information.

No. 2: Automatic-renewal subscriptions (e.g., document storage)

When you store documents with Iron Mountain, you are automatically charged a fee each month as long as you continue to use the service.

No. 1: Contracts (e.g., wireless phones)

As much as we may despise being tied to them, wireless companies have mastered the art of recurring revenue. Many give customers free phones if they lock into a two or three-year contract.

When you put your business up for sale, you’re selling the future, not just the present. So if you don’t have a recurring revenue stream, consider how best to create one, given your type of business. It will increase the predictability of your revenue, the value of your business, and the interest of potential acquirers as they look to the future.

Is Your Business You-Proof?

Fri, 31 Jan 2025 17:12:35 GMT

Whether you’re planning to sell your company sometime soon or sometime in the future; now is the time to ensure that your business isn’t all about you . From the latest Value Builder Score* research involving 2300 companies from around the globe, here are two key factors that are linked to the probability of getting an offer for your business when it’s time to sell.

#1: You’re almost twice as likely to get an offer if your business can survive the “hit-by-a-bus” test.

If you were out of action for three months and unable to work, would your business keep running smoothly? The more your staff and customers need you , the less valuable your company will be to a potential acquirer. One good way to start making your business more independent is to begin spending less time at the office. Start by not working evenings or weekends, and don’t reply if employees call. Once they get the picture, the best ones will start making more decisions independently. The shift will also expose your weakest employees, the ones that need training or that need to find another job. As for you, it might come as a shock to find out how much your business has become such an essential part of you; but if you’re going to sell your business one day, you need to look at it as an inanimate economic engine, not as something that defines who you are.

#2: Companies with a management team (as opposed to a sole manager) are getting offers at almost twice the rate.

If you don’t have a management team, hiring a 2iC is a good first move. A second-in-command can help you balance the demands of running your company and advance your targeted exit time.

Here’s a four-step plan for hiring a 2iC, thanks to advice from Silicon-Valley-based Bob Sutton, author of Good Boss, Bad Boss.

1: Identify someone internally . "The research is clear," says Sutton. "Unless things are totally screwed up, internal candidates have a strong tendency to outperform external leaders."

2: Give your 2iC prospect(s) a special project , one that allows them to demonstrate their leadership skills to you and the rest of your team. If your candidate or one of your candidates excels, it will be clear to your team why he or she was selected.

3: Communicate your choice . If you pick a 2iC from an internal pool, explain your choice to the rest of your team. At the same time, wrap your arms around those you passed over and make it clear how much you value their contribution.

4: Shift from manager to coach . "The transition from manager to coach is a gradual evolution where the goal is to ask more questions, spend more time listening, and spend less time talking and directing," says Sutton.

Avoiding the superstar sales rep trap

Thu, 30 Jan 2025 17:06:44 GMT

For your business to be valuable – and sellable one day – you need some way to generate sales after you’re gone. Many business owners hire a superstar salesperson to replace themselves as a rainmaker but that’s a trap.

By replacing yourself with a single salesperson, you’re simply trading a dependency on you to dependence on a sales rep, and your business will be no more sellable as a result. When we analyzed the users of The Value Builder Score, a self-assessment test business owners use to understand how to drive up the value of their company, we found that businesses who could easily replace their top salesperson are more than twice as likely to get an offer to buy their business than those companies who are overly reliant on a single salesperson.

To be as valuable as possible, your company needs a sales team – not just a single salesperson. But how do you build an entire sales team? Wouldn’t it be more prudent to hire a sales rep first? The answer is no. Hiring a single sales rep will only keep your business reliant on one person. You need a team and the faster the better. Here are three tips for building a sales team on a shoestring:

1. Charge up front

Sales reps are expensive to find and train, so in order to avoid running out of cash before they are fully ramped up, consider switching your customer billing cycle to charging some or all of your bill up front. If you stagger your billing, you can simply ask for a larger portion of your payment up front. If half your customers agree to the larger deposit, you’ll have more cash to build your sales team and more time for them to train up.

You might also consider switching to a subscription or service contract model as most people are used to paying for subscriptions up front. Try for an annual contract with an incentive for full payment in advance. For example, if you charged $1,000 per month for a maintenance contract but offered clients a $10,000/year option provided they paid up front, you would have ten thousand dollars in the bank for each contract sold. If a fully ramped up sales rep is able to sell ten service contracts a month, would it be reasonable to assume a new rep could sell three per month? If so, a new rep should be able to quickly get to the point where they are covering their monthly cost to you.

2. Carve territory into small chunks

Sales territory is an asset of your company and, like giving candy to a baby, it is easy to offer and hard to take back. Carve up your market into sales territories that provide enough opportunity for each rep to make money. It’s okay to leave a territory unfilled for years, so avoid the temptation to give the territory to another rep, as it will become impossible to take back when you’re ready to fill the position.

3. Hire a second rep as quickly as possible

If at all possible, start by hiring two sales people, not just one. Sales people thrive on competition, and in order to be a sellable company, you need to be able to demonstrate to a buyer that your sales are driven by a sales team and not just a high performing salesperson. If you’re charging up front or on a subscription model, you should be able to quickly get to the point where each sales rep is at least covering their costs to you.

Replacing yourself as your company’s rainmaker is the right strategy, but avoid trading a dependency on you to dependence on a superstar sales rep. Instead, hire a sales team and watch your company – and its value – grow exponentially.

The Curator: how to thrive as a middleman

Wed, 29 Jan 2025 17:55:55 GMT

Being a middleman (or woman) has become risky business.

When was the last time you used a travel agent? Agencies have largely become irrelevant given the rise of online travel booking companies.

How about a record/CD store? iTunes and online music subscription services have gotten rid of the middleman between you and your music.

Think back to the last time you rented a movie – did you get in your car to visit the local movie rental store?

Travel agents, record/CD stores and movie rental businesses have all fallen victim to the curse of the middleman. When all you do is move other people’s product, the only value you have is your location. But in a world where content can be streamed and containers can be shipped overnight, being the local guy or gal is becoming irrelevant. Even if you have a protected geographic territory, near perfect pricing information available to your customers through the Internet will eventually grind down your margins.

Dragging down your value

Not only do you risk losing sales and margin to online competitors; being a middleman drags down the value of your company.

We have access to a tool that measures your business along eight dimensions that drive the value of your business. One factor is called The Switzerland Structure, which measures your reliance on any one customer, employee or supplier.

If you’re reliant on a single supplier who provides the goods you resell, you could be in trouble. Having one or two suppliers means you could be at risk of an industry change (like the one that hit record stores a few years ago) or at risk of your supplier choosing to build his own sales force and start competing directly with you.

Henry Schein: a valuable middleman

If you’re a middleman, the solution is to rethink the value you provide your customers. Instead of assuming it is your location that counts, consider yourself a curator of great products for your customers. Your job is no longer to be the local guy or gal but to be the person who sifts through all the noise, tests and evaluates what’s available, and supplies just the very best for customers who value – and are willing to pay for – your services as a curator.

Take, for example, the case of Henry Schein, Inc., a FORTUNE 500 company and a member of the NASDAQ 100 Index. Henry Schein is the world's largest provider of health care products and services to medical, dental, and veterinary office-based practitioners. The company is one of Fortune Magazine's "World’s Most Admired Companies” and all it does is hawk other people’s stuff.

The difference is that they see their job as sifting through all of the suppliers who want to provide products to dentists (or doctors, vets, etc.) and picking only the very best to recommend to their clients. They are the uber gatekeepers.

Dentists would prefer to spend their time billing patients rather than meeting with suppliers, so they value the role Henry Schein plays in helping them minimize the number of sales people they need to see.

Dentists’ loyalty to Henry Schein means that if a supplier wants to sell to dentists, they need to go through Henry Schein. The balance of power has been turned on its head because customers would prefer to buy from Henry Schein rather than directly from the end supplier. And that’s the acid test of any middleman: given the choice, would your customers rather buy from you or go direct?

Have you fallen into The Mile Wide Trap?

Tue, 28 Jan 2025 16:39:41 GMT

If your company’s revenue has stalled after a period of rapid growth, you may have fallen into The Mile Wide Trap.

Consider the case of Kim (not her real name) who runs a public relations firm. Kim studied marketing at school and went on to work for a big advertising agency where she spent ten years learning a variety of marketing disciplines, from public relations to advertising to direct marketing and social media.

Then Kim decided to leave her job to start a public relations firm. Given her depth of experience and connections, she quickly landed tractor giant John Deere as a client and was asked to handle their regional dealer events. She hired some helpers and her start-up agency quickly began to grow. Kim did a great job with the dealer events, so John Deere asked her to handle their annual sales conference. Again she delivered with style and creativity.

Impressed by Kim’s innovative approach to the event, John Deere asked her to handle some of the creative for their next advertising campaign. Kim had started her company to do PR, not advertising, but John Deere was a great client so she agreed to help out with the ads.

Then John Deere asked her to take a look at their website. Kim’s new employees had no experience with web design, but Kim had done some website jobs back at the ad agency. Not wanting to disappoint John Deere, Kim started to personally handle projects that her employees didn’t have the ability to execute.

Kim didn’t worry about new business development for own firm because the more John Deere asked Kim to do, the busier – and more profitable – her firm became.

Then one day Kim looked at her monthly P&L statement and realized that, for the first time, their sales were flat on a month-over-month basis. The next month it happened again and then again. Kim had run out of hours in the day to sell – she had inadvertently fallen into The Mile Wide Trap.

The Mile Wide Trap

The Mile Wide Trap ensnares you when you do an excellent job serving a small number of great customers and they ask you to handle more of their work. You keep delivering, and they keep broadening the list of products and services they want you to supply.

Your company is wildly profitable serving the expanding needs of this small list of “great customers” so you keep falling deeper and deeper into the trap.

Pretty soon, you’re an inch deep and a mile wide in offerings and the only person in your company with the depth of industry experience to deliver all of the services is you. But you’re trapped because your expenses have crept up as your revenue has exploded – leaving you dependent on the sales you get from a small group of demanding customers.

With no more hours in the day, your company stalls and you run on a hamster wheel just trying to keep what you’ve got.

The Solution: Sell less stuff to more people.

Instead of selling more things to a few customers, concentrate on selling a few things to a lot of customers.

Nashville-based Ethos3 is a successful design firm that has avoided The Mile Wide Trap. Most design firms are founded by a designer who gets himself in trouble by offering a broad range of design services (brochures, websites, signage, advertising) to a handful of clients. But founder Scott Schwertly knew that in order to scale up beyond himself, he needed his employees to execute the work, and therefore he decided to focus on one very small corner of the design business: PowerPoint presentations.

Schwertly’s focus on PowerPoint has allowed him to train his employees to follow his system for designing presentations. Everything is standardized – from the proposal to project management to the final invoice – so employees can follow a system that doesn’t require Schwertly. Ethos3 has scaled up nicely and counts Microsoft, Google and Cisco among its 300+ customers.

Another example: Flikli.com is a video production studio, but instead of making videos of all kinds, they’ve decided to focus exclusively on two-minute animated “explainer” videos that explain a company’s value proposition simply and effectively. Their focus on creating one specific type of product allows them to standardize their pricing and give employees a step-by-step guide to making great explainer videos. Flikli has scaled up to 22 employees and their work has been featured in everything from Wired Magazine to The Washington Post.

You can fall into The Mile Wide Trap innocently enough: you do great work and a customer wants more of you. But it’s a trap that will eventually choke off your growth. The way out is to follow Flikli and Ethos3 and focus on selling less stuff to more people.

Justification for Your Next Vacation

Mon, 27 Jan 2025 17:32:58 GMT

A recent survey by The Value Builder Score found companies that would perform well without their owner for a period of three months are 50 percent more likely to get an offer to be acquired when compared to more owner-dependent businesses.

There is no better justification for taking a blissful, uninterrupted holiday than to see how your company performs in your absence. The better your company runs on autopilot, the more valuable it will be when you’re ready to sell.

To gauge your company’s ability to handle your absence, start by taking a vacation. Leave your computer at home and switch off your mobile. Upon your return, you’ll probably discover that your employees got resourceful and found answers to a lot of the questions they would have asked you if you had been just down the hall. That’s a good thing and a sign you should start planning an even longer vacation.

You’ll also likely come back to an inbox full of issues that need your personal attention. Instead of busily finding answers to each problem in a frenzied attempt to clean up your inbox, slow down and look at each issue through the lens of a possible problem with your people, systems or authorizations.

People

Start with your people and answer the following questions:

Why did this problem end up on my desk?
Who else is qualified to answer this question and why was that person not consulted?
If nobody else is qualified, who can be trained to answer this question in the future?

Systems

Next, look at your systems and procedures. Could the issue have been dealt with if you had a system or a set of rules in place? The best systems are hardwired and do not require human interpretation; but if you’re not able to lock down a technical fix, then at least give employees a set of rules to follow in the future.

Authorizations

You may be a bottleneck in your own company if you’re trying to control spending too much. Employees may know what to do but do not have any means of paying for the fix they know you would want.

For example, you could put a customer service rule in place that gives your front line staff the authority to make a customer happy in any way they see fit provided it could be done for under $100.

You might allow an employee to spend a specific amount with a specific supplier each month without coming to you first. Or you might give an employee an annual budget, an amount they can spend without seeking your approval.

Given the fires that may need to be extinguished after the fact, taking a holiday may seem more of a hassle than it’s worth. But if you transform the aftermath of a vacation into systems and training that allow employees to act on their own, you’ll find the vacation is worth what you paid for it many times over: your company will increase in value as it becomes less dependent on you personally.

Do you have a billion dollar business hiding inside your company?

Fri, 24 Jan 2025 17:13:08 GMT

Asking customers to pay to join a special group of your best patrons can increase your revenue, encourage customers to buy new products and services from you, and provide a healthy boost to your cash flow. Just ask Jeff Bezos, the founder of Amazon.com and the chief architect behind Amazon Prime. In exchange for $79 a year, Amazon Prime customers get:

Free two-day shipping on millions of items
Unlimited streaming videos and TV shows
350,000 books to borrow for free.

It’s a compelling offer, which is why, according to TIME Magazine, more than 10 million people have signed up. If you do the math, that makes Prime close to a billion-dollar business for Amazon. And like most programs, members pay upfront, giving Amazon a big injection of positive cash flow.

But what is even more interesting is what being a member of Prime does to the buying behavior of the average Amazon customer. Prime customers pay their $79 upfront and therefore are eager to ‘get their money back’ by purchasing a bigger and broader array of products from Amazon. With free shipping and a $79 nut to recover, Prime customers go well beyond buying books from Amazon and now get everything from tires to turtlenecks from the e-tailer. According to TIME, the average Prime customer now spends $1,224 per year with Amazon vs. the average non-Prime customer who spends just $505. In other words, Prime customers spend almost three times more per year than non-members.

Most businesses have some sort of loyalty program (buy nine sandwiches and the tenth is on us or get five hairs cuts and the sixth is free). The difference with Amazon Prime is they are charging customers to sign up for their special club and the fact that customers pay to join changes their buying behavior to want to recover their membership fee.

Amazon did not invent the pay-to-join-our-club business model. Private members clubs have been doing it for years. To join an elite golf club, you pay an initiation fee of tens of thousands of dollars, which then acts as a barrier to ever leaving. But as with Amazon Prime customers, becoming a member also changes a member’s buying behavior regarding other items. When compared to someone shooting 18 holes at a public course, the average golf club member is much more likely to buy balls from the shop, lessons from the pro, and dinner from the dining room.

The “AMC Stubs” loyalty program charges moviegoers to join the club. In return, customers get free upgrades on the size of popcorn and drink orders, along with $10 of Stubs rewards to spend on anything in the theatre in return for every $100 spent. AMC’s best customers become even better customers by going to the movies even more often and filling up with goodies while they’re there.

Look at the spending patterns of people who pay a premium to join a credit card company’s loyalty program. Customers who pay upfront for a premium card charge a much broader and deeper set of services to their card than people using a freebie card.

Getting your customers to pay to join your elite customer club requires that you design a compelling offer as Amazon Prime and AMC Stubs have done. But if you build it right, not only will the club itself turn a profit; it will also provide a quick boost to your cash flow and create a legion of sticky customers who buy more because they paid to become a member.

The hidden goal of the smartest business owners

Thu, 23 Jan 2025 17:25:08 GMT

What are your business goals for the year? If you’re like most owners, you have a profit goal you want to hit. You may also have a top line revenue number that’s important to you. While those goals are important, there is another objective that may have an even bigger payoff: building a sellable business.

But what if you don’t want to sell? That’s irrelevant. Here are five reasons why building a sellable business should be your most important goal, regardless of when you plan to push the eject button:

1. Sellability means freedom

One of the fundamental tenants of sellability is how well your company would perform if you were unable to work for a while. As long as your business is dependent on you personally, there’s not much to sell. Making your company less dependent on you by building a management team and creating just-add-water systems for employees to follow means you have the ability to spend time away from your business. Think of the world of possibilities that would open up if you could choose not to go into the office tomorrow….

2. Sellable businesses are more fun

Running a business would be fun if you were able to spend your days on strategic thinking and big picture ideas. Instead, most business owners spend the majority of their day on the minutia: the government forms, the employee performance reviews, bank reconciliations, customer issues, auditing expenses. The boring details of company ownership suck the enjoyment out of owning a business—and it is exactly these tasks you need to get into someone else’s job description if you’re ever going to sell.

3. Sellability is financial freedom

Each month you open your brokerage statement to see how your portfolio is doing. Not because you want to sell your portfolio, but because you want to know where you stand on the journey to financial freedom. Creating a sellable business also allows you peace of mind, knowing that you’re building something that—just like your stock portfolio—has value you could choose to make liquid one day.

4. Sellability is a gift

Imagine that your first-born graduates from college and as a gift you give him your prized 1967 Shelby Ford Mustang. Your heavily indebted child takes it on the road, but after a few miles, the engine starts smoking. The mechanic takes one look under the hood and declares that the engine needs a rebuild.

You thought you were giving your child an incredible asset, but instead it’s an expensive liability he can’t afford to keep, and nor can he sell it without feeling guilty.

You may be planning to pass your business on to your kids or let your young managers buy into your company over time. These are both admirable exit options, but if your business is too dependent on you, and it hasn’t been tuned up to run without you, you may be passing along a jalopy.

5. Nine women can’t make a baby in one month

There are some things in life that take time, no matter how much you want to rush them. Making your business sellable often requires significant changes; and a prospective buyer is going to want to see how your business has performed for the three years after you have made the changes required to make your business sellable. Therefore, if you want to sell in five years, you need to start making your business sellable now so the changes have time to gestate.

Growth vs. Value: not all revenue is created equally

Wed, 22 Jan 2025 20:24:02 GMT

When you look ahead to next year, will your growth come from selling more to your existing customers or finding new customers for your existing products and services?

The answer may have a profound impact on the value of your business.

Take a look at the research coming from a recent analysis of owners who completed their Value Builder Score questionnaire. We looked at 5,364 businesses and found that the average company that had received an overture from an acquirer was offered 3.5 times their pre-tax profit. When we isolated just the businesses that had a historical growth rate of 20 percent or greater, the multiple offered improved to 4.3 times pre-tax profit, or about 20 percent more than their slower growth counterparts.

However, the real bump in multiple came when we isolated just those companies that claim to have a unique product or service for which they have a virtual monopoly. The niche companies enjoyed average offers of 5.4 times pre-tax profit, or roughly 50 percent more than the average companies, and fully 20 percent more than the fastest growth companies.

Nurture your niche

Chasing “bad” revenue by offering a wide array of products and services is common among growth companies. The easiest way to grow is to sell more things to your existing customers, so you just keep adding adjacent product and service lines. But when a strategic acquirer buys your business, they are buying something they cannot easily replicate on their own.

A large company will place less value on the revenue derived from products and services that you have in common. They will argue that their economies of scale put them in a better position to sell the things that you both offer today.

Likewise, they will pay the largest premium to get access to a new product or service they can sell to their customers. Big, mature companies have customers and systems, but they sometimes lack innovation; and many choose a strategy of acquisition as a way to buy their innovation.

Focusing on your niche is one of many areas where the long-term value of your business is at odds with short-term profit. For example, if you wanted to maximize your short-term profit, you might avoid investing in new technology or hiring a head of sales, arguing that both investments would hinder short-term profit. The truly valuable company finds a way to deliver profit in the short term while simultaneously focusing their strategy on what drives up the value of the business.

Will your business be more valuable this time next year?

Tue, 21 Jan 2025 18:45:48 GMT

For many, January is a time of rebirth and resolutions. It’s a month to reflect on last year’s achievements and to set goals for the year ahead.

Some people will set personal goals like losing weight or quitting a nasty habit, and most company owners will set business goals that focus on hitting certain revenue or profit milestones. But if your goal is to own a more valuable business in 2014, you may want to make one of the following New Year’s resolutions:

Take a two-week vacation without checking in with the office. When you return, you’ll see how well your company performed and where you need to make a key hire or create a new system.

Write down at least one process per month. You know you need to document your systems, but you may be overwhelmed by the task of taking what’s inside your head and putting it down in writing for others to follow. Resolve to document one system a month and by the end of the year you’ll own a more sellable company.

Offload at least one customer relationship. If you’re like most business owners, you’re still your company’s best salesperson, but this can be a liability in the eyes of an acquirer, which is why you should wean your customers off relying on you as their point person. By the time you sell, none of your key customers should think of you as their relationship manager.

Cultivate a new relationship with a new supplier. Having a “go to” group of suppliers is great, but an over-reliance on one or two suppliers can create a liability for your business. By spreading some of your business to other suppliers, you keep your best suppliers hungry and you can make a case to an acquirer that you have other sources of supply for your critical inputs.

Create a recurring revenue stream. Valuable companies can look into the future and see where their revenue is going to come from. Recurring revenue models can vary from charging customers a small amount for a special level of service to offering a warranty or service contract.

Find your lease (and any other key contracts). When it comes time to sell your company, a buyer will want to see your lease and understand your obligations to your landlord. Having your lease handy can save time and avoid any nasty surprises at the eleventh hour in the process of selling your company.

Check your contracts and make sure they would survive the change of ownership of your company. If not, talk to your lawyer about adding a line to your agreements that states the obligations of the contract “surviving” in the event of a change of ownership of your company.

Start tracking your Net Promoter Score (NPS). The NPS methodology is the best predictor that your customers will re-purchase from you and/or refer you, which are two key indicators of a healthy and successful company. It’s also why many strategic acquirers and private equity companies use NPS as a way to measure the health of their acquisition targets during due diligence.

Get your Value Builder Score. All goals start with a benchmark of where you’re at today, and by understanding your company’s Value Builder Score, you can pinpoint how you’re doing now and which areas of your business are dragging down your company’s value.

A lot of company owners will set New Year’s resolutions around their revenue or profits for the year ahead, but those goals are blunt instruments. Instead of just building a bigger company, also consider making this the year you build a more valuable one.

6 little things that make a big difference to the value of your company

Fri, 17 Jan 2025 19:53:37 GMT

With the Sochi Olympic Games taking place this month, it is interesting to reflect back on some of the big events of the 2010 Olympic Games in Vancouver.

In the Men’s Downhill race at Whistler, for example, the winning time of 1:54:31 was posted by Didier Défago of Switzerland. The time among medalists was the closest in Olympic history, and while Mario Scheiber of Austria posted a time of 1:54:52 – just two tenths of a second slower than Défago – he finished out of the medals in fourth place.

In ski racing, one fifth of a second can be lost in the tiniest of miscalculations. And when it comes to selling your business, markets can be equally cruel. Get everything right, and you can successfully sell your business for a premium. Misjudge a couple of minor details and a buyer can walk, leaving you with nothing.

Here is a list of six little details to get right before you put your business on the market:

1. Find your lease. If you rent space, you may be required to notify your landlord if you intend to sell your company. Read through the fine print and ensure you’re not scrambling at the last minute to seek permission from your landlord to sell.

2. Professionalize your books. Consider having audited financial statements prepared to give a buyer confidence in your bookkeeping.

3. Stop using your company as an ATM. Many business owners run trips and other perks through their business, but if you’re planning to sell, these treats will artificially depress your earnings, which will reduce the value of your company in the eyes of a buyer by much more than the value of the perks.

4. Protect your gross margin. Oftentimes, when leading up to being listed for sale, companies grow by chasing low-margin business. You tell yourself you need top-line growth, but when an acquirer sees your growth has come at the expense of your gross margin, she will question your pricing authority and assume your journey to the bottom of the commoditization heap has begun.

5. If you’re lucky enough to have formal contracts with your customers, make sure your customer contracts include a “survivor clause” stipulating that the obligations of the contract “survive” the change of ownership of your company. That way, your customers can’t use the sale of your company to wiggle out of their commitments to your business. Have a lawyer paper the language to ensure it has teeth in your jurisdiction.

6. Get your Value Builder Score. Take 13 minutes to answer the Value Builder questionnaire now. You’ll see how you performed on the eight key drivers of company value and you can identify any gaps you need to fill before taking your business to market.

Like competing in the Olympics, selling a business can be an all-or-nothing affair. Get it right and you will walk away a winner. Fumble your preparation, and you could end up out of the medals.

5 “strategic” ways to sell your company

Thu, 16 Jan 2025 18:52:30 GMT

Did you see the news that Facebook has recently acquired Internet messaging service WhatsApp for $19 billion? It represents the largest-ever acquisition of an Internet company in history.

WhatsApp is a pearl for sure. The messaging service allows users to avoid text-messaging charges by moving texts across the Internet instead of the mobile phone carrier networks. This can save people who travel, or who live in emerging markets, hundreds of dollars a year, which is why WhatsApp is adding one million new users per day.

At the time of the acquisition in February 2014, WhatsApp had acquired some 450 million users. Their business model is to charge a subscription of $1 per year after their first full year of service. Even if all 450 million WhatsApp users were already paying, that is still less than half a billion in revenue. Why would Facebook acquire WhatsApp for a number that is somewhere north of 40 times revenue?

Nobody know for sure what is in Mark Zuckerberg’s head, but we can only assume that at least part of the opportunity Facebook sees is the opportunity to sell more Facebook ads because of the information they glean from WhatsApp users. Global advertising giant Publicis estimates 2013 online advertising spending in the US alone to be around $500 billion. Presumably Facebook believes they can get a larger chunk of the global online ad buy because they know more about its users by owning WhatsApp.

And therein lies the definition of a strategic acquisition. Most acquisitions run a predictable pattern of industry norms, but a strategic can pay a significant premium for your business because they are looking at your business for what it is worth in their hands. Rather than forecasting out your future profits and estimating what that cash is worth in today’s dollars, a strategic is calculating the economic benefit of grafting your business onto theirs.

There can be many strategic reasons why a big company might want to buy yours. Here are a few to consider:

1. To control their supply chain

In 2011, Starbucks announced it had acquired Evolution Fresh, one of their providers of juice drinks, for $30 million. Now Starbucks is no longer beholden to one of its suppliers.

2. To give their sales people something else in their briefcase

Also in 2011, AOL announced the acquisition of The Huffington Post for $315 million, even though HuffPo had just turned its first modest profit on paper. AOL wanted to give its advertising sales people more inventory to sell and HuffPo had 26 million unique visitors a month.

3. To make their cash cow product look sexier

Microsoft bought Skype for $8.5 billion dollars even though Skype was losing money. The good folks in Redmond must have assumed they could sell more Windows, Office and Xbox by integrating Skype into everything they already sell.

4. To enter a new geographic market

Herman Miller paid $50 million to acquire China’s POSH Office Systems in order to get a beachhead into the world’s fastest growing market for office furniture.

5. To get a hold of your employees

Facebook reportedly acquired Internet start-up Hot Potato for $10 million, largely to get hold of the talented developers working at the company.

Most acquisitions are done for rational reasons where an acquirer agrees to pay today for the rights to your future stream of cash. You may, however, be able to get a significant premium for your company if you can figure out how much it is worth in someone else’s hands.

8 ways to know if you have a job or own a business

Wed, 15 Jan 2025 19:27:05 GMT

The ultimate test of your business can be found in a simple question: would someone want to buy your company?

Whether you want to sell next year or a decade from now, you must be building an asset someone would buy – otherwise, you have a job, not a business.

Here are eight ways to ensure you are building a company, not just doing a job:

1. A job requires that you show up at work to make money, whereas a company generates revenue whether you are there or not.

2. If your company is so reliant on a single customer that they can dictate how you deliver your product or service, your company is more like a job than a valuable business.

3. A job is a place where your personal reputation impacts your results, whereas a company is a place where the brand is more important than the personality of the founder(s).

4. A job requires you to use your personal experience and expertise to get a result, whereas a company is a place where a process – not a person – consistently produces a desirable result.

5. In a job, you get fired for taking too much vacation, whereas if you own a company, the more vacation you can take without impacting your company’s performance, the more valuable your business will be.

6. In a job, the harder you work, the more money you earn. In a company, the smarter you work, the more money you earn.

7. In a job, you solve the problems. If you own a company, your employees solve the problems.

8. If the majority of your customers know your mobile phone number, it’s likely you have a job, not a company.

If you’re not sure whether you have a job or own a business, it’s time to get your Value Builder Score. Whether you want to sell now or in a decade, the Value Builder Score assessment allows you to see your business as a buyer would see it, and to identify how you perform on each of the eight key drivers of company value. The questionnaire takes about 13 minutes to complete, and after you’re finished you’ll get a customized 27-page report outlining how you performed and where you could improve the value and sellability of your company. Get your score now: https://maximize.sellable.business

Why fire trucks always back in

Tue, 14 Jan 2025 17:55:47 GMT

Have you ever noticed that fire trucks always back into the fire hall?

Why don’t they just pull into their parking spot snout-forward like the rest of us?

Backing in at the end of a shift saves them time when they have to get to a fire. They back in to be ready; whether the call comes in 5 minutes or 5 days, they are prepared to pull out as quickly as possible.

Like the firemen, you, as a business owner, need to be ready when you get the call from someone who wants to buy your business. And these days, owners are getting that call more often. According to the latest Sellability Tracker report, the proportion of business owners who received an offer to buy their company in the quarter ending March 31, 2014 was up considerably from Q4 2013. Roughly 12% of business owners using The Value Builder Score last quarter had recently received an offer to buy their business.

The proportion of owners getting an offer is an important statistic because it measures one half of the equation of a business sale. For a transaction to take place, there must be both a willing seller and a willing buyer.

Companies are becoming more acquisitive because they have access to more cash than they know what to do with. Interest rates are next to nothing, and after the liquidity crisis of 2008, companies have been socking away profits on their balance sheet for a rainy day.

This increase in acquisitiveness among buyers has important implications for you as a business owner. Chief among them is that you need to have a sellable asset when opportunity strikes.

Statistically speaking, the two most common reasons you are likely to sell your business are:

A health scare;
An unsolicited offer to buy your business.

As unsolicited offers increase, so too does the need for you to be ready if an opportunity comes your way. Unlike when the owner is in control of when he/she decides to list a property, the hallmark of an unsolicited offer is the fact that the owner doesn’t’ know when it is going happen; which means you need to operate your business as if an offer were always around the corner.

Companies that are sloppily put together with shoddy bookkeeping or too much customer concentration, or that are run by a Hub & Spoke manager, will end up being passed over for turnkey operations.

The time is now for you to get your company ready to showcase when opportunity comes knocking.

Six ways to profit from your vacation this summer

Mon, 13 Jan 2025 20:53:01 GMT

Summer is here, and although it may seem strange, now may be the perfect time to increase the value of your company.

The most valuable businesses are the ones that can survive without their owner. A buyer will pay a premium for a company that runs on autopilot and levy a steep discount for a business that is dependent on its owner.

This summer, consider taking an extended break from your business to see how things will run when you’re not in the building. It’s likely that some things will go wrong, but use those errors as the raw material for making your business operate more independently of you – and therefore more valuable.

Here is a six-step plan for profiting from your vacation time this summer:

Step 1: Schedule your vacation plus one day

Whatever day you plan to start working again after your holiday, tell your staff you’ll be back one day later. That way, you’ll have a full day of uninterrupted time to dedicate to understanding what went wrong in your absence.

Step 2: Bucket the mistakes

When you return, make a summary of the things that went wrong and categorize them into one of three buckets:

Mistakes: errors where there is a right and wrong answer;
Bottlenecks: projects that had difficulties because you weren’t there to provide your feedback;
Stalled projects: initiatives that went nowhere while you were gone because you’re the person leading them.

Step 3: Correct the mistakes

The first and easiest place to start is to simply correct the mistakes that were made. Usually mistakes are due to a lack of training rather than outright negligence. The right answer may be crystal clear in your head but not immediately obvious to your staff. Write up some instructions for next time the employees face the same situation. Make sure your instructions are clear, and share them with your team so everyone has them (a file sharing service like Google Drive or DropBox can be a helpful repository for your instructions).

Step 4: Unblock your bottlenecks

If you’re being asked for your personal input on projects, there’s probably going to be a bottleneck if you’re not around. Make sure your staff is clear on the projects where you need to have a say and the projects where you don’t. Some employees may wrongly think that you need to approve all decisions. Make it clear when you want them to act alone and when you still need to have a say.

Step 5: Re-assign stalled projects

The hardest part of making your business less dependent on you is dealing with projects that get stalled when you’re away. Start by asking yourself if you’re the right person to lead the project in the first place. As the owner of your business, projects often fall in your lap by default, rather than because you’re the best person to lead them. Categorize your stalled projects into two groups: a) strategic projects you need to lead; and b) non-strategic projects you are leading by default. Hang on to the strategic projects, but delegate the non-strategic projects to someone on your team who is better suited to drive them forward.

Step 6: Give every employee a blank check

At Ritz Carlton Hotels, they give every employee discretion to spend – without approval from their general manager – up to $2,000 on a guest. The $2,000 figure is a large enough number to make the message clear: front line employees should act first, make the customer happy, and ask questions later. Many employees know how to make a customer happy but lack the confidence to act. Giving employees some spending authority will speed up the resolution of customer issues and empower your team to do the right thing when you’re not there.

The sunshine is beckoning, so go ahead and take a vacation – if you follow the six steps here, you may end up with a tan and a more valuable company.

5 Ways To Attract The Attention Of An Acquirer

Fri, 10 Jan 2025 17:36:43 GMT

In any negotiation, being the person who makes the first move usually puts you at a slight disadvantage. The first-mover tips their hand and reveals just how much he/she wants the asset being negotiated.

Likewise, when considering the sale of your business, it is always nice to be courted, rather than being the one doing the courting. The good news is, the chances of getting an unsolicited offer from someone wanting to buy your business are actually increasing.

According to the Q2, 2014 Sellability Tracker analysis released in July 2014, 16% of business owners have received an offer in the last year, which is up 37% over Q1. Said another way, you’re 37% more likely to get an offer to buy your business today than you were at the beginning of the year.

Big companies are buying little ones for a lot of reasons and the current market conditions are accelerating their appetite: interest rates are low and stock markets are high, which provide the ideal platform for acquirers to realize a return on their investment from buying a business like yours.

So how do you ensure you are on their shopping list? Here are five ways to get noticed by an acquirer:

1. Win an award

Getting recognized as the “Widget Maker of the Year” by the Widget Makers Association is a great way to get the attention of acquirers in your industry.

2. Hire a PR person

Engaging a public relations professional to tell your story to the media can get you on the radar of buyers in your industry. A lot of media relations professionals focus on the big mainstream publications, and while these are important, ensure that your PR firm also targets trade publication and industry-specific websites that are read by acquirers in your industry.

3. Host an event

Consider hosting an event (e.g., conference, tradeshow, summit) for your industry and invite representatives from potential acquirers to attend. Being invited to an industry event can be flattering for acquirers and it is a good way to get them to notice you as an industry leader.

4. Join a board

If an executive from a company you think would make a natural buyer for your business is serving on a board of directors, consider joining the board. Serving on a board together can be a great way for an acquirer to notice you and your company without you having to say you’re for sale.

5. Grab lunch

Consider inviting a senior executive from a potential acquirer to share a meal under the guise of discussing trends in your industry. At the very least, you may glean some useful information about how big companies are seeing your industry evolve. At best, your lunch mate may realize that your company could play a key role in helping them grow.

The sale of your business is a delicate dance where it is usually better to be the courted, rather than the courter. Acquirers are on the hunt for new businesses, and having them notice you will put you in a position of strength when you get to sit down at the negotiation table.

10 Things That Make Your Business More Valuable Than That of Your Industry Peers

Thu, 09 Jan 2025 17:16:05 GMT

The value of your company is partly determined by your industry. For example, cloud-based software companies are generally worth a lot more than printing companies these days.

However, when we analyze businesses in the same industry, we still see major variations in valuation. So we dug through the data available to us from our partners at The Value Builder System™ and we found 10 things that will make your company more valuable than its industry peer group.

1. Recurring Revenue

The more revenue you have from automatically recurring contracts or subscriptions, the more valuable your business will be to a buyer. Even if subscriptions are not the norm in your industry, if you can find some form of recurring revenue it will make your company much more valuable than those of your competitors.

2. Something Different

Buyers buy what they cannot easily replicate on their own, which means companies with a unique product or service that is difficult for a competitor to knock off are more valuable than a company that sells the same commodity as everyone else in their industry.

3. Growth

Acquirers looking to fuel their top line revenue growth through acquisition will pay a premium for your business if it is growing much faster than your industry overall.

4. Caché

Tired old companies often try to buy sex appeal through the acquisition of a trendy young company in their industry. If you are the darling of your industry trade media, expect to get a premium acquisition offer.

5. Location

If you have a great location with natural physical characteristics that are difficult to replicate (imagine an oceanfront restaurant on a strip of beach where the city has stopped granting new licenses to operate), you’ll have buyers who understand your industry interested in your location as well as your business.

6. Diversity

Acquirers pay a premium for companies that naturally hedge the loss of a single customer. Ensure no customer amounts to more than 10 percent of your revenue and your company will be more valuable than an industry peer with just a few big customers.

7. Predictability

If you’ve mastered a way to win customers and documented your sales funnel with a predictable set of conversion rates, your secret customer-acquiring formula will make your business more valuable to an acquirer than an industry peer who doesn’t have a clue where their next customer will come from.

8. Clean Books

Companies that invest in audited statements have financials that are generally viewed by acquirers as more trustworthy and therefore worth more. You may want to get your books reviewed professionally each year even if audited statements are not the norm in your industry.

9. A 2iC

Companies with a second-in-command who has agreed to stay on post sale are more valuable than businesses where all the power and knowledge are in the hands of the owner.

10. Happy Customers

Being able to objectively demonstrate that your customers are happy and intend to re-purchase in the future will make your business more valuable than an industry peer that does not have a means of tracking customer satisfaction.

Like a rising tide that lifts all boats, your industry typically defines a range of multiples within which your business is likely to sell for; but whether you fall at the bottom or the top of the range comes down to factors that have nothing to do with what you do, but instead, how you do it.

How To Get a Big Company Multiple For Your Busines

Wed, 08 Jan 2025 16:57:50 GMT

Big public companies trade at a significant premium over small businesses in the same industry because investors perceive big, sophisticated companies as a safer bet than small, owner-dependent companies.

Let’s take a look at the professional services industry. Although most consultancies are a small collection of experts, there are also a handful of big publicly traded professional services firms. Omnicom (NYSE:OMC) is a massive marketing services company with a market capitalization of around $18 billion. For all of 2013, Omnicom reported pre-tax income of $1.66 billion, meaning they are trading at around 11 times pre-tax income.

Smaller service businesses trade at much lower multiples. We know this because at our firm we offer The Value Builder Score questionnaire which asks smaller business owners (our typical user has between $1 million and $20 million in sales) if they have received an offer to buy their business, and if so, the multiple of their pre-tax profit the offer represents. When we look at the professional services segment, we find the average multiple over the last two years was 3.81—almost three times lower than Omnicom.

When we isolate professional services companies with at least $3 million in revenue, the multiple being offered goes up to 4.97 times pre-tax profit, but it is still less than half of Omnicom’s 11 times.

And in case you thought this phenomenon was unique to the marketing services vertical, take a look at the IT services giant Accenture (NYSE:ACN). Accenture reported pre-tax income of $4.3 billion in 2013 and currently has a market capitalization of more than $52 billion, meaning they are trading around 12 times pre-tax profit, which is more than double the price we see being offered to smaller professional services firms.

How To Get a Big Company Multiple For Your Business

So how do you get a public company-like multiple for your business? One approach is to look for a strategic buyer. Unlike a financial buyer that is looking for a relatively safe return on their capital invested (which is the reason investors place a premium on big, stable companies trading on the stock market), a strategic buyer will value your company on how buying you will impact them.

Let’s imagine you have a grommet business predictably churning out $500,000 in pre-tax profit. These days, a financial buyer may pay you around 4 or 5 times earnings – in this case, roughly $2.5 million – if you can make the case your profits are likely to continue well into the future.

Now let’s imagine that a company that sells a billion dollars worth of widgets starts sniffing around your grommet business. They think that if they integrate your grommets into their widgets, they can sell 10 percent more widgets next year.

Therefore, your little grommet business could add 100 million dollars of revenue for the widget maker next year – and that’s just year one after the acquisition. Imagine what your business could be worth in their hands if they continued to sell more widgets each year because of the addition of your company.

The widget maker is not going to pay you $100 million for your business, but there is somewhere between the $2.5 million a financial buyer will pay and the $100 million in sales that the widget maker stands to gain next year that is both a good deal for you and for the widget maker.

Premium multiples get paid to big companies, and also to the little ones that can figure out how to make a big company even bigger.

The hidden goal of the smartest business owners

Tue, 07 Jan 2025 18:05:06 GMT

1. Sellability means freedom

2. Sellable businesses are more fun

3. Sellability is financial freedom

4. Sellability is a gift

You thought you were giving your child an incredible asset, but instead it’s an expensive liability he can’t afford to keep, and nor can he sell it without feeling guilty.

5. Nine women can’t make a baby in one month

Are you curious about how sellable your company is and what you would need to tweak to sell it when you’re ready? Then it’s time to get your Value Builder Score via the questionnaire on our website. It takes about thirteen minutes and your responses are kept confidential. You can complete the questionnaire here maximize.sellable.business .

A blood pressure test for your business

Mon, 06 Jan 2025 18:02:06 GMT

When was the last time you had your blood pressure tested?

Taking your blood pressure is one of the first things most doctors do before treating you for just about anything. How much pressure your blood is under as it courses through your veins is a reliable indicator of your overall health; and it can be an early indicator of everything from heart disease to bad circulation.

Does it tell the doctor everything they need to know about your health? Of course not, but one powerful little ratio can give the doctor a pretty good sense of your overall wellbeing.

Likewise, your Value Builder Score can be a handy indicator of your company’s wellbeing. Like your blood pressure reading, your company’s Value Builder Score is an amalgam of a number of different factors and can help a professional quickly diagnose your company’s overall health.

Predicting Good Outcomes Too

When a doctor takes your blood pressure, they not only rule out possible nasty ailments; they can also use the pressure reading to forecast a healthy life ahead. Similarly, your Value Builder Score can predict good things for the future. For example, based on more than 10,000 business owners who have completed their Value Builder Score questionnaire, we know the average multiple of pre-tax profit they are offered for their business when it is time to sell is 3.7. By contrast, those companies that have achieved a Value Builder Score of 80+ are getting offers of 6.6 times pre-tax profit.

In other words, if you have an average-performing business turning out $500,000 in pre-tax profit, it is likely worth around $1,850,000 ($500,000 x 3.7). If the same company improved its Value Builder Score to 80+ while maintaining its profitability of $500,000, it would be worth closer to $3,300,000 ($500,000 x 6.6).

Are you guaranteed to fetch 6.6 times pre-tax profit if you improve your Value Builder Score to 80? Of course not. But just like blood pressure, one little number can tell you and your advisor a whole lot about how well you are doing; and your advisor can then prescribe an action plan to start maximizing your company’s health – and its value down the road.

Heart disease is called “The Silent Killer” because most people have no idea what their blood pressure is. People can walk around for years with dangerously high blood pressure because they haven’t bothered to get it tested. The first step on the road to health is to get tested. If you have a great score, you can sleep well at night knowing you have one less thing to worry about. If your score is not where it should be, then at least knowing your performance can get you started down the road to better health.

8 Questions You’ll Be Asked When Selling Your Business

Fri, 03 Jan 2025 16:52:42 GMT

1. Why do you want to sell your business?

2. What is your cost per new customer acquired?

The potential acquirer wants to find out if you have a predictable, economical and scalable formula for finding new customers.

3. What is your market penetration rate?

The acquirer, with an eye to future growth, is trying to understand how big the potential market is for your product or service and what part of the field remains to be harvested.

4. Who are the critical members of your team?

The acquirer wants to understand the breadth and depth of your team and determine specifically which members need to be motivated and retained post-purchase.

5. Who buys what you sell?

6. How do you make what you sell?

7. What makes your product truly unique?

8. Can you describe your back-office setup?

Of course this is not an exhaustive list, but it’s a good start when you’re preparing to represent your company to your potential buyers.

What's so special about the million-dollar mark?

Thu, 02 Jan 2025 17:31:20 GMT

If you're wondering when is the right time to sell your business, you may want to wait until your company is generating $1 million in earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization (EBITDA).

What's so special about the million-dollar mark?

The million-dollar mark is a tipping point at which the number of buyers interested in acquiring your business goes up dramatically. The more interested buyers you have, the better multiple of earnings you will command.

Since businesses are often valued on a multiple of earnings, getting to a million in profits means you're not only getting a higher multiple but also applying your multiple to a higher number.

For example, according to our research at ValueBuilderSystem.com, a company with $200,000 in EBITDA might be lucky to fetch three times EBITDA, or $600,000. A company with a million dollars in EBITDA would likely command at least five times that figure, or $5 million. So the company with $1 million in EBITDA is five times bigger than the $200,000 company, but almost 10 times more valuable.

There are a number of reasons that offer multiples go up with company size, including:

Frictional Costs

It costs about the same in legal and banking fees to buy a company for $600,000 as it does to buy a company for $5 million. In large deals, these "frictional costs" become a rounding error, but they amount to a punitive tax on smaller deals.

2. The 5-20 Rule

I first learned about the 5-20 rule from a friend of mine named Todd Taskey who runs an M&A firm in the Washington, D.C. area. He discovered that, in many of the deals he does, the acquiring company is between 5 and 20 times the size of the target company. I've since noticed the 5-20 rule in many situations and I believe that more often than not, your natural acquirer will indeed be between 5 and 20 times the size of your business.

If an acquiring business is less than 5 times your size, it is a bet-the-company decision for the acquirer: If the acquisition fails, it will likely kill the acquiring company.

Likewise, if the acquirer is more than 20 times the size of your business, the acquirer will not enjoy a meaningful lift to its revenue by buying you. Most big, mature companies aspire for 10 to 20 percent top-line revenue growth at a minimum. If they can get 5 percent of organic growth, they will try to acquire another 5 percent through acquisition, which means they need to look for a company with enough girth to move the needle.

3. Private Equity

Private Equity Groups (PEGs) make up a large chunk of the acquirers in the mid market. The value of your company will move up considerably if you're able to get a few PEGs interested in buying your business. But most PEGs are looking for companies with at least $1 million in EBITDA. The million-dollar cut-off is somewhat arbitrary, but very common. As with homebuyers who narrow their house search to houses that fit within a price range, or colleges that look for a minimum SAT score, if you don't fit the minimum criteria, you may not be considered.

If you're close to a million dollars in EBITDA and getting antsy to sell, you may want to hold off until your profits eclipse the million-dollar threshold, because the universe of buyers—and the multiple those buyers are willing to offer—jumps nicely once you reach seven figures.

6 Reasons Not To Diversify

Fri, 20 Dec 2024 17:18:24 GMT

Deck: Diversification is a sound financial planning strategy, but does it work for company building?

How does Vitamix get away with charging $700 for a blender when reputable companies like Cuisinart and Breville make blenders for less than half the price?

It’s because Vitamix does just one thing, and they do it better than anyone else.

WhatsApp was just a messaging platform before Facebook acquired them for $19 billion US. Go Pro makes the best helmet mounted video cameras in the world. These companies stand out because they poured all of their limited resources into one big bet.

The typical business school of thought is to diversify and cross sell your way to a “safe” business with a balanced portfolio of products – so when one product category tanks, another line of your business will hopefully boom. But the problem with selling too many things – especially for a young company – is that you water down everything you do to the point of mediocrity.

Here are six reasons to stop being a jack-of-all-trades and start specializing in doing one thing better than anyone else:

It will increase the value of your business

When you sell one thing, you can differentiate yourself by pouring all of your marketing dollars into setting your one product apart, which will boost your company’s value. How do we know? After analyzing more than 13,000 businesses using The Value Builder Score, we found companies that have a monopoly on what they sell get acquisition offers that are 42 percent higher than the average business.

2. You can create a brand

Big multinationals can dump millions into each of their brands, which enable them to sell more than one thing. Kellogg can own the Corn Flakes brand and also peddle Pringles because they have enough cash to support both brands independently, but with every new product comes a dilution of your marketing dollars. It’s hard enough for a start-up to build one household name and virtually impossible to create two without gobs of equity-diluting outside money.

3. You’ll be findable on Google

When you Google “helmet camera,” Go Pro is featured in just about every listing, despite the fact that there are hundreds of video camera manufacturers. It’s easy for Go Pro to optimize their website for the keywords that matter when they are focused on selling only one product.

4. Nobody cheered for Goliath

Small companies with the courage to make a single bet get a bump in popularity because we’re naturally inclined to want the underdog – willing to bet it all – to win. When Google launched its simple search engine with its endearing two search choices “I’m feeling lucky” vs. “Google search,” we all kicked Yahoo to the curb. Now that Google is all grown up and offering all sorts of stuff, we respect them as a company but do we love them quite as much?

5. Every staff member will be able to deliver

When you do one thing, you can train your staff to execute, unlike when you offer dozens or hundreds of products and services that go well beyond the competence level of your junior staff. Having employees who can deliver means you can let them get on with their work, freeing up your time to think more about the big picture.

6. It will make you irresistible to an acquirer

The more you specialize in a single product, the more you will be attractive to an acquirer when the time comes to sell your business. Acquirers buy things they cannot easily replicate themselves. Go Pro (NASDAQ: GPRO) is rumored to be a takeover target for a consumer electronics manufacturer or a content company that wants a beachhead in the action sports video market. Most consumer electronics companies could manufacturer their own helmet mounted cameras, but Go Pro is so far out in front of their competitors – they are the #1 brand channel on You Tube – that it would be easier to just buy the company rather than trying to claw market share away from a leader with such a dominant head start.

Diversification is a great approach for your stock portfolio, but when it comes to your business, it may be a sure-fire road to mediocrity.

What a Study of 14,000 Businesses Reveals About How You Should Not Be Spending Your Time

Thu, 19 Dec 2024 17:03:20 GMT

In an analysis of more than 14,000 businesses, a new study finds the most valuable companies take a contrarian approach to the boss doing the selling.

Who does the selling in your business? My guess is that when you’re personally involved in doing the selling, your business is a whole lot more profitable than the months when you leave the selling to others.

That makes sense because you’re likely the most passionate advocate for your business. You have the most industry knowledge and the widest network of industry connections.

If your goal is to maximize your company’s profit at all costs, you may have come to the conclusion that you should spend most of your time out of the office selling, and leave the dirty work of operating your businesses to your underlings.

However, if your goal is to build a valuable company—one you can sell down the road—you can’t be your company’s number one salesperson. In fact, the less you know your customers personally, the more valuable your business.

The Proof: A Study of 14,000 Businesses

We’ve just finished analyzed our pool of Value Builder Score users for the quarter ending December 31. We offer The Sellability Score questionnaire as the first of twelve steps in The Value Builder System, a statistically proven methodology for increasing the value of a business.

We asked 14,000 business owners if they had received an offer to buy their business in the last 12 months, and if so, what multiple of their pre-tax profit the offer represented. We then compared the offer made to the following question:

Which of the following best describes your personal relationship with your company's customers?

I know each of my customers by first name and they expect that I personally get involved when they buy from my company.
I know most of my customers by first name and they usually want to deal with me rather than one of my employees.
I know some of my customers by first name and a few of them prefer to deal with me rather than one of my employees.
I don’t know my customers personally and rarely get involved in serving an individual customer.

2.93 vs. 4.49 Times

The average offer received among all of the businesses we analyzed was 3.7 times pre-tax profit. However, when we isolated just those businesses where the owner does not know his/her customers personally and rarely gets involved in serving an individual customer, the offer multiple went up to 4.49.

Companies where the founder knows each of his/her customers by first name get discounted, earning offers of just 2.93 times pre-tax profit.

When Value Is the Enemy of Profit

Who you get to do the selling in your company is just one of many examples where the actions you take to build a valuable company are different than what you do to maximize your profit. If all you wanted was a fat bottom line, you likely wouldn’t invest in upgrading your website or spend much time thinking about the squishy business of company culture.

How much money you make each year is important, but how you earn that profit will have a greater impact on the value of your company in the long run.

Business Valuation

Wed, 18 Dec 2024 16:55:30 GMT

Deck: Business valuation goes beyond simple mathematics, but to get some idea of what your business might be worth, consider the three methods below.

Your business is likely your largest asset so it's normal to want to know what it is worth. The problem is: business valuation is what one might call a "subjective science."

The science part is what people go to school to learn: you can get an MBA or a degree in finance, or you can learn the theory behind business valuation and earn professional credentials as a business valuation professional.

The subjective part is that every buyer's circumstances are different, and therefore two buyers could see the same set of company financials and offer vastly different amounts to buy the business.

This article provides the basic science and math behind the most common business valuation techniques, but keep in mind that there will always be outliers that fall well outside of these frameworks. These are strategic sales, where a business is valued based on what it is worth in the acquirer's hands. Strategic acquisitions, however, represent the minority of acquisitions, so use the three methods below to triangulate around a realistic value for your company:

Assets-based

The most basic way to value a business is to consider the value of its hard assets minus its debts. Imagine a landscaping company with trucks and gardening equipment. These hard assets have value, which can be calculated by estimating the resale value of your equipment.

This valuation method often renders the lowest value for your company because it assumes your company does not have any "Good Will." In accountant speak, "Good Will" has nothing to do with how much people like your company; Good Will is defined as the difference between your company's market value (what someone is willing to pay for it) and the value of your net assets (assets minus liabilities).

Typically, companies have at least some Good Will, so in most cases you get a higher valuation by using one of the other two methods described below.

Discounted Cash Flow

In this method, the acquirer is estimating what your future stream of cash flow is worth to them today. They start by trying to figure out how much profit you expect to make in the next few years. The more stable and predictable your cash flows, the more years of future cash they will consider.

Once the buyer has an estimate of how much profit you're likely to make in the foreseeable future, and what your business will be worth when they want to sell it in the future, the buyer will apply a "discount rate" that takes into consideration the time value of money. The discount rate is determined by the acquirer's cost of capital and how risky they perceive your business to be.

Rather than getting hung up on the math behind the discounted cash flow valuation technique, it's better to understand the drivers of your value when you use this method. They are: 1) how much profit your business is expected to make in the future; and 2) how reliable those estimates are.

Note that business valuation techniques are either/or and not a combination. For example, if you are using Discounted Cash Flow, the hard assets of the company are assumed to be integral to the generation of the profit the acquirer is buying and therefore not included in the calculation of your company's value.

A money-losing bed and breakfast sitting on a $2 million piece of land is going to be better off using the Asset-based valuation method; whereas a professional services firm that expects to earn $500,000 in profit next year, but has little in the way of hard assets, will garner a higher valuation using the Discounted Cash Flow method or the Comparables technique described below.

Comparables

Another common valuation technique is to look at the value of comparable companies that have sold recently or for whom their value is public. For example, accounting firms typically trade at one times gross recurring fees. Home and office security companies trade at about two times monitoring revenue, and most security company owners know the Comparables technique because they are often getting approached to sell by private equity firms rolling up small security firms. Typically you can find out what companies in your industry are selling for by asking around at your annual industry conference.

The problem with using the Comparables methodology is that it often leads owners to make an apples-to-bananas comparison. For example, a small medical device manufacturer might think that, because GE is trading for 20 times last year's earnings on the New York Stock Exchange, they too are worth 20 times last year's profit. However, if one looks at the more than 13,000 businesses analyzed through the The Value Builder System, it’s clear that a small medical device manufacturer is likely to trade closer to five times pre-tax profit.

Small companies are deeply discounted when compared to their Fortune 500 counterparts, so comparing your company with a Fortune 500 giant will typically lead to disappointment.

Finally, the worst part about selling your business is that you don't get to decide which methodology the acquirer chooses. An acquirer will do the math on what your business is worth to them behind closed doors. They may decide your business is strategic, in which case back up the Brinks truck because you're about to get handsomely rewarded for your company. But in most cases, an acquirer will use one of the three techniques described here to come up with an offer to buy your business.

Subscribers Make Your Company More Valuable

Tue, 17 Dec 2024 16:58:40 GMT

Why are Amazon, Apple and many of the most promising Silicon Valley start-ups leveraging a subscription business model?

Subscribers not only provide steady revenue; they make your company more valuable in the eyes of an acquirer. In a traditional business, customers buy your product or service once and may or may not choose to buy again; but in a subscription business, you have "automatic” customers who have agreed to purchase from you on an ongoing basis.

There are at least nine subscription models that can be leveraged by businesses ranging from service companies to market research firms to manufacturing concerns.

Recurring Revenue

Recurring revenue—the hallmark of a subscription business—is attractive to acquirers and makes your business more valuable when it’s time to sell. How much more valuable? To answer that, one has to first look at how your business will be valued without a subscription offering.

The most common methodology used to value a small to midsize business is discounted cash flow. This methodology forecasts your future stream of profits and then discounts it back to what your future profit is worth to an investor in today's dollars, given the time value of money. This investment theory may sound like MBA talk, but discounted cash flow valuation is something you have likely applied in your personal life without knowing it. For example, what would you pay today for an investment that you hope will be worth $100 one year from now? You would likely "discount" the $100 by your expectation for a return on investment. If you expect to earn a 7 percent return on your money each year, you'd pay $93.46 ($100 divided by 1.07) today for an investment you expect to be worth $100 in 12 months.

Using the discounted cash flow valuation methodology, the more profit the acquirer expects your company to make in the future—and the more reliable your estimates—the more your company is worth. Therefore, to improve the value of a traditional business, the two most important levers you have are: 1) how much profit you expect to make in the future; and 2) the reliability of those estimates.

At ValueBuilderSystem.com, one can see the effect of this valuation methodology. Since 2012, this methodology has been used to track the offers received by business owners who have completed the Value Builder questionnaire. During that time, the average business with at least $3 million in revenue has been offered 4.6 times its pretax profit. Therefore, a traditional business churning out 10 percent of pretax profit on $5 million in revenue can reasonably expect to be worth around $2,300,000 ($5,000,000 x 10 percent x 4.6).

Then compare the value of a traditional company with the value of a subscription business. When an acquirer looks at a healthy subscription company, she sees an annuity stream of revenue throwing off years of profit into the future. This predictable stream of future profit means she is willing to pay a significant premium over what she would pay for a traditional company. How much of a premium depends on the industry, and some of the biggest premiums today go to companies in the software industry.

Subscription-based Software Companies

To understand what is going on in the valuation of subscription-based software companies, look at Dmitry Buterin. Buterin runs a subscription software company called Wild Apricot. He has also formed one of the world's first mastermind groups of small and midsize subscription company founders, and each month the group meets to discuss strategies for running a subscription business.

Members of the group were constantly raising money or being courted by investors, so the topic of valuation came up a lot in their conversations. Buterin found that the consensus valuation range being offered to member companies was between 24 and 60 times monthly recurring revenue (MRR), which is equivalent to two to five times annual recurring revenue (ARR).

One way to validate Buterin's numbers is to check with another guru from the world of subscription-based software companies. Zane Tarence is a partner with Birmingham, Alabama-based Founders Investment Banking, a company that specializes in selling software companies that use the subscription business model. Tarence estimates the valuation ranges he sees as belonging in one of three buckets:

24-48 x MRR (2-4 x ARR)
These are typically very small software companies with less than $5 million in recurring annual revenue. Companies in this first bucket are usually growing modestly, with subscription cancellation rates (i.e., "churn") in the area of 2-4 percent per month.

48-72 x MRR (4-6 x ARR)
These are larger software companies with recurring revenue of at least $5 million annually, which they are growing at the rate of 25-50 percent per year. Their net churn is typically below 1.5 percent per month.

72-96 x MRR (6-8 x ARR)
These are the rare, fast-growth software companies that are growing more than 50 percent per year, with at least $5 million in annual revenue and net churn below 1 percent per month. These companies usually offer a solution (typically an industry-specific one) that their customers need to use to get their jobs done.

The software business is an extreme example of the benefits of subscription revenue, but no matter what industry you're in, your company will likely command a premium if it enjoys recurring revenue.

From Alarm Systems to Prescriptions to Mosquitoes

For example, security businesses that monitor alarm systems and charge a recurring monthly monitoring fee to do so are worth about twice as much as security businesses that just do system installations. Retail pharmacies with a large pool of prescriptions for drugs that people take every day, like Lipitor and Lozol, command a premium over a traditional retailer because customers re-up their pills on a regular basis, creating a recurring revenue stream for the pharmacist.

Even tiny companies are worth more if they have subscription revenue. When my colleagues over at the Value Builder Score analyzed very small businesses with less than $500,000 in sales, they found that the average offer these small businesses attract is 2.6 times pretax profit.

Compare that to the average Mosquito Squad franchise. Mosquito Squad is a Richmond, Virginia-based company that offers to keep bugs off your patio by spraying your backyard regularly with a proprietary chemical recipe approved by the Environmental Protection Agency. Mosquito Squad franchisees target affluent home owners with an average home value north of $500,000 who entertain in their backyard and don't want to be bothered by mosquitoes. Mosquito Squad operates on a subscription basis. You subscribe to a season of spraying, which includes 8 to 12 sprays, depending on how buggy it is where you live.

Mosquito Squad is a franchise business, and the impact of its recurring revenue model on its valuation is remarkable. According to Scott Zide, the president of Mosquito Squad's parent company, Outdoor Living Brands, Mosquito Squad franchises that changed hands over the most recent five-year period had revenue of $463,223 and sold for 3.7 times their pretax profit. That's a 42 percent premium over the traditional value of a company with less than $500,000 in sales, and it’s because Mosquito Squad operates on a recurring subscription model and 73 percent of its annual spraying contracts renew each year.

Whether you plan to build a subscription-based software application or the simplest personal services business, having recurring revenue will boost the value of your most important asset.

4 Traps To Avoid When Selling Your Company

Thu, 12 Dec 2024 17:49:05 GMT

Business owners have been known to refer to due diligence as "the entrepreneur's proctology exam." It's a crude analogy but a good representation of what it feels like when a stranger pokes, prods, and looks inside every inch of your business.

Most professional acquirers will have a checklist of questions they need answered if they’re considering buying your company. They'll want answers to questions like:

When does your lease expire and what are the terms?
Do you have consistent, signed, up-to-date contracts with your customers and employees?
Are your ideas, products and processes protected by patent or trademark?
What kind of technology do you use, and are your software licenses up to date?
What are the loan covenants on your credit agreements?
How are your receivables? Do you have any late payers or deadbeat customers?
Does your business require a license to operate, and if so, is your paperwork in order?
Do you have any litigation pending?

In addition to these objective questions, they'll also try to get a subjective sense of your business. In particular, they will try to determine just how integral you are personally to the success of your business.

Subjectively assessing how dependent the business is on you requires the buyer to do some investigative work. It's more art than science and often requires a potential buyer to use a number of tricks of the trade, such as:

Trick #1: Juggling calendars

By asking to make a last-minute change to your meeting time, an acquirer gets clues as to how involved you are personally in serving customers.

If you can't accommodate the change request, the acquirer may probe to find out why and try to determine what part of the business is so dependent on you that you have to be there.

Trick #2: Checking to see if your business is vision impaired

An acquirer may ask you to explain your vision for the business, which is a question you should be well prepared to answer. However, he or she may ask the same question of your employees and key managers. If your staff members offer inconsistent answers, the acquirer may take it as a sign that the future of the business is in your head.

Trick #3: Asking your customers why they do business with you

A potential acquirer may ask to talk to some of your customers. He or she will expect you to select your most passionate and loyal customers and, therefore, will expect to hear good things. However, the customers may be asked a question like 'Why do you do business with these guys?' The acquirer is trying to figure out where your customers' loyalties lie. If your customers answer by describing the benefits of your product, service or company in general, that's good. If they respond by explaining how much they like you personally, that's bad.

Trick #4: Mystery shopping

Acquirers often conduct their first bit of research behind your back before you even know they are interested in buying your business. They may pose as a customer, visit your website, or come into your company to understand what it feels like to be one of your customers.

Make sure the experience your company offers a stranger is tight and consistent, and try to avoid personally being involved in finding or serving brand-new customers. If any potential acquirers see you personally as the key to wooing new customers, they'll be concerned business will dry up when you leave.

How To Scale Up Your Service Business

Wed, 11 Dec 2024 17:55:25 GMT

Increase the value of your company by training others in your area of expertise.

It can be tough to grow a service business. Clients are typically buying your expertise, and if all you have to sell is time, the size of your business will always be limited by the number of hours in your day.

One way to scale up your service business is to launch a training division to teach others what you know. That's what Nancy Duarte did when she found herself run ragged trying to grow Duarte, a Mountain View, California-based design studio.

Duarte's specialty was creating high-impact presentations (her firm created the slides Al Gore used in the movie The Inconvenient Truth), but the work was tough to scale. She found herself spinning various plates and hoping none of them would fall to the ground. Finally she realized she was exhausted and no longer enjoying her job. She still loved the business but hated the constant demands on her time and energy.

In an effort to pull herself out of individual projects, she sat down and documented her methodology and from there created an internal training course so her employees could learn the Duarte way of creating presentations.

Once she had taught her own staff to handle the development of the presentations, she turned her philosophy and her approach into a book that was published in 2008 under the title Slide:ology – The art and science of creating great presentations. Her most recent book, Resonate: Present visual stories that transform audiences, was published in 2010). Having created a platform with the books, Nancy launched her training division, which offers corporate on-site workshops—her facilitators go to large companies to teach the employees how to make better presentations.

Due in large part to the training division, Duarte has scaled up her service business to the point where she now employs 82 people.

As business owners, we all know we should be documenting our systems for others to follow, but somehow writing our owner's manual always takes a backseat to serving the next customer or fighting the next fire. Maybe what we need to do is stop thinking of writing down our process as an internal chore and instead focus on launching a training division. That way, the job of documenting our system goes from a textbook-boring task to the raw material needed to launch a revenue-generating business division.

4 Steps To Finding Your Sell-By Date

Tue, 10 Dec 2024 17:11:13 GMT

Most business owners think selling their business is a sprint, but the reality is it takes a long time to sell a company.

The sound of the gun sends blood flowing as you leap forward out of the blocks. Within five seconds you’re at top speed and within a dozen your eye is searching for the next hand. Then you feel the baton become weightless in your grasp and your brain tells you the pain is over. You start an easy jog and you smile, knowing that you did your best and that now the heavy lifting is on someone else’s shoulders.

That’s probably how most people think of starting and selling a business: as something akin to a 4 x 100-meter relay race. You start from scratch, build something valuable, measuring time in months instead of years, and sprint into the waiting arms of Google (or Apple or Facebook) as they obligingly acquire your business for millions. They hand over the check and you ride off into the sunset. After all, that’s how it worked for the guys who started Nest and WhatsApp – right?

But unfortunately, the process of selling your business looks more like an exhausting 100-mile ultra-marathon than a 100-meter sprint. It takes years and a lot of planning to make a clean break from your company – which means it pays to start planning sooner rather than later.

Here’s how to backdate your exit:

Step 1: Pick your eject date

The first step is to figure out when you want to be completely out of your business. This is the day you walk out of the building and never come back. Maybe you have a dream to sail around the world with your kids while they’re young. Perhaps you want to start an orphanage in Bolivia or a vineyard in Tuscany.

Whatever your goal, the first step is writing down when you want out and jotting some notes as to why that date is important to you, what you will do after you sell, with whom, and why.

Step 2: Estimate the length of your earn out

When you sell your business, chances are good that you will get paid in two or more stages. You’ll get the first check when the deal closes and the second at some point in the future -- if you hit certain goals set by the buyer. The length of your so-called earn out will depend on the kind of business you’re in.

The average earn out these days is three years. If you’re in a professional services business, your earn out could be as long as five years. If you’re in a manufacturing or technology business, you might get away with a one-year transition period.

Estimate: + 1-5 years

Step 3: Calculate the length of the sale process

The next step is to figure out how long it will take you to negotiate the sale of your company. This process involves hiring an intermediary (a mergers and acquisitions professional, investment banker or business broker), putting together a marketing package for your business, shopping it to potential acquirers, hosting management meetings, negotiating letters of intent, and then going through a 60 to 90-day due diligence period. From the day you hire an intermediary to the day the wire transfer hits your account, the entire process usually takes six to 12 months. To be safe, budget one year.

Estimate: + 1 year

Step 4: Create your strategy-stable operating window

Next you need to budget some time to operate your business without making any major strategic changes. An acquirer is going to want to see how your business has been performing under its current strategy so they can accurately predict how it will perform under their ownership. Ideally, you can give them three years of operating results during which you didn’t make any major changes to your business model.

If you have been running your business over the last three years without making any strategic shifts, you won’t need to budget any time here. On the other hand, if you plan on making some major strategic changes to prepare your business for sale, add three years from the time you make the changes.

Estimate: + 3 years

Figuring out when to sell

The final step is to figure out when you need to start the process. Let’s say you want to be in Tuscany by age 50. You budget for a three-year earn out, which means you need to close the deal by age 47. Subtract one year from that date to account for the length of time it takes to negotiate a deal, so now you need to hire your intermediary by age 46. Then let’s say you’re still tweaking your business model – experimenting with different target markets, channels and models. In this case, you need to lock in on one strategy by age 43 so that an acquirer can look at three years of operating results.

It certainly would be nice to make a clean, crisp break from your business after an all-out sprint, but for the vast majority of businesses, the process of selling a company is a squishy, multi-year slog. So the sooner you start, the better.

Did you miss the perfect time to sell your business?

Mon, 09 Dec 2024 17:26:16 GMT

August was a roller coaster ride for stockholders. Triple digits wins followed by even larger losses left the average investor reeling and were a good reminder that markets move in both directions.

Valuations of privately heldp business have also been somewhat turbulent of late. The average offer extended to users of The Value Builder System was 4.2 pretax profit in Q1, 2015, but dropped to 3.9 in Q2.

Does that mean you have missed the opportunity to sell your business at the peak?

Maybe. But should you care? Probably not.

The thing many of us forget is that when you sell your company—--possibly your largest asset and the biggest wealth-creating event of a your lifetime—--you have to do something with the money you make.

These days, that means you'll have to turn around and invest your windfall into an asset class that is arguably somewhat bubbly in historical terms. The stock market has more than doubled since 2009. The price of residential real estate has been growing at a rate of 1 percent per month in many major centers. The same trend can be seen in many markets that offer exclusive beach houses or ski chalets.

Who Is Richer: Samantha or Scott?

Indulge us in a hypothetical example. Let's look at two imaginary business owners, each running a company generating a pretax profit of $500,000. Let's imagine that Samantha sold her business into the teeth of the recession for three times her pretax profit back in 2009. She would have walked with $1.5 million pretax to invest in the stock market.

Now let's imagine business owner Scott who decides to try and time the market. Scott waited out the recession and sold his business last month for four times pretax profit, walking away with $2 million before deal costs. At first glance, Scott looks like the winner because he sold at the peak and got four times profit instead of Samantha's three times. But when we take a closer look, Samantha would probably be better off today. Assuming she had invested her $1.5 million in the stock market back in 2009, when the Dow was trading below 7,000 points, she would now have more than $3 million, or a third more than Scott, who waited and sold at the "peak."

Timing the sale of your business on the basis of external markets is often a zero-sum game, because unless you're going to hide the proceeds of a sale under your mattress, you're probably buying into the same market conditions from which you're selling out.

A better approach is to optimize your business against the eight things acquirers look for when they buy a business, regardless of what’s happening in the economy overall.

How to Get Rich in 3 (Really Difficult) Steps

Fri, 06 Dec 2024 17:03:50 GMT

Becoming wealthy may not be your primary goal, but if it is, there is a reasonably predictable way to get rich in America.

Step 1: Ignore Your Parents

Parents around the world typically encourage their kids to get educated so they can get a ‘good job.’ This may mean becoming a doctor or lawyer, although neither tends to be a path to significant wealth. High-paying professions provide an excellent income stream, but two insidious forces undermine the professional's ability to create significant wealth: tax and spending.

Tax

It is difficult to become wealthy on the basis of a salary alone. Since income is taxed at the highest possible rate, you're left with not much more than 50 cents on the dollar.

Spending

The other problem with having a high income is that it creates a ‘wealth effect’ that triggers spending. Thomas J. Stanley, the famous author of the research-driven classic The Millionaire Next Door, points out that some professionals—in particular, lawyers—spend a large portion of their income to give the impression that they are successful, in part because they do not enjoy much social status from their job. In other words, when you earn $500,000 a year, you buy a Range Rover or send your kids to an elite private school at least in part because you want people to think you are wealthy.

Step 2: Start Something

Most wealth in America is created through owning a business. Recently, Mass Mutual looked at the proportion of business owners that make up a number of wealth cohorts. They found that 17 percent of people with between $100,000 and $500,000 to invest were business owners.

Keep in mind that there are about 8 million employer-based companies in the United States, meaning that the incidence rate of business ownership (the natural rate at which you find business owners in the general population) is about three percent. Said another way, if you grabbed 100 people walking down the street, on average three of them would be business owners. On the other hand, if you took a random sample of 100 people with investable assets of between $100,000 and $500,000, 17 of them would be business owners, meaning you're over five times more likely to find a business owner in the $100,000 to $500,000 wealth segment than you are to find an employee in the same segment.

The trend becomes more pronounced the higher up the wealth ladder you go. If you look at wealthy investors with between $500,000 and $1,000,000 in investable assets, you'll see that the proportion of business owners in this segment goes up dramatically—to27 percent.

The Very Rich

Among investors with between $1 million and $10 million in investable assets, the proportion of business owners jumps to 52 percent. As for those investors with $10 million to $50 million sloshing around in their bank account, 67 percent are business owners; and for investors with $50 million dollars or more in investable assets, 86 percent are business owners.

Simply put, if you meet someone who is very rich, it's highly likely they are (or were) a business owner.

Step 3: Get Liquid

The next step for you as a business owner is to focus on improving the value of your business so that you can sell it for a premium. Just being a successful entrepreneur is typically not enough to become rich. You have to find a way to take the equity you have locked up in your business and turn it into liquid assets. When it comes to selling your business, the three most common options are:

Acquisition : This is the headline-popping way some entrepreneurs choose to trade their shares for cash. When Facebook acquired WhatsApp for $19 billion, founders Brian Action and Jan Koum got very rich.

Re-capitalization: A minority or majority "re-cap" occurs when you sell a stake in your company (often to a private equity firm) yet continue to run your business as both a manager and part owner, with a chunk of your wealth in liquid assets outside of your business.

Management Buyout: In an MBO, you invite your management team (or a family member) to buy you out over time, usually with a mixture of some cash from the profits of your business as well as debt that the managers take on. There are other, less common ways to turn your equity into cash (e.g., an IPO), but the key is turning the illiquid wealth in your business into diversified liquid wealth. The best part about selling a business is that the wealth created is taxed at a very low rate compared to employment income, so you get to keep most of what you make.

You might argue it is better to keep all of your wealth tied up in your business as it grows, but that can be a risky proposition—just ask Lululemon's Chip Wilson or BlackBerry's cofounder Mike Lazaridis. If you keep your money locked up in your business, it also means you may not be able to enjoy the benefits of wealth. You can't use illiquid stock in a private company to buy an around-the-world plane ticket or a ski chalet in Aspen. You actually have to get liquid first.

There are many good reasons to build a business; and for you, wealth creation may not be as important as making an amazing product or leading a great team. But if money is what you're after, there is no better way to get rich than to start and sell a successful business.

90 Days That Will Define Your Business Forever

Thu, 05 Dec 2024 17:34:10 GMT

You've done the hard work of winning a new customer, but it's what you do in the next 90 days that determines if it'll stick around.

The first 90 days of any new relationship are critical:

A president has about three months to inspire the electorate and gain the political capital he needs to govern.
A young team prospect has but a few months to impress his coach before being sent down to the minors.
A new CEO has 90 days to learn her job before the rank and file start expecting tangible leadership.

The Onboarding Window: The First 90 Days

For a young company, the first 90 days of a customer relationship are equally important. Research into the subscription business model shows that getting a customer to effectively start using your product in the first 90 days leads to an increase in lifetime value of up to 300 percent for some companies.

Take a look at marketing software provider Constant Contact, which used to struggle with the first 90 days of a new customer relationship. In the old days, Constant Contact took a "who, what, when" approach to onboarding new customers. Who stood for who a customer wanted to send an email campaign to; what stood for what the customer wanted to send; and when described the timing of the campaign. After users signed up for its service, Constant Contact would ask customers to upload their email database (the who in the three-step onboarding process). This required the new user to upload a customer list--which is the trickiest part of the onboarding experience. It required the customer to leave Constant Contact's site and struggle with how to export a contact list--often from a jury-rigged database kept in Excel or Outlook. The process was awkward, and many new customers stopped using Constant Contact because they hit a barrier before they had a chance to fall in love with the Constant Contact software.

What, Who, When

Wanting to stem new customer churn, Constant Contact changed its on boarding to focus first on the what. Immediately after signing up, new users were encouraged to create their first email campaign. Suddenly customers were seeing their campaign come to life in front of their eyes. Constant Contact offered customers a library of stock images that looked more beautiful than anything a business owner had used in the past. Customers could see firsthand how professional their company was going to look. Only after the customer had completed the what stage and earned the emotional reward of seeing its first campaign come to life, did Constant Contact switch to the who part of creating a campaign. The difference was, by this point, Constant Contact had enough relationship equity with the customer to get it over the hump of uploading its database.

This minor reordering of the onboarding flow led to a dramatic reduction in customer churn--which is the death knell of any subscription business.

Whether you’re in a subscription business, or still using a transaction business model, how you treat a customer in the first 90 days will go a long way in determining their overall satisfaction.

The Downside of Just Milking It

Wed, 04 Dec 2024 16:49:24 GMT

If you have considered selling your business of late, you may have been disappointed to see the offers a business like yours would garner from would-be acquirers.

According to the latest analysis of some 20,000 business owners who have used The Value Builder System, the average offer being made by acquirers is just 3.7 times your pre-tax profit. Companies with less than a million dollars in sales garner significantly lower multiples, and larger businesses may get closer to five times the pre-tax profit, but regardless of size private company multiples are still significantly less than those reserved for public company stocks.

Given the paltry offer multiples, you may be tempted to hold on to your business and “milk it” for decades to come. After all, you might reason that if you hang onto your business for four or five more years, you could withdraw the same amount in dividends as you would garner from a sale and still own 100% of the business.

This logic – let’s call it the “Just Milk It Strategy” – seems sound on the surface, but there are some significant risks to consider.

1. You Shoulder the Risk

The biggest downside of holding on to your business, rather than selling it, is that you retain all of the risk. Most entrepreneurs have an optimism bias, but you need only remember how life felt in 2009 to be reminded that economic cycles go in both directions. While business may feel good today, the next five years could well be bumpy for a lot of founders.

2. Disk Drive Space

If you think of your brain like a computer’s disk drive, owning a business is like constantly running anti-virus software. Yes, in theory you can do other things like play golf or enjoy a bicycle trip through Tuscany and still own your business, but as long as you are the owner, your business will always occupy a large chunk of your brain’s capacity. This means family fun, vacations and weekends are always tainted with the background hum of your brain’s operating system churning through data.

3. Capital Calls

Let’s say your business generates $500,000 in Earnings Before Interest Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization (EBITDA), and you could sell your company for four times EBITDA or keep it. You may argue it’s better to keep it, pull your profit out in the form of dividends, and capture the same cash in four years as you would by selling it. This theory breaks down in capital-intensive businesses where there is usually a big difference between EBITDA and cash in the bank. If you have to buy machines, finance your customers, or stock inventory, a lot of your cash will be locked up in feeding your business and the amount of cash you can pull out of your business each year is a fraction of your EBITDA.

4. Tax Treatment

Depending on your tax jurisdiction, the sale proceeds of your business may be more favourably treated than income you would garner by paying yourself handsomely with the Just Milk It Strategy. You may actually need to pay yourself $2 or $3 for every $1 you can net from the advantageous tax treatment of a business sale.

5. You Can Do Better

Finally, you may be able to attract an offer higher than three or four times your pretax profit. The businesses we work with who have a Value Builder Score of 80 + get offers that are, on average, 6.1 times their pretax profit. Some of the owners we work with do even better, stretching multiples into double digits.

If you’d like to get your Value Builder Score, please let us know by replying to this email and we will make arrangements for you to complete the 13-minute questionnaire.

How Your Age Shapes Your Exit Plan

Tue, 03 Dec 2024 17:07:48 GMT

Your age has a big impact on your attitude toward your business, and your feelings about one day getting out of it.

For example, one person who runs a boutique mergers and acquisitions business refuses to take assignments from business owners over the age of 70.

He has found that septuagenarians are so personally invested that they can rarely bring themselves to sell their business – frequently calling off the sale halfway through, claiming they just wouldn’t know what to do with themselves if it closed.

While it’s always dangerous to generalize – especially based on something as touchy as age – a few patterns emerged in the research for Built to Sell: Creating a Business That Can Thrive Without You.

Owners aged 25 to 46

Twenty- and thirty-something business owners grew up in an age when job security did not exist. They watched as their parents got downsized or packaged off into early retirement, and that resulted in a somewhat jaded attitude towards the role of a business in society.

Business owners in their twenties and thirties generally see their companies as a means to an end, and most expect to sell in the next 5 to 10 years.

Similar to their employed classmates, who move to a new job every 3 to 5 years, business owners in this age group often expect to start a few companies in their lifetime.

Aged 47 to 65

Baby boomers came of age in a time when the social contract between a company and an employee was sacrosanct. An employee agreed to be loyal to the company, and, in return, the company agreed to provide a decent living and a pension for a few golden years.

Many of the business owners in this generation think of their company as more than a profit center. They see their business as part of a community and, by extension, themselves as community leaders.

To many boomers, the idea of selling their company feels like selling out their employees and their community. That’s why so many chief executive officers in their fifties and sixties are torn: they know they need to sell to fund their retirement, but they agonize over where that will leave their loyal employees.

Sixty-five plus

Older business owners grew up in a time when hobbies were impractical and discouraged. You went to work while your wife tended to the kids (today, more than half of businesses are started by women, but those were different times), you ate dinner, you watched the news and you went to bed.

With few hobbies and little other than work to define them, business owners in their late sixties, seventies and eighties feel lost without their business – that’s why so many refuse to sell or experience depression after they do.

Of course, there will always be exceptions to general rules of thumb, but frequently – more than your industry, nationality, marital status or educational background – your birth certificate defines your exit plan.

You-proofing Your Business

Mon, 02 Dec 2024 18:07:59 GMT

Making your business less dependent on you has a number of benefits: you can scale your company more quickly if you’re not acting as a bottleneck; you get more time to enjoy life outside of your business; and a business less dependent on its owner is much more valuable to an acquirer.

Pulling yourself out of the day-to-day operations of your business is easier said than done. Here are three specific strategies for getting your company to run without you.

1. Think Like LEGO

Pre-school children can make a collection of generic looking pieces come together in a complex creation by following the detailed instruction booklet that comes with every box of LEGO. Your employees need LEGO-like instructions to execute the recurring tasks in your business without your input.

Ian Schoen is the co-founder of Two Tree International, a design and manufacturing firm that brings products directly from concept to customer. The company was started in 2008 with a $50,000 loan and had grown to sales of over $4 million and a staff of 15 employees when it was sold in 2015. Schoen credits his operating manual for allowing him to sell his business for a significant premium: “We started creating standard operating procedures in the business and had a set of documents that helped us run the business. Basically we could plug anyone into any position and have them understand it.”

2. Imagine Hosting Your Own AMA

Everyone from Barrack Obama to Madonna to Bill Gates has participated in an “Ask Me Anything” (AMA) forum where participants are encouraged to ask the featured guest anything that is on their mind.

Now imagine you invited your customers to an AMA. What questions would they ask you? What zingers would your most sceptical customers pose? These are the questions you need to document your responses to in a Frequently Asked Questions document that your employees can leverage in your absence.

3. Shine the Media Spotlight on Your Team

It’s tempting to take the call from a local reporter who wants to interview you about your company, but consider inviting an employee to take the interview instead.

Stephan Spencer founded Netconcepts in 1995 and grew it into a multinational Search Engine Optimization (SEO) agency before selling it to Covario in 2010. His first attempt to sell his business in the late 1990s failed because potential acquirers viewed Netconcepts to be too dependent on Spencer himself: “My personal name and my company name were too intermingled. If I didn’t go with the business, nobody was going to buy it.”

Spencer set out to reduce his company’s reliance on him personally and one of his strategies was to position his employees as SEO experts: “I encouraged key staff, various executives and top consultants within the company to speak and write articles, and I introduced them to the editors I knew.”

It can be tempting to run your company as your own personal fiefdom but the sooner you get it running without you, the faster it can scale into something irresistible to an acquirer.

Why Bother Doing It The Hard Way?

Wed, 27 Nov 2024 16:44:48 GMT

Whether you want to sell your business next year or a decade from now, you will have two basic options for an external sale: the financial or the strategic buyer.

The Financial Buyer

The financial buyer is buying the rights to your future profit stream, so the more profitable your business is expected to be, the more your company will be worth to them. Strategies that are key to driving up the value of your business in the eyes of this buyer include de-risking it as much as possible, creating recurring revenue, reducing reliance on one or two big customers, cultivating a team of leaders, etc.

The Strategic Buyer

The alternative is to sell to a strategic buyer. They will care less about your future profit stream and more about what your business is worth in their hands, typically calculating how much more of their product they can sell by owning your business. Strategic buyers are usually big companies, so the value of being able to sell more of their product or service because they own you can be substantial. This often leads strategic buyers to pay more for your business than a financial buyer ever would.

For example, Nick Kellet’s Next Action Technologies created a software application that takes a set of numbers and visually expresses them in a Venn diagram. Next Action Technologies was generating approximately $1.5 million in revenue when they received their first acquisition offer; Kellet’s first valuation was for $1 million, a little less than revenue, which is a pretty typical from a financial buyer.

Kellet knew the business could be worth more to a strategic buyer, so he searched for a company that could profit by embedding his Venn diagram software into their product. Kellet found Business Objects, a business intelligence software company looking to express their data more visually. Business Objects could see how owning Next Action Technologies would enable them to sell a whole lot more of their software, and they went on to acquire Kellet’s business for $8 million, more than five times revenue – an astronomical multiple.

Preparing For Every Eventuality

The question is: why bother making your business attractive to a financial buyer when the strategic buyer typically pays so much more?

The answer is that strategic acquisitions are very rare. Each industry usually only has a handful of strategic acquirers, so your buyer pool is small and subject to a number of variables out of your control; the economy, interest rates, the competitive landscape and a whole raft of other variables can all impact a strategic acquirer’s appetite to buy your business.

Think of it this way: imagine your child is a promising young athlete who’s intent on going pro. You know that becoming a professional athlete is a long shot, fraught with unknown hurdles: injury, the wrong coach, or just not having what it takes to compete at the highest levels. Do you squash her dream? No, but you do make sure she does her homework, so if her dream fades she has her education; you make sure she has a back-up plan.

Rich vs. Famous

Tue, 26 Nov 2024 16:43:59 GMT

Have you set a goal for your company this year?

If you’re like most business owners, you’re striving for an increase in your annual sales. It’s natural to want your company to be bigger because that’s what everyone around us seems to celebrate.

Magazines profile the fastest growing companies, industry associations celebrate their largest members, and bigger seems to be better in the eyes of just about every business pundit with a microphone.

But growth can come at a steep price and can even detract from your ability to build your personal wealth.

The Contrasting Exits of Michael Arrington

For example, let’s take a look at an entrepreneur named Michael Arrington. Arrington started Achex in 1999. It helped facilitate payments in the early days of the internet, and Arrington was focused on growing it. He accepted two rounds of outside capital to fund the company’s expansion.

Achex was ultimately sold to First Data Corporation for $32 million in 2001. Unfortunately,

because Arrington had been focused on growth above all else, he had not only raised two rounds of financing but also reduced his personal stake in the company down to next to nothing. As he told Business Insider, "When I started my first company, Achex, we raised $18 million in venture capital in 2000 from DFJ. The company later sold for $32 million, but due to a 2x liquidity preference (common in those days), the founders essentially got nothing, just a few hundred thousand dollars to not block the deal."

Arrington then went on to start the technology blogging website TechCrunch in 2005. This time Arrington wanted to grow the business, but not at the expense of his equity. Instead, they grew the company within their means and funded the business largely out of cash flow. Arrington still owned 80% of the company, according to Business Insider, when he sold it for approximately $30 million.

Apparently Arrington had learned his lesson—growth is good, but not at the expense of all else.

The Alternative to Growth at All Costs

The alternative to focusing on sales growth as your primary objective is to focus on the value of your equity within your company. Growth will have a positive impact on your company’s value, but your growth rate is only one of the eight drivers that impact what your company is worth. As you build your business, you will be faced with many forks in the road where growth may come at the expense of both your company’s value, and your personal wealth. For example:

You may have to dilute your personal stake in the company by taking on outside capital. Depending on the return your investors are looking for, and the performance of your company after you take on outside investors, your smaller slice of the larger pie may be worth less than a larger slice of a smaller pie.

Cross selling your largest customer more products and services may be a relatively easy way to grow your top line, but if they already represent more than 15% of your sales, the extra revenue may dilute the value of your company because acquirers discount companies with too much customer concentration.

Giving lazy customers 90 days to pay may keep them buying, but those charitable payment terms may detract from the value of your business because an acquirer will have to fund your working capital.

You could choose to invest your sales and marketing resources into winning a big, one-time project that would boost your sales but this may not boost the value of your business, which may be more positively impacted by a smaller amount of recurring revenue.

Growth is important and how big your company can get is one of the eight drivers of your company’s value. But growth is only one of eight factors—to learn about the other seven, get your Value Builder Score.

Have You Discovered Your Recurring Revenue Model?

Mon, 25 Nov 2024 16:46:46 GMT

When it comes to the value of your business, what happened in the past is much less important than what is likely to happen in the future.

One of the most important ways you can shape the future of your business is to create some recurring revenue. Recurring revenue comes from those magical sales you make without really trying. Good examples of recurring revenue models include ongoing service contracts, subscriptions, and memberships – basically any sale situation the customer has to proactively opt out of, instead of in to.

Recurring revenue is critical for the value of just about any small business, and it is equally import for the world’s largest businesses.

Why ICD bought Porto Montenegro

If you’re looking for a fun example of why recurring revenue matters, take a look at The Investment Corporation of Dubai (ICD) and their acquisition of Porto Montenegro Marina and Resort. If you happen to be the heir to a European royal dynasty or are a Silicon Valley billionaire, you’ve probably parked your boat in Porto Montenegro. Along with 450 berths for the world’s largest super yachts, there’s a 5 star hotel, ultra exclusive residential properties and 250 high-end boutiques to indulge just about any fancy.

Porto Montenegro is the brainchild of Peter Munk, who is best known as the founder of Barrick Gold Corp. Munk fell in love with the natural beauty of the Adriatic coastline and saw an opportunity to buy an old naval ship yard and transform it into one of the world’s most exclusive travel destinations.

So why on earth would ICD, the principle investment arm of the Dubai government, be interested in buying a glorified parking lot in the middle of an old naval base?

Well it turns out that super yachts need a lot of regular maintenance. In fact, the average super-yacht owner spends 10% of its value every year on repairs and maintenance. ICD wanted the steady flow of recurring revenue from maintenance contracts with the well-heeled owners who moored their yacht at Porto Montenegro.

Tomorrow vs. Yesterday

Porto Montenegro is a billion-dollar reminder that recurring revenue is important for large companies, but creating an annuity stream can be even more important for smaller businesses. It can be tempting to celebrate the large project wins or a big sale to a one-off customer, but when it comes to valuing your business, acquirers may discount those as aberrations and focus on the steady flow of your recurring business.

Did Microsoft Overpay For LinkedIn?

Fri, 22 Nov 2024 17:25:00 GMT

Microsoft’s recent $26.2 billion acquisition of LinkedIn provides an illustrative example of a strategic acquisition – the type of sale that usually garners the most gain for the acquired company’s shareholders.

You may be wondering what a billion-dollar acquisition has to do with your business, but the very same reasons a strategic acquirer buys a $26 billion business holds true for the acquisition of a $2 million company.

The financial vs. strategic buyer

A financial buyer is buying the future stream of profits coming from your business, whereas the strategic buyer is buying your business for what it is worth in their hands. To simplify, a financial acquirer buys your business because they think they can sell more of your stuff, whereas a strategic buyer acquires your business because they think it will help them sell more of their stuff.

One might argue that Microsoft overpaid for LinkedIn given that LinkedIn only generated a few hundred million dollars in EBITDA last year, meaning the good folks in Redmond paid an astronomical multiple of LinkedIn’s earnings.

But earnings are not the only thing strategic acquirers care about when they go to make an acquisition.

Microsoft‘s acquisition of LinkedIn is a classic example of a strategic acquisition. The Redmond-based technology giant has been undergoing a major transformation from being a software company focused on operating systems to a business concentrating on cloud-based software applications. Microsoft enjoys a dominant market share in the basic tools white-collar business people use to get their job done, but other software packages have begun to nip at the heels of their dominance in many product lines.

Take Microsoft Office for example. Many businesses have started to use competitive offerings from Google and Apple. Even more companies cling to older versions of Microsoft Office software, even though Microsoft is keen to move everyone over to the cloud-based Office 365.

In purchasing LinkedIn, Microsoft saw an opportunity to suck data from LinkedIn into Microsoft’s cloud-based software applications, making them irresistible. Imagine you’re a sales person and you just landed a big meeting with a new prospect. You enter the appointment as a Microsoft Outlook event and suddenly the details of the event feature everything LinkedIn knows about your prospect.

Now you can make small talk about where they went to school, the previous jobs they have held and know the scope of their current role – all without ever leaving Outlook.

Microsoft is betting this kind of integration across its platforms will compel more people to upgrade to the latest software applications. While your company is likely smaller than LinkedIn, the same thing that makes a giant buy another giant holds true for smaller businesses. To get the highest possible price for your business, remember that companies make strategic acquisitions because they want to sell more of their stuff.

Thinking Vs. Doing: The Owner’s Dilemma

Thu, 21 Nov 2024 18:23:59 GMT

There’s a steady breeze from the northwest, which cools the warm Caribbean afternoon. Framed between a palm tree and the turquoise water, you notice a man reading. He appears to be working, which seems strange given his appearance: shaggy blonde hair, linen shirt, surf shorts and flip-flops.

You squint and realize the man is Richard Branson and he just happens to be running Virgin Group Ltd., a multibillion-dollar conglomerate. He is working where he usually does, at Necker Island, a 74-acre retreat he owns in the British Virgin Islands.

Branson, of course, is far from a negligent founder, he has managers running the various businesses that make up the Virgin Group and visits his companies regularly, but he does not manage the day-to-day operations of any of his businesses, which frees up his time to think.

The train conductor vs. the thinker

Your role as a CEO can be divided into two buckets: one for managing and the other for thinking.

The managing bucket is where, metaphorically speaking, you ensure the trains all run on time. In this role, you’re establishing goals for your employees and holding them accountable for achieving their targets. You’re making sure your products and services are of a high quality and that your biggest customers are happy.

When you’re wearing your manager hat, you’re scouring your company looking for small enhancements every day. This obsession with continuous improvement is what big companies call “six-sigma thinking,” but you probably just think of it as building a great company.

The other bucket is reserved for thinking and it’s where you create the future of your company. In this visionary time, you get to design new products, imagine new ways of serving customers, or contemplate where you could take your business in the years ahead.

Your visionary hours are spent dreaming and imaging what your business could be, instead of worrying about what it is today.

The most valuable companies

The question is, how much of your time should you devote to each role? If your goal is to create a more valuable business—one that someone might like to buy one day—our data reveals that you should start gradually increasing the time you spend on thinking and hire someone else to do the managing.

For example, after analyzing more than 20,000 businesses who have received their Value Builder Score, we have discovered that companies of owners who know each of their customers by first name (i.e., managers) trade at just 2.9 times their pre-tax profit, whereas the companies of owners who do not know their customers’ first names (i.e., thinkers) trade at closer to 5 times pre-tax profit.

Further, companies that would suffer if their owners were unable to come to work for three months, receive significantly lower offers when compared to companies that would not feel the absence of the owner for a month or two.

Finally, in a recent survey of merger and acquisition (M&A) professionals, we asked who they like to see an owner hire if they can only afford one “C-level” executive. The M&A professionals overwhelmingly identified a general manager/second-in-command as the most important role a founder can fill ahead of a chief revenue, marketing or financial officer.

In short, the owners of the most valuable businesses have found managers to ensure the trains run on time while they spend an increasing amount of their energy thinking about what’s next for their business.

How Three Moves Quadrupled the Value of this Business

Wed, 20 Nov 2024 17:14:35 GMT

Are you stuck trying to figure out how to create some recurring revenue for your business?

You know those automatic sales will make your business more valuable and predictable, but the secret to transforming your company is to think less about what’s in it for you and more about coming up with a reason for customers to agree to a monthly bill.

Take a look at the transformation of Laura Steward’s company, Guardian Angel. Steward had gotten her IT consulting firm up to $400,000 in revenue when she called in a valuation consultant to help her put a price on her business. Steward was disappointed to learn her company was worth less than fifty percent of one year’s sales because she had no recurring revenue and what sales she did have were dependent on her personally.

Steward set about to transform her business into a more valuable company and made three big moves:

1. Angel Watch

The first thing Steward did was to design a monthly program called Angel Watch, which offered her business clients ongoing protection from technology problems. Steward offered her Angel Watch customers ongoing remote monitoring of their networks, pre-emptive virus protection and staff on call if there was ever a problem.

Steward approached her clients with a calculation of what they had spent with her firm over the most recent 12-month period, including the cost of her customer’s downtime. She made the case that by signing up for Angel Watch, they would save money when taking into consideration both the hard costs of her firm’s time and the soft costs associated with downtime.

90% of her customers switched from hourly billing to the Angel Watch program.

2. Doubling Rates

Next Steward doubled her personal consulting rates. That way, when one of the customers who decided not to opt into Angel Watch called her firm, they were quoted one rate for a technician’s time or twice the price to have Steward herself. Not surprisingly, most customers opted for the cheaper option and others chose to re-consider their decision not to sign up for Angel Watch.

3. Survivor Clause

Steward also credits a small legal manoeuvre for further driving up the value of her business. She included a “survivor clause” in her Angel Watch contracts, which stipulated that the obligations of the agreement would “survive” a change of ownership of her company.

Steward went on to successfully sell her business at a price that was more than four times the original valuation she had received just two years prior to launching Angel Watch.

How much goodwill do you have in your business?

Tue, 19 Nov 2024 19:13:59 GMT

The term “goodwill” is often thrown around in conversation as though it is a subjective description of how much your customers like your business.

In fact, when it comes to valuing your business, there is nothing subjective about the definition of goodwill. It is defined as the difference between what someone is willing to pay for your company minus the value of your hard assets.

Let’s imagine you own a plumbing company and the main physical assets in your company are the five vans you own and some tools with a total value of around $100,000. If you sold your plumbing company for $1,000,000, the acquirer would have paid $900,000 in goodwill ($1,000,000 - $100,000).

When a company sells for the value of its fixed assets, it is often a distressed business one step away from closing down. One way to think about your job description as an owner is to maximize the difference between what your business is worth to a buyer and the value of your fixed assets.

Marriott buys more than bricks and mortar

For an example of the difference between valuing a business for its hard assets vs. its goodwill, take a look at the recent acquisition of Starwood Hotels & Resorts Worldwide by Marriott. Neither Starwood nor Marriott own many of the hotels that bear their name. Instead, they license the name to operators, franchisees and the owners of the bricks and mortar.

So why would Marriott cough up $13 billion for Starwood if they don’t even own the hotels they run? In part, Marriott wanted to get its hands on the Starwood Preferred Guest program, a loyalty scheme which has proven more popular than Marriott’s program for frequent travellers.

Similarly, Uber is worth something north of $50 billion because more than one million people per day hail a ride using Uber, not because they own a whole bunch of cars.

Chasing hard assets at the expense of goodwill

Many owners focus on building their stockpile of hard assets, not understanding the concept of goodwill.

Accumulating hard assets like land and machines and equipment is fine, but the savvy owner, looking to maximize her value, focuses less on the tangible assets and more on what those assets allow her to create for customers. There is nothing wrong with owning hard assets unless they take away from capital you could be investing in creating goodwill. Then the opportunity cost may exceed the value of owning the stuff.

Arguably both Uber and Starwood would be a shadow of the companies they are today had they pursued a strategy of accumulating hard assets. Would Uber ever have made it out of San Francisco if they had to buy a Lincoln Town Car every time they wanted to add a driver to their network?

In your case, focus on what creates value for customers and you will maximize the value of your business far beyond the value of your hard assets.

Market Share vs. Addressable Market

Mon, 18 Nov 2024 16:39:13 GMT

Imagine you’re a farmer and you’ve been tending to your crops all year. It’s harvest season and finally time to collect the spoils of your labor.

You start harvesting your crops only to find out that pesky rodents have been quietly eating away at your fields. You’re devastated as you come to the realization that much of what you have been working so hard to cultivate has already been taken.

Feeling like there is not much field left to harvest is what acquirers and investors are trying to avoid as they evaluate buying your business. Metaphorically speaking, acquirers want to know that if they buy your business, there will be plenty of fresh farmland left for them to till.

Addressable Market

Investors call it your company’s “addressable market” and it is one of the main factors buyers will look at when they evaluate the potential of acquiring your company.

Business 101 tells us we should strive for market share so we can control pricing. Market share is a worthy goal if your objective is to maximize your profits. However, if your primary objective is to increase the value of your company, you want to be able to communicate that you have relatively low market share across the entire addressable market. In other words, there is plenty of field left to plough.

Consider the following ways you might expand the way you are currently thinking about the addressable market for what you sell:

Demographics

Demographics involve segmenting a market by objective measures like gender, income, age and education level. Marriott is a hotel chain but they have created a variety of brands to address the various demographic segments they want to serve. Ritz Carlton is a Marriott brand that appeals to well-heeled travellers, but if all you want is a basic room, you could opt for a Courtyard Marriott. It’s the same company, but they have expanded their addressable market by focusing on different demographic segments.

Psychographics

Psychographics involve segmenting your market according to the way people think. Toyota produces the Prius, which gets 50 miles per gallon and is a favourite among environmentalists. Toyota also produces the thirsty Tundra pickup truck and, at just 15 miles per gallon, attracts a different psychographic segment.

Geography

Success in your local market is good but if you want to really boost the value of your company in the eyes of an acquirer, you need to demonstrate that your concept crosses geographic lines. McDonald’s has more than fourteen thousand locations in the United States but they have also demonstrated that the golden arches can draw a crowd in other markets. McDonald’s has nearly three thousand stores in Japan, two thousand in China and more than a thousand locations in each of the European countries of Germany, Canada, France and the United Kingdom.

You don’t actually have to become a global giant like Marriott, Toyota or McDonald’s to increase your company’s value but you do need to be able to communicate that your concept could work in other markets and that there is still good land left to plough.

Will this be the year you seriously drive up the value of your company?

Fri, 15 Nov 2024 16:30:07 GMT

If you have resolved to make your company more valuable in 2017, you may want to think hard about how your customers pay.

If you have a transaction business model where customers pay once for what they buy, expect your company’s value to be a single-digit multiple of your Earnings Before Interest Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization (EBITDA).

If you have a recurring revenue model, by contrast, where customers subscribe and pay on an ongoing basis, you can expect your valuation to be a multiple of your revenue.

Breedlove & Associates Sells for 6X Revenue

In 1992 Stephanie Breedlove started a payroll company to make it easier for parents to pay their nannies on a recurring basis. It began small and Breedlove self-funded her growth, which averaged 20% per year.

By 2012, Breedlove & Associates had hit $9 million in annual sales when Breedlove accepted an offer from Care.com of $55 million for her business—representing an astronomical multiple of more than six times Breedlove’s revenue.

Buyers pay up for companies with recurring revenue because they can clearly see how your company will make money long after you hit the exit.

Not sure how to create recurring revenue? Here are four models to consider:

Products That Run Out

If you have a product that people run out of, consider offering it on subscription. The retailing giant Target sells subscriptions to diapers for busy parents who don’t have the time (or interest) in running to the store to re-stock on Pampers. Dollar Shave Club, which was recently acquired by Unilever for five times revenue, sells razor blades on subscription. The Honest Company sells dish detergent and safe household cleaning products to environmentally conscious consumers and more than 80% of their sales come from subscriptions.

Membership Websites

If you’re a consultant and offer specialized advice, consider whether customers might pay access to a premium membership website where you offer your know-how to subscribers only. Today there are membership websites for people who want to know about anything from Search Engine Marketing to running a restaurant.

Services Contracts

If you bill by the hour or the project, consider moving to a fixed monthly fee for your service. That’s what the marketing agency GoBrandGo! has done to steady cash flow and create a more predictable service business.

Piggyback Services

Ask yourself what your “one-off” customers buy after they buy what you sell. For example, if you make a company a new website, chances are they are going to need somewhere to host their site. While your initial website design may be a one-off service, you could offer to host it for your customer on subscription. If you offer interior design, chances are your customers are going to want to keep their home looking like the day you presented your design, so they might be in the market for a regular cleaning service.

Rentals

If you offer something expensive that customers only need occasionally, consider renting access to it for those who subscribe. ZipCar subscribers can have access to a car when they need it without forking over the cash to buy a hunk of steel. WeWork subscribers can have access to the company’s co-working space without buying a building or committing to a long-term lease.

You don’t have to be a software company to create customers who pay you automatically each month. There is simply no faster way to improve the value of your business this year than to add some recurring revenue.

The Downside of Selling Someone Else’s Product

Thu, 14 Nov 2024 16:48:04 GMT

Are you tempted to re-sell someone else’s product to boost your topline revenue?

On the surface, becoming a distributor for a popular product can appear to be a simple way to grow your sales—simply find something that is already proven to be successful elsewhere and negotiate the rights to sell it in your local market.

While distributing someone else’s product may be a relatively easy way to grow your topline, all that revenue growth may do little for your company’s value. A typical distribution company will be lucky to sell for 50% of one year’s revenue, whereas if you control your product or service—and the brand that embodies them—you should be able to do much better.

How Nike Became One of the World’s Most Valuable Companies

For an example of the dangers of not owning your own products, take a look at the evolution of Blue Ribbon Sports into Nike Inc. As Nike co-founder Phil Knight describes in his recent autobiography Shoe Dog, the company started off by negotiating the exclusive rights to sell Tiger running shoes in the United States. Knight’s company was called Blue Ribbon Sports and he imported the shoes from Onitsuka, a Japanese company.

Despite their exclusive agreement with Blue Ribbon, Onitsuka started to court other American dealers. When Knight protested the obvious breach of their contract, Onitsuka threatened a hostile takeover of Knight’s business or to shut him down outright. Knight’s company was tiny at the time and so deeply reliant on Onitsuka for supply, he could do virtually nothing to enforce their agreement.

Given its dependence on Onitsuka, Knight’s company would have scored close to zero out of a possible 100 on what we call The Switzerland Structure, a measure of your company’s reliance on a supplier, employee or customer. The Switzerland Structure is only one of eight value drivers we measure, but abysmal performance on any one factor can be a significant drag on the value of your business.

Onitsuka’s snub became Knight’s impetus to start Nike, which gave him control of his marketing, supply and product development. Instead of simply re-selling someone else’s shoes, Nike developed their own designs and contracted the manufacturing of their products to other factories. By owning its own products and brands, Nike has become one of the world’s most valuable companies and regularly trades north of 20 times earnings.

To see how your business performs on The Switzerland Structure and the other seven factors that drive your company’s value, take 13 minutes and complete the Value Builder questionnaire now.

The Anatomy of a Successful Exit

Wed, 13 Nov 2024 17:56:27 GMT

Stephanie Breedlove started Breedlove & Associates in 1992 as a way to pay her nanny. The big payroll processors weren’t interested in dealing with one person’s wages and doing it themselves was complicated and time-consuming, too much for the then overwhelmed Breedloves.

Breedlove saw a business opportunity and started a payroll company for parents who needed to pay their nannies. By 2012, Breedlove & Associates had grown to $9MM in revenue and then she received a $54MM acquisition offer.

To give you some context of how incredible it is to sell a $9MM business for $54MM let’s look at the numbers. At The Value Builder System™, more than 25,000 business owners have completed the Value Builder Score questionnaire, part of which asks about any acquisition offers they may have received. The average multiple offered is 3.76 times pre-tax profit. Even the best-performing businesses, those with a Value Builder Score of 80+, only get offers of 6.27 times pre-tax profit on average. Breedlove got close to six times revenue.

What did Breedlove do right? We’re going to look at the five things Breedlove did—and that you can do—to drive up the value of a business.

1. Sell Less Stuff to More People

When Breedlove hit $30K per month in revenue, she quit her job at Accenture (formerly Anderson Consulting) and devoted herself to Breedlove & Associates full-time. To grow, she had a choice: sell more to her existing customers (e.g. busy couples often need lawn-care, house-cleaning, or grocery-delivery services) or stick with her niche of paying nannies. Most consultants and experts would say it’s easier to sell more to existing customers (and they’re right), but it doesn’t make your business more valuable. Breedlove decided to stick to her niche and find more parents who needed to pay their nannies, and that decision laid the foundation for a more valuable business.

Investors from Warren Buffet look for companies with a deep and wide competitive moat that gives the owner pricing authority. When you have a differentiated product or service, we call it having The Monopoly Control and companies with a monopoly get significantly higher acquisition offers.

Rather than selling existing customers generic services in commoditized markets, Breedlove focused on selling one thing to as many customers as she could find.

2. Strive for 50%+ Net Promoter Score

One feature that interested acquirers look for is your customer satisfaction levels. Increasingly, they are turning to the Net Promoter Score (NPS) as a measure of this. NPS was developed by Fred Reichheld and his team at Satmetrix, who discovered that your customers’ willingness to refer you to their friends or colleagues is highly predictive of your company’s future growth rate.

The NPS approach is to ask your customers how willing they would be to refer your company to a friend or colleague, on a scale of 0 to 10. They are then categorized into Promoters (9s and 10s), Passives (7s and 8s) or Detractors (0–6s). The NPS is calculated by subtracting the percentage of Promoters from the percentage of Detractors. Most businesses achieve an NPS of 10% to 15%, while the very best companies (think Apple and Amazon) get scores of 50% or more.

Breedlove obsessed over her company’s NPS and realized the key to driving it up was perfecting the first few interactions with a new customer. When you call a big payroll company looking for a service to pay your nanny, the response can be underwhelming. With only one person to pay, you are often relegated to the most junior staff member and even they would rather be dealing with a larger client.

When you call Breedlove, by contrast, you get a team of professionals totally focused on setting you up. You’re not an afterthought. You’re not passed on. Instead, you get the best onboarding talent the company has to offer.

This set-up team was a big part of how Breedlove achieved an astonishing 78% NPS.

3. Create Recurring Revenue Streams

The third thing that made Breedlove’s company attractive was recurring revenue.

Regardless of what industry you’re in, recurring revenue models give acquirers more confidence that the business will keep going strong after you leave.

By 2012, Breedlove & Associates had grown to $9MM and, given the nature of the payroll business, 100% of their revenue was recurring.

4. Reduce Reliance on Customers, Employees and Suppliers

Breedlove’s company was also attractive to buyers because she had a highly diversified customer base with no single customer representing even close to 1% of her revenue. If more than 10% to 15% of your revenue comes from one buyer, you can expect prospective acquirers to ask a lot more questions.

Customer concentration is one of three factors that make up The Switzerland Structure Module. The Switzerland Structure measures your business’ dependence on a single customer, employee or supplier.

5. Find an Acquirer You Can Help Grow

By 2012, Breedlove & Associates was growing 17% per year, which is good but not blow-your-mind good. So how did she attract such an incredible acquisition offer? The trick was showing her acquirer how they could grow.

In Breedlove’s case, she sold her company to Care.com. Think of Care.com as the Angie’s List of care providers (e.g. child care, senior care, etc.). If you need someone to care for your kids or an elderly relative, you enter your address into their website and Care.com will give you a list of vetted caregivers in your area.

At the time of the acquisition, Breedlove had 10,000 customers and Care.com had seven million members. Breedlove argued that if just 1% of Care.com’s members used Breedlove’s payroll service, it would equate to 7X growth in Breedlove & Associates almost overnight.

In 2012, Care.com acquired Breedlove & Associates for $54MM—an outstanding exit made possible by Breedlove’s focus on what drove her company’s value, not just their top-line revenue.

3 Surprising Reasons To Offer A Subscription

Tue, 12 Nov 2024 16:42:50 GMT

You can now buy a subscription for everything from dog treats to razor blades. Music subscription services are booming as our appetite to buy tracks is replaced by our willingness to rent access to them. Starbucks now even offers coffee on subscription.

Why are so many companies leveraging the subscription business model? The obvious reason is that recurring revenue boosts your company’s value, but there are some hidden benefits to augmenting your business with a subscription offering.

Free Market Research

Finding out what your customers want is expensive. By the time you pay attendees, rent a room with a one-way mirror and buy the little sandwiches with the crusts cut off, a focus group can cost you upwards of $6,000. A statistically significant piece of quantitative research, done by a reputable polling company, might approach six figures.

With a subscription company, you get instant market research for free. Netflix knows which shows to produce based on the viewing behaviour of its subscribers. No need to ask viewers what they like, Netflix can see what they watch and rate.

For you, a subscription offering can allow you to test new ideas and gives you a direct relationship with your customers so you can see what they like first hand.

Cash Flow

Subscription companies are often criticized for being hungry for cash. Many charge by the month and then have to wait months—sometimes years—to recover the costs of winning a subscriber.

That assumes, however, that you’re charging for your subscription by the month. If you’re selling your subscription to businesses, you may get away with charging for a year’s worth of your subscription up front. That’s what the analyst firm Gartner does, and it means they get an entire year’s worth of cash from their subscriber on day one. Costco charges its annual membership up front, which means it has billions of dollars of subscription revenue to float its retail operations.

Loyalty

Customers can be promiscuous. You may have a perfectly satisfied customer but if they see an offer from one of your competitors, they might jump ship to save a few bucks. However, if you lock your customers into a subscription, they may be less tempted to try a competitor since they have already made an investment with you.

One of the reasons Amazon Prime is so profitable is that Prime subscribers buy more and are stickier than non-Prime subscribers. Prime subscribers want to get their money’s worth, so they buy a wider swath of products from Amazon and are less tempted by competitive offers.

The obvious reason to launch a subscription offering of your own is that the predictable recurring revenue will boost the value of your company. And while that’s certainly true, the hidden benefits may even be more important.

One Way To Decide When To Sell

Mon, 11 Nov 2024 17:56:06 GMT

How do you know the right time to sell your company? One answer to this age-old question is that the time to sell is when someone else is willing to invest more in your business than you are.

When you start a business, nobody is willing to invest in its success more than you. You’ve already worked a 40-hour week by Wednesday and, if you’re like most founders, you’ve invested a big chunk of your liquid assets to get your business going.

You’re all in.

In the early days, you are willing to risk your business on a new strategy because the business is pretty much worthless. As the Bob Dylan lyric goes, “When you ain't got nothing, you got nothing to lose.”

As your business grows and becomes more valuable, you may find yourself becoming more conservative, unwilling to risk the equity you have created inside your business on your next big idea. You have reached a point where someone else may be willing to risk more time and money for your business than you are.

Peach New Media

David Will is the founder of Peach New Media, which he started back in 2000 as a reseller of web conferencing. In the early days, Will changed his business strategy frequently, trying to find an idea with legs. After a number of pivots, he landed on selling learning management software to associations.

The business grew nicely and by 2015 Peach New Media had 40 employees and then received an attractive acquisition offer from a large private equity company. Will was conflicted. He loved his business and treasured the team he had built. At the same time, the acquirer was offering him a life-changing check.

In the end, Will realized that he had become somewhat more conservative as his business had grown and the potential acquirer was willing to make a big bet on integrating Peach New Media into another one of its acquisitions. Will realized he had reached a point where his appetite for risk in his own business was lower than his potential acquirer’s. Will decided to sell.

When To Sell

The point where a buyer is willing to risk more than you are happens at a different stage for everyone. Let’s say you have a business worth $1 million today. Would you be willing to risk the entire thing on a new strategy for a shot at making it a $10 million company? Many entrepreneurs would take that bet.

Now imagine you have a company worth $10 million and your business represents the bulk of your net worth. Most would argue $10 million is life-changing money. Would you be willing to risk your entire company for a chance to make it a $100 million company? The marginal utility of an extra $90 million is minimal—we all only need so many cars—but the risk is significant. Fewer owners would bet $10 million for a chance at $100 million.

What if your business was worth $100 million? Would you risk it all for a long shot at becoming a billion-dollar company? It is hard to imagine any one person betting $100 million dollars on anything, but if you’re the CEO of a billion-dollar corporation with ambitious growth goals, $100 million is a bet you may be willing to make.

When someone else is willing to invest more in your business than you are, it is probably time your company finds a new owner.

The Surprising Secret To A Big Exit

Fri, 08 Nov 2024 16:39:52 GMT

We get to see a lot of company founders who are contemplating an exit. Some of our customers get lucky early in life, but in the vast majority of examples where a founder is getting a seven- or eight-figure offer, it is not their first rodeo. In fact, most owners have had multiple failures and modest successes before their first big exit.

One of the most compelling reasons to consider selling your business is to give yourself a clean canvass for designing your next business. You can take all of the lessons you’ve learned building your current company and apply them to a new idea.

What would you do with a clean slate?

Michelle Romanow partnered with two friends from her engineering class and together they founded Evandale Caviar in their early 20s. The trio’s idea was to sell caviar to high-end restaurants around the world.

The partners built a fishery and had just started to get the business off the ground by the summer of 2008 when the luxury restaurant industry started to wobble. By fall of that year, high-end restaurants around the world were suffering, and by the end of 2008, the industry was on its knees.

Evandale Caviar failed.

The partners licked their wounds and came together to start a new business, a deal-of-the-day website called Buytopia. They had learned from their Evandale experience and were building a good little business—call it a single, to use a baseball analogy—when the partners started to tinker with a third idea.

From nothing to $25 million in 12 months

Romanow saw big companies wasting millions of dollars printing paper coupons and reasoned that there must be a more efficient way to distribute them. They dreamt up a mobile app that would notify the shoppers in a grocery store of special offers and let them snap a picture of their grocery receipt and receive money back on the products being promoted. The SnapSaves business model was to charge the company advertising its offers through the app.

Romanow and her partners poured more than $100,000 a month of Buytopia cash into SnapSaves, and within six months they had a product they could take to market. They launched SnapSaves in August 2013 and the company was a quick hit with consumers and advertisers. Within a year, the founders were entertaining venture capital investment offers with an implied valuation of around $25 million for their young company.

That’s when Groupon called and said they wanted to buy SnapSaves outright. The partners haggled with Groupon and got them to double their offer in the process. Less than a year after launching SnapSaves, they agreed to be acquired by Groupon.

Third time’s a charm

A casual observer of the SnapSaves story would likely chalk it up to luck: a couple of friends leave school, start a business and become an overnight success. That’s a convenient story, but it’s not true.

SnapSaves would never have happened without the lessons the partners learned from Evandale. And therein lies the secret to many successful entrepreneurs: they got their first few businesses out of the way early in their working lives to make the time, room and capital for a true success.

3 Ways To Make Your Company More Valuable Than Your Industry Peers

Thu, 07 Nov 2024 16:48:05 GMT

Have you ever wondered what determines the value of your business?

Perhaps you’ve heard an industry rule of thumb and assumed that your company will be worth about the same as a similar size company in your industry. However, when we take a look at the data provided by The Value Builder System™, we’ve found there are eight factors that drive the value of your business, and they are all potentially more important than the industry you’re in.

Not convinced? Let’s look at Jill Nelson, who recently sold a majority interest in her $11 million telephone answering service, Ruby Receptionists, for $38.8 million.

That’s a lot of money for answering the phone on behalf of independent lawyers, contractors and plumbers across America.

To give you a sense of how high that valuation is, let’s look at some comparison data. At Value Builder, we’ve worked with more than 30,000 businesses in the last five years. Our clients start by completing their Value Builder questionnaire, which covers 35 questions that allow us to place an estimate of value on a company. The average value for companies starting with us is 3.6 times pre-tax profit and those who graduate our program with a Value Builder Score of 80+ (out of a possible 100) are getting an average of 6.3 times pre-tax profit.

When we isolate the administrative support industry that Ruby Receptionists operates in, the average multiple offered for these companies over the last five years is just 1.8 times pre-tax profit.

Nelson, by contrast, sold the majority interest in Ruby Receptionists for more than 3 times revenue.

There were three factors that made Nelson’s business much more valuable than her industry peers, and they are the same things you can focus on to drive up the value of your company:

1. Cultivate Your Point Of Differentiation

Acquirers do not buy what they could easily build themselves. If your main competitive advantage is price, an acquirer will rightly conclude they can simply set up shop as a competitor and win most of your price sensitive customers away by offering a temporary discount.

In the case of Ruby Receptionists, Nelson invested heavily in a technology that ensured that no matter when a client received a phone call, her technology would route that call to an available receptionist. Nelson’s competitors were mostly low-tech mom and pop businesses who often missed calls when there was a sudden surge of callers. Nelson’s technology could handle client surges because of the unique routing technology she had built that transferred calls efficiently across her network of receptionists.

Nelson’s acquirer, a private equity company called Updata Partners, saw the potential of applying Nelson’s call-routing technology to other businesses they owned and were considering investing in.

2. Recurring Revenue

Acquirers want to know how your business will perform after they buy it. Nothing gives them more confidence that your business will continue to thrive post sale than recurring revenue from subscriptions or service contracts.

In Nelson’s case, Ruby Receptionists billed its customers through recurring contracts—perfect for making a buyer confident that her company has staying power.

3. Customer Diversification

In addition to having customers pay on recurring contracts, the most valuable businesses have lots of little customers rather than one or two biggies. Most acquirers will balk if any one of your customers represents more than 15% of your revenue.

At the time of the acquisition, Ruby Receptionists had 6,000 customers paying an average of just a few hundred dollars per month. Nelson could lose a client or two each month without skipping a beat, which is ideal for reassuring a hesitant buyer that your company’s revenue stream is bulletproof.

Nelson built a valuable company in a relatively unexciting, low-tech industry, proving that how you run your business is more important than the industry you’re in.

Why Now Is The Riskiest Time To Own Your Business

Wed, 06 Nov 2024 16:45:17 GMT

Most people think of starting a business as risky, but unless you invest a significant amount of start-up cash in your venture, you’re not really risking much other than your time.

That changes if you’re lucky enough to get your business off the ground. As your company grows, you start to risk more and more of your wealth because the business you’ve built is actually worth something. The longer you hang on to it, the more you have to lose.

This phenomenon makes owners become more risk averse as their business grows, potentially squeezing off growth to avoid risking what they’ve created. This can mean the owner goes from a company’s great asset to its biggest liability.

Cigar City Brewing

For an example of how growth can impact an owner’s appetite for risk, let’s look at the case of Joey Redner, the founder of Florida-based Cigar City Brewing. Redner’s craft beer operation started off in 2009 with the relatively modest goal of selling 5,000 barrels of beer per year.

Cigar City proved popular with the locals and Redner was able to sell 1,000 barrels of beer in his first year of business.

Cigar City Brewing continued to grow but was thirsty for cash, eventually forcing Redner to take on an SBA loan. Redner quickly surpassed his 5,000-barrel goal, and by 2015, had scaled all the way up to 55,000 barrels per year, at which point he ran out of capacity in his brewing facility.

To get to the next level, Redner would have had to find another $20 million for a major expansion, but he was tired of the feeling of being “all in” at the poker table. He had built something successful and wanted to enjoy financial security rather than having to roll his winnings into even more debt that he would have to personally guarantee with the bank.

Redner decided to sell even though his business was still growing and he had built a brand Floridians loved.

And therein lies one of the hidden reasons owners decide to sell. They are tired of shouldering all of the risk. Most of us have a limited appetite for risk, and, as the Bob Dylan song goes, “When you ain’t got nothing, you got nothing to lose.” Start-ups aren’t risking much, but when you build something successful, every day that you decide to keep it is another day you have all (or most) of your chips on the table, and, no matter how strong your hand, eventually we all decide to cash in.

5 Reasons Why Now Might Be The Right Time To Sell

Tue, 05 Nov 2024 16:58:02 GMT

Are you trying to time the sale of your business so that you exit when both your business and the economy are peaking?

While your objective to build your company’s value is admirable, here are five reasons why you may want to sell sooner than you might think:

1. You May Be Choking Your Business

When you start your business, you have nothing to lose, so you risk it all on your idea. But as you grow, you naturally become more conservative, because your business actually becomes worth something. For many of us, our company is our largest asset, so the idea of losing it on a new growth idea becomes less attractive. We become more conservative and hinder our company’s growth.

2. Money Is Cheap

We’re coming out of a period of ultra-low interest rates. Financial buyers will likely borrow money to buy your business so—at the risk of over simplifying a lot of MBA math—the less it costs them to borrow, the more they will spend to buy your business.

3. Timing Your Sale Is A Fool’s Errand

The costs of most financial assets are correlated, which is to say that the value of your private business, real estate and a Fortune 500 company’s stock all move in roughly the same direction. They all laid an egg in 2009 and now they are all booming. The problem is, you’ll have to do something with the money you make from the sale of your company, which means you will likely buy into a new asset class at the same frothy valuation as you are exiting out at.

4. Cybercrime

If you have moved your customer data into the cloud, it is only a matter of time before you become the target of cybercrime. Randy Ambrosie, the former CEO of 3Macs, a Montreal-based investment company that manages $6 billion for wealthy Canadian families decided to sell in part because he featured feared a cyber attack. Ambrosie and his partners realized they had been under-investing in technology for years, at a time when cybercrime was becoming more prevalent in the financial services space. Ambrosie decided to sell his firm to Raymond James because he realized the cost for staying ahead of hackers was becoming too much to bear.

5. There Is No Corporate Ladder

In most occupations, the ambitious must climb the ladder. Aspiring CEOs must methodically move up, stacking one job on the next until they are ready for the top post. They have to put in the time, play the right politics and succeed at each new assignment to be considered for the next rung.

By choosing a career as an entrepreneur, you get to skip the ladder entirely. You can start a business, sell it, take a sabbatical and start another business and nobody will miss you on the ladder. Your second (or third) business is likely to be more successful than your first, so the sooner you sell your existing business, the sooner you get to take a break and then start working on your next.

It can be tempting to want to time the sale of your business so that the economy and your company are peeking, but in reality, it may be better to sell sooner rather than later.

5 Lessons From Home Depot’s Acquisition of Blinds.com

Mon, 04 Nov 2024 17:52:08 GMT

Jay Steinfeld built Blinds.com into a $100 million e-tailer before selling out to Home Depot. Here are five things that made it a spectacular exit.

Win The Make vs. Buy Battle

Companies like Home Depot have a “make or buy” decision when they see a competitor winning market share. They can opt to buy the competitor or choose to simply re-create what they have built.

An acquirer will likely opt to buy your company if you are so dominant in your niche that recreating what you have built would take too long and cost more than acquiring it from you.

Blinds.com got acquired, in part, because they were a big fish in a small pond. At more than $100 million in revenue, they were the largest online retailer of blinds in America by a long shot. Even though Home Depot has close to $90 billion in sales, Blinds.com were outperforming them in their tiny niche and that made Blinds.com irresistible to Home Depot.

Run It Like It’s Public

At the time of the Home Depot acquisition, Blinds.com had 175 employees, yet Steinfeld had been running the company as if it were public for years. He had put together a top-drawer management team and taken the unusual step of assembling an outside board of directors. He had quarterly board meetings with formal presentation decks, and Steinfeld hired a Big Four firm to complete a full audit of his financials each year.

Steinfeld credits this rigorous approach to running a relatively small company as a major reason Home Depot was interested in Blinds.com and able to close on the acquisition so quickly.

Keep Most Of The Equity

Steinfeld invested $3,000 of his own money into a basic online presence for his blinds store back in 1993 and grew Blinds.com to more than $100 million in sales without diluting himself by taking three or four rounds of institutional investment, as would be typical of an internet start-up. Steinfeld took a small investment from friends and family and used bank debt to help him buy distressed companies for pennies on the dollar. It wasn’t until 2012—almost 20 years after starting the business—that he accepted his first round of “professional” money from a private equity firm who wanted to invest more, but Steinfeld refused, only taking enough to buy out a few of his original investors and pay off some debt.

Keep Investors Aligned

One of the reasons Steinfeld accepted an investment from a private equity group was that he had become misaligned with two of his original investors. The investors saw the success of Blinds.com and wanted Steinfeld to start declaring regular dividends. Steinfeld, by contrast, was focused on building a growth company and needed the cash to fuel his 25% per year growth. After a while, his investor’s expectations got so far out of whack that Steinfeld opted to buy them out.

Share The Love

One of Steinfeld’s best memories is the day he told his employees Home Depot had acquired Blinds.com. Steinfeld had made sure every one of his 175 people had Blinds.com stock options and so stood to gain financially from the sale. Steinfeld went further and gave each employee $2,000 of his own money to start an investment account as a personal thank you for all they had done.

The Downside of Being Upfront with Employees

Fri, 01 Nov 2024 16:42:34 GMT

One of the core principles of creating a more valuable business is ensuring it can run without you by getting managers to think like owners.

The theory goes that empowered employees are the best positioned to solve your company’s thorniest issues, as they are the ones closest to the problems. In theory, people feel more like they are part of a bigger cause and this has the potential to contribute positively to a company’s culture.

American Data Company

Potential is used because being too open with employees can also backfire. To illustrate, let’s look at the example of American Data Company, founded by Josh Holtzman in 2003. Holtzman had built his consulting business up to more than $3 million in revenue by 2011, when he came up with the goal of building it to be a $15- million business. Holtzman knew that a $15-million business would have the scale to provide his employees with more opportunities and a better exit multiple if he ever wanted to sell.

Fifteen Cubed—The Goal of Getting to $15 Million

To galvanize his team around the idea of getting to $15 million, Holtzman came up with a catchy concept he dubbed “Fifteen Cubed”. The idea was that his team would help him build American Data to $15 million in annual revenue by the year 2015 and, if successful, he would share 15% of the proceeds of the sale with his staff as part of a phantom stock option program.

Holtzman announced the goal and bought Fifteen Cubed bracelets for each of his employees to wear as a reminder of their collective goal and how they stood to gain personally if they were able to achieve their common goal.

Initially, the program was received positively, but a year after the announcement, American Data had failed to grow. Another year went by and still American Data was stuck at $3 million to $4 million in revenue.

Suddenly, the prospect of hitting $15 million looked like a long shot. Ultimately, the only way Holtzman could hit the goal was to merge his company with a much larger one, which is what he did when he swapped his equity in American Data for a minority stake in Magnet 360, a consulting company about five times bigger.

The merged companies exceeded $15 million in combined sales and Holtzman’s employees were able to participate in Magnet 360’s phantom stock option program, even though their portion of the proceeds was diluted when American Data merged with Magnet 360. It was a good outcome for all involved, but not quite the home run Holtzman had imagined when he first announced the $15 million revenue goal.

Keeping Employees in the Know

Being open with employees can be a great energy boost when things are going well. Employees see the charts and graphs all moving up and to the right and that can contribute to a positive vibe in the office. But just like using leverage when buying a house can boost results in a good market and magnify mistakes when things turn down, being open has the potential to backfire dramatically if you don’t reach your projected numbers.

As an entrepreneur, you can handle a high degree of ambiguity and you probably have an abnormally high degree of optimism. Just remember the people who work for you have chosen not to be entrepreneurs and for some of them, there may be such a thing as too much information.

Why Startups Stall

Thu, 31 Oct 2024 17:08:27 GMT

Have you ever wondered why startup companies stop growing? Sometimes they run out of potential customers to sell to or their product starts losing market share to a competitor, but there is often a more fundamental reason: the founder(s) lose the stomach for it.

When you start a business, the assets you have outside of your business likely exceed those you have in it, because in the early days, your business is worthless. As your company grows, it starts to have value and becomes a more significant part of your wealth—especially if you’re pouring your profits back into funding your growth.

For most business owners, their company is their largest asset.

Eventually, your business may become such a large proportion of your wealth that you realize you are taking a giant risk every day that you decide to hold on to it just a little bit longer.

95% Of His Wealth In One Business

In 2000, Etienne Borgeat and Olivier Letard co-founded PCO innovation, an IT consulting firm. The company took off and, by 2016, PCO had 600 full-time employees and offices around the world.

As the business grew, Borgeat and Letard started to become uneasy about how much of their wealth was tied up in their business. By 2015, the shares Borgeat held in PCO represented 95% of his wealth.

That’s about the point that aerospace giant Boeing came calling. Boeing wanted PCO to take on a very large project and Borgeat and Letard turned down the opportunity reasoning that the project was so large it could risk their entire company if it went wrong. In the early days, the partners would never have turned down a chance to work with Boeing, but the partners had changed.

That’s when Borgeat and Letard realized the time had come to sell. They agreed to an acquisition offer from Accenture of over one times revenue.

The success of your startup is probably driven by your willingness to put all your eggs in one basket. You’re all in. However, at some point, you may find yourself starting to play it safe, which is about the time your business may be better off in someone else’s hands.

One Tweak That Can (Instantly) Add Millions To The Value Of Your Business

Wed, 30 Oct 2024 16:59:18 GMT

If you’re trying to figure out what your business might be worth, it’s helpful to consider what acquirers are paying for companies like yours these days.

A little internet research will probably reveal that a business like yours trades for a multiple of your pre-tax profit, which is Sellers Discretionary Earnings (SDE) for a small business and Earnings Before Interest Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization (EBITDA) for a slightly larger business.

Obsessing Over Your Multiple

This multiple can transfix entrepreneurs. Many owners want to know their multiple and how they can jack it up. After all, if your business has $500,000 in profit, and it trades for four times profit, it’s worth $2 million; if the same business trades for eight times profit, it’s worth $4 million.

Obviously, your multiple will have a profound impact on the haul you take from the sale of your business, but there is another number worthy of your consideration as well: the number your multiple is multiplying.

How Profitability Is Open To Interpretation

Most entrepreneurs think of profit as an objective measure, calculated by an accountant, but when it comes to the sale of your business, profit is far from objective. Your profit will go through a set of “adjustments” designed to estimate how profitable your business will be under a new owner.

This process of adjusting—and how you defend these adjustments to an acquirer—is where you can dramatically spike your company’s value.

Let’s take a simple example to illustrate. Imagine you run a company with $3 million in revenue and you pay yourself a salary of $200,000 a year. Further, let’s assume you could get a competent manager to run your business as a division of an acquirer for $100,000 per year. You could safely make the case to an acquirer that under their ownership, your business would generate an extra $100,000 in profit. If they are paying you five times profit for your business, that one adjustment has the potential to earn you an extra $500,000.

You should be able to make a case for several adjustments that will boost your profit and, by extension, the value of your business. This is more art than science, and you need to be prepared to defend your case for each adjustment. It is important that you make a good case for how profitable your business will be in the hands of an acquirer.

Some of the most common adjustments relate to rent (common if you own the building your company operates from and your company is paying higher-than-market rent), start–up costs, one-off lawsuits or insurance claims and one-time professional services fees.

Your multiple is important, but the subjective art of adjusting your EBITDA is where a lot of extra money can be made when selling your business.

How To Avoid Disappointment When It's Time To Cash Out

Tue, 29 Oct 2024 17:26:03 GMT

How do you avoid not being disappointed with the money you make from the sale of your company?

Perhaps you’ve heard that companies like yours trade using an industry rule of thumb or that companies of your size sell within a specific range, and you want to get at least what your peers have received.

While these metrics can be useful for tax planning or working out a messy divorce, they may not be the best ways to value your company.

The Only Valuation Technique That Really Matters

In reality, the only valuation technique that will ensure you are happy with your exit is for you to place your own value on your business. What’s it worth to you to keep it? What is all your sweat equity worth? Only when you’re clear on that will you ensure your satisfaction with the sale of your business.

Take Hank Goddard as an example. He started a software company called Mainspring Healthcare Solutions back in 2007. They provided a way for hospitals to keep track of their equipment and evolved into a slick application that hospital workers used to order supplies.

Goddard and his partner started the business by asking some friends and family to invest. The business grew, but there were challenges along the way: Goddard had to fire his entire management team in the early days, product issues needed to be solved and operational issues needed to be resolved.

At times, it was a grind, so when it came time to sell in 2016, Goddard reasoned that he had invested more than half of his career in Mainspring and he wanted to get paid for his life’s work. He also wanted to ensure his original investors got a decent return on their money.

He was approached by Accruent, a company in the same industry, who made Goddard and his partners an offer of one times revenue. Accruent had recently acquired one of Goddard’s competitors for a similar value, so presumably thought this was a fair offer.

Goddard brushed it off as completely unworkable. Goddard had decided he wanted five times revenue for his business. Even for a growing software company, five times revenue was a stretch, but Goddard stuck to his guns. That’s what it was worth to him to sell.

A year after they first approached Goddard, Accruent came back with an offer of two times revenue and, again, Goddard demurred.

Mainspring had developed a new application that was quickly gaining traction and he knew how hard it was to sell to the hospitals he already counted as customers.

He told Accruent his number was five times revenue in cash.

Eventually Goddard got his number.

Being clear on what your number is before going into a negotiation to sell your business can be helpful when emotions start to take over. Rather than rely on industry benchmarks, the best way to ensure you’re not disappointed with the sale of your business is to decide up front what it’s worth to you.

How To Lure A Giant Like Facebook Into Buying Your Company

Mon, 28 Oct 2024 16:52:51 GMT

A great business is bought, not sold, so, if you look too eager to sell your business, you’ll be negotiating on the back foot and look desperate—a recipe for a bad exit.

But, what if you really want to sell? Maybe you’ve got a new idea for a business you want to start or your health is suffering. Then what?

As with many things in life, the secret may be a simple tweak in your vocabulary. Instead of approaching an acquirer to see if they would be interested in buying your business, approach the same company with an offer to partner with them.

Entering into a partnership discussion with a would-be acquirer is a great way for them to discover your strategic assets, because most partnership discussions start with a summary of each company’s strengths and future objectives. As you reveal your aspirations to one another, a savvy buyer will often realize there is more to be gained from simply buying your business than partnering with it.

Facebook Buys Ozlo

For example, look at how Charles Jolley played the sale of Ozlo, the company he created to make a better digital assistant. The market for digital assistants is booming. Apple has Siri, Amazon has Alexa and the Google Home device now has Google Assistant built right in.

Jolley started Ozlo with the vision of building a better digital assistant. By 2016, he believed Ozlo had technology superior to that of Apple, Amazon or Google. Realizing his technology needed a big company to distribute it, he started to think about potential acquirers. He developed a long list, but instead of approaching them to buy Ozlo, he suggested they consider partnering with him to distribute Ozlo.

He met with many of the brand-name technology companies in Silicon Valley, including Facebook, which wanted a better digital assistant embedded within its messaging platform. They took a meeting with Jolley under the guise of a potential partnership, but the conversation quickly moved from “partnering with” to “acquiring” Ozlo.

Jolley then approached his other potential partners indicating his conversations with Facebook had moved in a different direction and that he would be entering acquisition talks with Facebook. Hearing Facebook wanted the technology for themselves, some of Jolley’s other potential “partners” also joined the bidding war to acquire Ozlo.

After a competitive process, Facebook offered Jolley a deal he couldn’t refuse, and they closed on a deal in July 2017. Jolley got the deal he wanted in part because he was negotiating from the position of a strong potential partner, rather than a desperate owner just looking to sell.

Successful Entrepreneurs Can Be The Doer And The Dealmaker

Fri, 25 Oct 2024 17:13:30 GMT

Where do you sit on the doer vs. dealmaker continuum? On one hand, you have business owners who are really good operators. They have a plan, know their numbers and work that plan. They look for small improvements every day and hesitate to entertain new strategies because they know what works.

On the other end of the spectrum, you have the dealmakers. They quickly bore of the doing and are constantly on the prowl for the next big idea. They are always on the lookout for a business they can buy, a new concept they can negotiate the rights for or a partnership they can forge.

Some of the most successful entrepreneurs can be equally good at being both doers and dealmakers, and most business owners have a little bit of both personalities, with a tendency to tilt in one direction or the other. However, problems occur when you lean too far in one direction.

Let’s take for example, U.K.-based Jonathan Jay, a twenty-year veteran of the start-up world. Jay got his start publishing magazines, but quickly wanted out, and he sold his publishing company by the age of 27. He then started a coach-training business which competed with one other provider. His competitor ran into trouble and Jay decided to buy his business after less than a week of diligence. Jay then sold the combined entity for a seven-figure payday.

Bored after a week or two of retirement, Jay started a digital marketing company. He found client acquisition a challenge, so he partnered with a marketing guru who had a pre-existing following of customers. Jay gave his new partner 50% of his company in exchange for access to the marketing guru’s list, but he skimped on writing the partnership agreement because he was resentful of the legal bills he was paying to defend an unrelated claim.

Soon after merging, the partners fell out and Jay had to wrestle his shares back without the help of a formal partnership agreement. Unbowed by partnerships, he then found another distressed marketing agency to buy, which he did by assuming its debt and putting virtually nothing down. He put the business into bankruptcy after carving out the one piece that had value and merging it with his marketing company. Within a year of buying the business, he sold the combined entity for another seven-figure exit.

Jay’s story is exhausting. It’s a high-wire act of high-stakes negotiation, success, mistakes and eventual triumph. You can’t help but wonder if he would have been even more successful—and a lot less stressed—if he had been a little more of a doer and little less of a dealmaker.

Whether you are more dealmaker or doer, it’s worth asking yourself whether you’re tilting too far in one direction.

Growing Fast? Here's What's Likely To Kill Your Company

Thu, 24 Oct 2024 17:30:48 GMT

If your goal is to grow your business fast, you need a positive cash flow cycle or the ability to raise money at a feverish pace. Anything less and you will quickly grow yourself out of business.

A positive cash flow cycle simply means you get paid before you have to pay others. A negative cash flow cycle is the direct opposite: you have pay out before your money comes in.

A lifestyle business with good margins can often get away with a negative cash flow cycle, but a growth-oriented business can’t, and it will quickly grow itself bankrupt.

Growing Yourself Bankrupt

To illustrate, take a look at the fatal decision made by Shelley Rogers, who decided to scale a business with a negative cash flow cycle. Rogers started Admincomm Warehousing to help companies recycle their old technology. Rogers purchased old phone systems and computer monitors for pennies on the dollar and sold them to recyclers who dismantled the technology down to its raw materials and sold off the base metals.

In the beginning, Rogers had a positive cash flow cycle. Admincomm would secure the rights to a lot of old gear and invite a group of Chinese recyclers to fly to Calgary to bid on the equipment. If they liked what they saw, the recyclers would be asked to pay in full before they flew home. Then Rogers would organize a shipping container to send the materials to China and pay her suppliers 30 to 60 days later.

In a world hungry for resources, the business model worked and Rogers built a nice lifestyle company with fat margins. That’s when she became aware of the environmental impact of the companies she was selling to as they poisoned the air in the developing world burning the plastic covers off computer gear to get at the base metals it contained. Rogers decided to scale up her operation and start recycling the equipment in her home country of Canada, where she could take advantage of a government program that would send her a check if she could prove she had recycled the equipment domestically.

Her new model required an investment in an expensive recycling machine and the adoption of a new cash model. She now had to buy the gear, recycle the materials and then wait to get her money from the government.

The faster she grew, the less cash she had. Eventually, the business failed.

Rogers Rises From The Ashes With A Positive Cash Flow Model

Rogers learned from the experience and built a new company in the same industry called TopFlight Assets Services. Instead of acquiring old technology, she sold much of it on consignment, allowing her to save cash. Rogers grew TopFlight into a successful enterprise, which she sold in 2013 for six times Earnings Before Interest Taxes Depreciation and Amortization (EBITDA) to CSI Leasing, one of the largest equipment leasing companies in the world.

Rogers got a great multiple for her business in part because of her focus on cash flow. Many owner think cash flow means their profits on a Profit & Loss Statement. While profit is important, acquirers also care deeply about cash flow—the money your business makes (or needs) to run.

The reason is simple: when an acquirer buys your business, they will likely need to finance it. If your business needs constant infusions of cash, an acquirer will have to commit more money to your business. Since investors are all about getting a return on their money, the more they have to invest in your business, the higher the return they expect, forcing them to reduce the original price they pay you.

So, whether your goal is to scale or sell for a premium (or both), having a positive cash flow cycle is a prerequisite.

Learning From Acquisitions That Fall Apart

Wed, 23 Oct 2024 16:35:41 GMT

John McCann sold The Bolt Supply House to Lawson Products (NASDAQ: LAWS) at the end of 2017.

McCann’s strategy involved learning from the acquirers who knocked on his door. He invited would-be buyers into The Bolt Supply House and listened to what they had to say. He was not committed to selling, but instead wanted to know what they liked and what concerned them about his company.

One giant European conglomerate, for example, approached McCann about selling, but after a thorough evaluation, they backed out of a deal, worried about McCann’s central distribution system.

McCann thanked them for their time and set to work turning his distribution system into a masterpiece. Eventually, Lawson cited this as one of the many things that attracted them to The Bolt Supply House.

When it finally came time to sell, McCann commanded a premium, arguing that he had built a world-class company he knew would be a strategic gem for a lot of businesses. He ended up getting five competing offers for The Bolt Supply House and eventually sold to Lawson.

When a big sophisticated acquirer approaches you about selling, the temptation is to decline a meeting if you’re not ready to sell, but hearing what they have to say can be a great way to get some superb consulting, for free. The investment bankers and corporate development executives who lead acquisitions for big acquirers are often some of the smartest, most strategic executives in your industry and—provided you don’t get sucked into a prop deal—hearing how they view your business can be an inexpensive way to improve the value of your company.

The Build vs. Buy Equation

Tue, 22 Oct 2024 17:14:01 GMT

If you’re wondering what your business might be worth to an acquirer, there is a simple calculation you can use.

Let’s call it “The Build vs. Buy Equation”.

At some point, every acquirer does the math and calculates how much it would cost to re-create what you’ve built. If an acquirer figures they could buy your business for less than they would spend on both the hard and soft costs of re-deploying their employees to build a competitive product, then they will be inclined to acquire yours. If they think it would be less costly to create it themselves, they are likely to choose to compete instead.

The key to ensuring that what you have is difficult to replicate is focusing on a single product or service and building on your competitive point of differentiation. When you create a product that is unique and pour all of your resources into continuing to differentiate it from the pack, you can dictate terms, because re-creating your business becomes harder the more you focus on one thing.

The worst strategy is to offer a wide range of services and products only loosely differentiated from others on the market. Any acquirer will rightly assume they can set up shop to compete with you by simply undercutting your prices for a period of time and driving you out of business.

C-Labs Focuses On Building An Irresistible Product

Chris Muench started C-Labs in 2008 to go after the burgeoning opportunities presented by the Internet-of-Things (IOT). He began by writing custom software applications that allowed one machine to talk to another. In 2014, he got the industrial giant TRUMPF International to acquire 30% of C-Labs, which gave him the cash to transform his service offering into a single product.

By the end of 2016, Muench’s product was showing early signs of gaining traction but C-Labs was running out of money.

In the end, TRUMPF acquired C-Labs in a seven-figure deal that could stretch to eight figures if Muench is successful in hitting his future targets. Why would a large, sophisticated company like TRUMPF acquire an early-stage business like C-Labs? Because they knew that re-creating Muench’s technology would cost much more than simply writing a seven-figure check to buy it outright.

In other words, TRUMPF used The Build vs. Buy Equation and realized that buying C-Labs was cheaper than trying to reproduce it.

Selling too many undifferentiated products or services is a recipe for building a business that—if it is sellable at all—will trade at a discount to its industry peers. By contrast, the trick to getting a premium for your business is having a product or service that is irresistible to an acquirer, yet difficult for them to replicate.

Which Is Better, a Financial Buyer or a Strategic Buyer?

Mon, 21 Oct 2024 16:56:42 GMT

If you decide to sell your business to an outside acquirer, you’re going to have to decide between a financial and a strategic buyer—understanding the different motivations of these two buyers can be the key to getting a good price for your business.

A financial buyer is acquiring your future profit stream, so they will evaluate your business based on how much profit it is likely to make and how reliable that profit stream is likely to be. The more profit you can convince them your company will produce, the more they will pay for your business.

But there is a limit to how much they will pay, because financial buyers are playing the buy-low, sell-high game. They do not have a strategic rationale for buying your business. They don’t have an army of sales reps to sell your product or a network of retailers where your product could be merchandised. They are simply trying to get a return on their investors’ money, so they tend to buy small and mid-sized businesses using a combination of this investment layered on top of a pile of debt, and they want to buy your business as cheaply as possible with the hope of flipping it five or ten years down the road.

Because financial buyers are usually investors and not operators, they want you and your team to stick around, so they rarely buy all of a business. Instead, they buy a chunk and ask you to hold on to a tranche of equity to keep you committed.

A strategic buyer is a different cat—usually a larger company in your industry, they are evaluating your business based on what it is worth in their hands. They will try and estimate how much of their product or service they can sell if they added you into the mix. Because of their size, this can often lead to buyers who are willing and able to pay much more for your business.

Tom Franceski and his two partners had built DocStar up to 45 employees when they decided to shop the business to some Private Equity (PE) investors. The PE guys offered four to six times Earnings Before Interest Taxes Depreciation and Amortization (EBITDA), which Franceski deemed low for a fast-growing software company.

Franceski was then approached by a strategic acquirer called Epicor, which is a global software business with a lot of customers who could use what DocStar had built. Epicor offered DocStar around two times revenue—a much fatter multiple than the PE firms were offering.

The Biggest Mistake Owners Make When Selling

Fri, 18 Oct 2024 17:19:13 GMT

One of the biggest mistake owners make in selling their company is being lured into a proprietary deal.

The Definition Of A Proprietary Deal

Acquirers land a proprietary deal (or “prop deal”) when they convince owners to sell their businesses without creating a competitive marketplace. Acquirers running a proprietary deal know they don’t have any competition and tend to make weaker offers with more punitive terms because they know nobody else is bidding.

Many founders become the target of a proprietary deal without even knowing they have been duped. First, someone senior from the acquiring company approaches the founder, complimenting them on their business. The acquirer suggests lunch, and then high-level financials are exchanged. Soon, the owner starts going down a path that is difficult to come back from.

As the parties in a proprietary deal get to know one another, founders often share information with the acquirer that puts them in a compromised negotiation position. The interactions are set up as friendly exchanges between two industry leaders, but many founders reveal key facts in these discussions that end up being used against them when negotiations turn serious. Business owners also become more emotionally committed to selling the more resources they invest in the process and the more time they spend thinking—perhaps dreaming—of what it would mean to sell their business.

How To Avoid Getting Taken In By A Proprietary Deal

Savvy sellers avoid the proprietary deal by creating a competitive process for their company. Take for example Dan Martell, the founder of Clarity.fm , among other companies. When Martell decided to sell Clarity, he knew the likely buyer was one of five New York-based companies. Instead of negotiating with one, he invited all five to an event he hosted in New York. The five CEOs—all of whom knew one another—saw a room full of their competitors and realized that if Clarity went on the market, they would have to out-bid the other buyers in that room.

Hosting the event was Martell’s way of communicating to all the potential buyers that a proprietary deal was off the table and that if they wanted to buy Clarity, they would have to compete for it.

It’s flattering to receive a call from an executive at a company you respect. Just know that if you accept their invitation of lunch, you run the risk of becoming the latest casualty of the proprietary deal.

Exiting Tips From One Of The Top 40 Under 40

Thu, 17 Oct 2024 17:34:43 GMT

Wind Mobile founder Anthony Lacavera has started 12 businesses, six of which he has exited. His exits have ranged in value from the $6 million he got for one of his recent start-ups to $1.3 billion when he sold Wind Mobile. He did it by following two key tips.

1. Understand what kind of company you are running

Lacavera has owned hyper-growth unicorns and lifestyle businesses and urges entrepreneurs to be clear about their long-term prospects. Lacavera started a business supplying hotels with internet access and understood the company would be a good cash generator, but would never sell for a mint. He ran the business for almost two decades and used the cash it generated to fund various other ventures. Recently, he finally sold the business, which was generating $1.5 million in pre-tax profit, for $8 million—a relatively modest 5 times earnings, which was fine by Lacavera, because it had served its purpose of funding other companies along the way.

2. The role of CEO and owner are not the same

Lacavera encourages entrepreneurs to separate the role of CEO and business owner. Even though they may be the same person, they have different functions and, at some point, your business may be better served by separating the two roles. Entrepreneurs who are comfortable handing the reins to a professional manager may do better in the long run than those who need to control everything.

Lacavera had great success, which is visible in the fact that he has won just about every business award there is, including 2010 CEO of the Year, Top 40 Under 40, Deloitte Technology Fast 50, and Canada’s Fastest Growing Company. One of the top secrets to Lacavera’s success -- knowing when to bring in a CEO to replace himself in any of his ventures.

Creating Sticky Customers

Wed, 16 Oct 2024 17:03:09 GMT

Repeat customers are the lifeblood of your business, but customers can be fickle. Here's how to make them sticky.

In a traditional business, the customer buys your product or service once, and it is up to you to try to convince them to buy again in the future. However, in a subscription business, you have what is called an "automatic customer" who agrees to purchase from you in the future, as long as you keep providing your service or product.

Feeding Rover Automatically

One of the reasons subscribers are such attractive customers is that, once they subscribe, they become less price-sensitive. To illustrate, imagine you live in England and own a 100-pound Pyrenean Mountain Dog that eats two hearty bowls of dog food a day. Feeding the love of your life is an expensive proposition, so you're always on the lookout for a deal on dog food. Once every two weeks, you trudge down to the local pet supply store and cart a case of kibble home. In the meantime, if you see dog food on sale at your local grocery store, you'll buy it. If you get a coupon for a buy-one-get-one-free offer from another store, you'll take advantage of it.

Eventually, you get tired of last-minute trips to the store, so you subscribe to Warwickshire, UK-based petshop.co.uk, which offers a "Bottomless Bowl" subscription service. Now you know you're going to get a shipment of dog food every fortnight, and the part of your brain that scans the flyers for dog food starts to shut down, knowing that the convenience of having dog food shipped automatically far outweighs saving a few dollars on kibble.

Integration Drives Stickiness

Beyond the simple convenience of automatic service, subscribers become even more loyal when they start to integrate their subscriptions into their daily lives. Subscribers knowingly enter into an agreement in which the convenience of uninterrupted, automatic service is exchanged for their future loyalty. Rather than buying once without returning, subscribers stick around—hopefully for years, which is why subscribers drive up the value of your company so dramatically.

The Surprising Way Companies Like Netflix and Amazon Conduct Market Research

Tue, 15 Oct 2024 17:06:21 GMT

Companies like Netflix, UrthBox, and Amazon are leveraging the subscription business model to discover what their customers want next.

In a traditional business, the customer buys your product or service once, and it is up to you to try to convince them to buy again in the future. You often have no idea if they liked what they bought and what would have made them buy more, so you're left having to guess or invest in costly market research.

In a subscription business, you have "automatic customers" who agree to purchase from you into the future, as long as you keep providing your service or product.

Long-term, direct relationship

Unlike a transactional business model, subscribers are opting into a long-term, direct relationship with you. You know who your customers are and which of your products and services they use, so you have a much better understanding of their preferences than an industry competitor relying on a traditional business model.

A subscription business gives you a direct relationship with your customers and an ability to track their preferences in real time. It's how Netflix knows which television series to produce next and how Amazon figures out what products their Prime subscribers are dreaming of buying next.

But you don't have to be a sophisticated media giant or billion-dollar e-tailer to track customer preferences through the subscription model. Look at subscription-based ContractorSelling.com, run by Joe Crisara. In return for a fee of $89 per month, you can subscribe and get information, tips, and advice on how to run a successful contracting business. Plumbers and electricians subscribe to ContractorSelling.com for Crisara's insight, and as they start to read articles and contribute to the forums, Crisara can see what's on his subscribers' minds.

That's important because Crisara also makes money from conferences. Seeing which articles are most popular and controversial among his members gives Crisara insight that helps when he's picking speakers and topics for his live events.

UrthBox

For $20 a month, UrthBox offers a monthly selection of hand-picked, natural, GMO-free goods to try. UrthBox asks subscribers what they think of the products in each box and rewards them when they respond or refer a friend. Each referral earns points that the subscriber can then use in the online store.

UrthBox then offers the manufacturers of the samples a custom online portal where marketers can see how UrthBox subscribers rated each product. UrthBox uses the data to select merchandise for its online store and prominently displays the products customers like best.

One of the hidden benefits of turning customers into subscribers is the ongoing, direct nature of a subscription relationship, which means you can watch and ask your customers for feedback, ensuring they stay subscribers and buy more over time.

The One Number Owners Need to Stop Focusing On

Mon, 14 Oct 2024 18:23:20 GMT

The value of your business comes down to a single equation: what multiple of your profit is an acquirer willing to pay for your company?

profit × multiple = value

Most owners believe the best way to improve the value of their company is to make more profit – so, they find ways to sell more and more. As experts in their industry, it’s natural that customers want to personally engage with them, which means spending more time on the phones, on the road and face-to-face to increase sales.

With this model, a company can slightly grow, but the owner’s life becomes much more difficult: customers demand more time and service, employees begin to burn out, and soon it feels like there are not enough hours in the day. Revenue flat lines, health can suffer and relationships get strained – all from working too much. Does this feel familiar?

If you’re spending too much time and effort on increasing your profit, you could find yourself diminishing the overall value of your business. The solution? Focus on driving your multiple (the other number in the equation above). Driving your multiple will ultimately help you grow your company value, improve your profit and redeem your freedom.

What Drives Your Multiple

Differentiated Market Position

Acquirers only buy what they could not easily create, so expect to be paid more if you have close to a monopoly on what you sell and/or are one of the few companies who have been licensed to provide the specific product or service in your market.

Lots of Runway

Most founders think market share is something to strive for, but in the eyes of an acquirer, it can decrease the value of your business because you’ve already sopped up most of the opportunity.

Recurring Revenue

An acquirer is going to want to know how your business will do once you leave – recurring revenue assures them that there will still be a business once the founder hits eject.

Financials

The size and profitability of your company will matter to investors. So will the quality of your bookkeeping.

The You Factor

The most valuable businesses can thrive without their owners. The inverse is also true because the most valuable businesses are masters of independence.

The Big Thing Holding Back Small Businesses

Fri, 11 Oct 2024 16:59:24 GMT

Small businesses stay small either by choice, or because they start chasing growth in the wrong places.

When you strip away the layers, it all comes down to darts.

Imagine a dart board with a bull’s eye and around it is a series of wider and wider circles. The bull’s eye is where the people just like you hang out. They are the people (or businesses) who feel the problem your company set out to solve. They are usually your first customers and raving fans.

The further you go outside of your bull’s eye, the less these prospects feel your exact pain.

Why do entrepreneurs go outside their bull’s eye? When you’re a self-funded start-up, you’re scrambling — just trying to bootstrap your way to a company. You don’t have a lot of money to invest in formal marketing, so you rely on word-of-mouth and referrals, which also means you’re often talking to people outside of your bull’s eye.

These prospects may experience the problem you’re trying to solve, but they are slightly different (that’s why they’re not in the bull’s eye). They like your product or service but want a little tweak to it: a customization or a different version. You don’t see the harm in making a change and start to adjust your offering to accommodate the customers outside your bull’s eye.

Your new (slightly-outside-the-bull’s-eye) customer tells her friends about how great you are, and how willing you are to listen to your customers, and she refers a prospect even further outside your bull’s eye who again, asks you for another tweak.

Making these changes to your original product or service to accommodate customers outside your bull’s eye seems innocent enough at the time, but eventually, it undermines your growth.

Why?

To grow a business beyond your efforts, you need to hire employees (or build technology) that can do the work. As humans, we are usually lousy at doing something for the first time, but can master most things with enough repetition.

Think about teaching a toddler how to tie his shoes. The first few attempts are usually rough. It’s a new skill and their tiny hands have never had to make bunny ears before. You break it down for the child and show them how to master each step. It can take weeks, but eventually they get it. As adults, we don’t even think about tying our shoes — we’ve mastered the skill by repetition.

The same is true of your employees. They need time to truly master the delivery or your product or service. Every time you make a tweak for a new customer outside your bull’s eye, it’s like changing the instructions on tying your shoe laces. It’s disorienting for everyone and leads to substandard products and services, which customers receive and are less than enthusiastic about.

Having unhappy customers often leads the owner to step in and “fix” the problem. While some founders can indeed create the customized product or service for their new, outside-the-bull’s-eye customer, they are making their company reliant on them in the process.

A business reliant on its founder will stall out at a handful of employees when the founder runs out of hours in the day.

The secret to avoiding this plateau, and continuing to grow, is to be brutally disciplined in only serving customers in your bull’s eye for much longer than it feels natural. When you want to grow, the temptation is take whatever revenue you can, but the kind of growth that comes from serving customers outside your bull’s eye can be a dead end.

Why Companies are Adopting Subscription Billing Models

Thu, 10 Oct 2024 17:15:46 GMT

Volvo recently announced they will make their cars available on a subscription model where consumers will pay one fixed fee per month for access to a car which includes insurance and maintenance.

Everything from tooth brushes to flowers are now available with subscription billing.

Could you offer some sort of recurring plan to your customers? Here are six reasons to consider offering your customers a subscription:

1. Predictability: When you have subscribers, you can plan what your business needs in the future. For example, the average flower store in America throws out more than half of its inventory each month because it’s too rotten to sell.

At H.Bloom, a subscription-based flower company that sells flowers to hotels and spas, say they throw out less than 2% of their flowers because they can perfectly predict how many flowers are needed to fulfill their orders.

2. Eliminate Seasonality: Many businesses suffer through seasonal highs and lows. In fact, a whopping thirty percent of a typical flower store’s revenue comes on Mother’s Day and Valentine’s Day – ultimately leaving them to scramble and make a sale in November.

By contrast, H.Bloom has a steady stream of subscribers that pay each month. At Mister Car Wash – where they offer a subscription for unlimited car washes – they receive revenue from customers in November and April even though very few people in the Northern east wash their cars in rainy months.

3. Improved Valuation: Recurring revenue boosts the value of your business. Whereas most small companies trade on a multiple of profit, subscription-based businesses often trade on a similar multiple of revenue.

4. The Trojan Horse Effect: Once you subscribe to a service, you become much more likely to buy other things from the same company. That’s one reason Amazon is so keen to get you to buy subscriptions to things like Prime or Subscribe & Save. Amazon knows that once you become a subscriber, you are much more likely to buy additional products.

5. The Sale That Keeps On Giving: Unlike the transaction business model where you have to stimulate demand through advertising to get customers to buy, with a subscription based model, you sell one subscription and it keeps giving month after month.

6. Data & Market Research: When you get a customer to subscribe, you can start to see their spending and consumption habits. This data is the ultimate in market research. It’s how Netflix knows which new shows to produce and which to kibosh.

5 Ways To Package Your Service

Wed, 09 Oct 2024 17:25:35 GMT

If you’re a service provider, it can be difficult to separate the service from the provider. Your customers might demand you, which means you can’t scale your business beyond the number of hours you’re willing to work.

In the absence of a point of differentiation, offering generic services leads consumers to evaluate the people doing the work. Referring to your service in a generic way e.g. “graphic design services”, or “lawn care services”, means you’re lumping yourself in with the other providers of the same service. A quick scan of your LinkedIn profile will reveal that you are likely an expert in your industry which means prospective customers will often demand you, rather than your underlings.

The secret to overcoming this dilemma is to “productize” your service. This involves marketing your service as is if it were a thing. When people start buying the thing, rather than the people providing it, you can grow well beyond the hours in your day.

Proctor & Gamble is the granddaddy of product marketing, so grab a tube of Crest toothpaste and follow their process for productizing your service:

1. Name it

Crest is the brand name and it is always written in the same font. Having a consistent name avoids the generic, commoditized category label of "toothpaste." Do you have a catchy name for your service?

2. Write instructions for use

Crest gives customers instructions for best teeth cleaning results. If you want your service to feel more like a product, include instructions for getting the most out of your service.

3. Provide a caution

The Crest bottle tells you that the product is “harmful if swallowed." Provide a caution label or a set of "terms and conditions" to explain things to avoid when using your service.

4. Barcode it

The barcode includes pricing information. Publishing a price and being consistent will make your service seem more like a product.

5. Copyright it

P&G includes a very small symbol on its bottle to make it clear the company is protecting its ideas. Do you Trademark the terms you use to describe your service?

Productizing your service is the first step to separating your service from its provider and the key to getting your service company to run without you.

5 Reasons Why Your Business Is Too Dependent On You

Tue, 08 Oct 2024 16:43:25 GMT

If you were to draw a picture that visually represents your role in your business, what would it look like? Are you at the top of an organizational chart, or stuck in the middle of your business like a hub in a bicycle wheel?

The Hub & Spoke model is a drive that shows how dependent your business is on you for survival. The Hub & Spoke model can only as strong as the hub. The moment the hub is overwhelmed, the entire system fails. Acquirers generally avoid these types of managed businesses because they understand the dangers of buying a company too dependent on the owner.

Here’s a list of the 5 top warning signs that show your business could be too dependent on you.

1. You are the only signing authority

Most business owners give themselves final authority… all the time. But what happens if you’re away for a couple of days and an important supplier needs to be paid? Consider giving an employee signing authority for an amount you’re comfortable with, and then change the mailing address on your bank statements so they are mailed to your home (not the office). That way, you can review everything coming out of your account and make sure the privilege isn’t being abused.

2. Your revenue is flat when compared to last year’s

Flat revenue from one year to the next can be a sign you are a hub in a hub-and-spoke model. Like forcing water through a hose, you have only so much capacity. No matter how efficient you are, every business dependent on its owner reaches capacity at some point. Consider narrowing your product and service line by eliminating technically complex offers that require your personal involvement, and instead focus on selling fewer things to more people.

3. Your vacations… don’t feel like vacations

If you spend your vacations dispatching orders from your mobile, it’s time to cut the tether. Start by taking one day off and seeing how your company does without you. Build systems for failure points. Work up to a point where you can take a few weeks off without affecting your business.

4. You know all of your customers by first name

It’s good to have the pulse of your market, but knowing every single customer by first name can be a sign that you’re relying too heavily on your personal relationships being the glue that holds your business together. Consider replacing yourself as a rain maker by hiring a sales team, and as inefficient as it seems, have a trusted employee shadow you when you meet customers so over time your customers get used to dealing with someone else.

5. You get cc’d on more than five e-mails a day

Employees, customers and suppliers constantly cc’ing you on e-mails can be a sign that they are looking for your tacit approval or that you have not made clear when you want to be involved in their work. Start by asking your employees to stop using the cc line in an e-mail; ask them to add you to the “to” line if you really must be made aware of something – and only if they need a specific action from you.

Why You Should Exit While You’re Ahead – A Cautionary Tale

Mon, 07 Oct 2024 17:06:13 GMT

The very best time to sell your business is when someone wants to buy it. While it can be tempting to continue to grow your business forever – particularly when things are going well -- that decision comes with a significant downside.

Take a look at the story of Rand Fishkin who started his entrepreneurial journey when he joined his mother’s marketing agency as a partner:

When Fishkin realized how much his Mom’s customers were struggling to get Google to display their company in a search, he immersed himself in the emerging field of Search Engine Optimization (SEO).

He began writing a blog called SEO Moz, which led to an SEO consulting and software company. By 2007, Moz was generating revenue of $850,000 a year when Fishkin decided to drop consulting to become solely a software business.

The company began to grow 100% per year and by 2010, Moz was generating around $650,000 in revenue each month, attracting the attention of Brian Halligan, co-founder of marketing software giant HubSpot.

HubSpot wanted to buy Moz and was offering $25 million of cash and HubSpot stock – an offer almost five times Moz’s $5.7 million of revenue in its last complete financial year.

But Fishkin wasn’t satisfied. He believed a fast growth Software-as-a-Service (SaaS) company was worth four times future revenue and was confident Moz would hit $10 million by the end of that year.

Fishkin counter offered, saying he would be willing to accept $40 million. HubSpot declined.

New Plans Ahead

Instead of selling Moz, Fishkin raised a round of venture capital and started to diversify away from SEO tools into a broader set of marketing offerings. The further Moz veered away from its core in SEO, the more money his business began to lose.

By 2014, Moz was in full crisis mode, and Fishkin had begun suffering from a bout of depression. He decided to step down as CEO, describing his resignation as a “lot of sadness, a heap of regrets and a smattering of resentment.”

Fishkin became a minority shareholder in a company he no longer controlled where the venture capitalists had preferred rights in a liquidity event.

A Lesson Learned

In the ensuing years since turning down Halligan’s offer, HubSpot went public on the New York Stock Exchange and had been worth nearly 20 times as much.

Fishkin revealed that today, his liquid net worth is $800,000 – much of which he was about to spend on elder care for his grandparents. The Moz stock he holds may or may not have value after the venture capitalist get their preferred return. At the same time, Fishkin estimated HubSpot’s offer of $25 million in cash and HubSpot stock would now be worth more than $100 million (based on the increased value of HubSpot’s stock).

Fishkin’s tale is a cautionary reminder why the best time to sell your company is when someone wants to buy it – a story that is shared in his book Lost and Founder: A Painfully Honest Field Guide to the Startup World.

What if an offer was made for your business today? Would you be ready to sell? Would you regret if you said no?

How to increase the value of your business by 71%

Fri, 04 Oct 2024 16:56:50 GMT

How much did your home increase in value last year? Depending on where you live, it may have gone up by 5 - 10% or more.

How much did your stock portfolio increase over the last 12 months? By way of a benchmark, The Dow Jones Industrial Average has increased by around 13% in the last year. Did your portfolio do as well?

Now consider what portion of your wealth is tied to the stock or housing market, and compare that to the equity you have tied up in your business. If you’re like most owners, the majority of your wealth is tied up in your company. Increasing the value of your largest asset can have a much faster impact on your overall financial picture than a bump in the stock market or the value of your home.

Let us introduce you to a statistically proven way to increase the value of your company by as much as 71%. Through an analysis of 55,955 businesses, we’ve discovered that companies that achieve a Value Builder Score of 80+ out of a possible 100 receive offers to buy their business that are 71% higher than what the average company receives.

How long would it take your stock portfolio or home to go up by 71%? Years – maybe even decades. Get your Value Builder Score now and you will be able to track your overall score along with your performance on the eight key drivers of company value. Like a pilot working his instrument panel, you can quickly zero in on which of the eight drivers is dragging down your value the most and then take corrective action.

Your overall Value Builder Score is derived from your performance on the eight attributes that drive the value of your company:

1. Financial Performance: your history of producing revenue and profit combined with the professionalism of your record keeping.

2. Growth Potential: your likelihood to grow your business in the future and at what rate.

3. The Switzerland Structure: how dependent your business is on any one employee, customer or supplier.

4. The Valuation Teeter Totter: whether your business is a cash suck or a cash spigot.

5. The Hierarchy of Recurring Revenue: the proportion and quality of automatic, annuity-based revenue you collect each month.

6. The Monopoly Control: how well differentiated your business is from competitors in your industry.

7. Customer Satisfaction: the likelihood that your customers will re-purchase and also refer you.

8. Hub & Spoke: how your business would perform if you were unexpectedly unable to work for a period of three months.

To find out how you’re performing on the eight key drivers of company value and start your journey to increasing the value of your largest asset, get your Value Builder Score now.

Run Your Private Company Like It’s Public

Thu, 03 Oct 2024 16:52:07 GMT

Small businesses often operate as if their sole purpose is to fund the owner’s lifestyle, but the most valuable companies are run with financial rigor. You may be years from wanting to sell, but starting to formalize your operations now will help you predict the future of your business. Then, when it does come time to sell, you’ll fetch more for what you’ve built because acquirers pay the most for companies when they are less risky. There’s nothing that gives a buyer more confidence than clean books and proper record keeping.

Jay Steinfeld is a great example of how to run a business like a public company. Steinfeld studied Accounting at the University of Texas and joined KPMG after college. His wife owned a small retail store selling blinds and window treatments. The store was successful, but by 1994, Steinfeld had noticed a little Seattle-based outfit that was trying to hawk books online. This company with the peculiar name “Amazon.com” started to succeed in selling books online and Steinfeld wondered if he could get consumers to buy blinds online.

Soon after, Blinds.com was born.

Unlike many of the first-generation online companies that were run with little financial controls, Steinfeld grew Blinds.com like an accountant. He was determined to run his business with the same rigor as a publicly listed company. He built an experienced management team and took the unusual step of assembling an outside board of directors even though Blinds.com was private and Steinfeld owned all of the stock.

The board met quarterly and each of Steinfeld’s senior managers were asked to prepare and deliver formal presentations to his board. Steinfeld hired a big four firm to complete a full audit of his financials each year even though all he needed to satisfy Uncle Sam was a simple tax return.

By 2014, Blinds.com had grown to 175 employees and, at more than $100 million in revenue, was the largest online retailer of blinds in America. Even though Home Depot had close to $90 billion in sales at the time, Blinds.com was outperforming them in its tiny niche, which – coupled with their fastidious bookkeeping -- made Blinds.com absolutely irresistible to Home Depot. On January 23, 2014, Home Depot announced its acquisition of Blinds.com .

Running your business like it’s public will make it more predictable as you grow and ultimately a whole lot more attractive when it comes time to sell.

The Hidden Downside Of This Common Management Idea

Wed, 02 Oct 2024 17:00:40 GMT

Cross selling new products and services to your existing customers may be a great marketing strategy, but if your goal is to increase the value of your business, the added revenue may do nothing for your company’s value – and may even lower it.

In order to be acquired for a premium, consider committing to a product, service, or a bundle that does one thing well. Your aim should be to make that offering so irresistible, that an acquirer will stop at nothing to get their hands on it. This focus will help you build a team around your product or service and ultimately make your company a whole lot more attractive when it comes time to sell.

However, most companies do the opposite. They take their initial success and water it down by cross-selling additional products, leveraging their relationship with their customers to sell them merely good offerings on the back of their great product or service. The problem with wandering too far a field is that while add on products may increase your revenue, they decrease your attractiveness to a strategic acquirer. Like being asked to buy a cable package of hundreds of channels when all you want is a few, acquirers don’t like buying things they will not use and therefore often walk away from a deal where a great product has been watered down with dozens of less attractive products or service lines.

How Stelligent Lost Its Focus (and found it again)

For example, take a look at Stelligent, a company in the business of helping help large enterprises automate their software delivery process. There was a time when big companies used to install their software deep, deep into operations – but the emergence of ‘The Cloud’ changed that. Employees across the globe now get access to the software they use anywhere they have access to a web browser.

Just as you might rent an apartment in a building, software developers pick one of the big cloud service providers like Microsoft Azure, Google Cloud, or Amazon Web Services (AWS) to rent compute, storage, database, and networking resources to run their software systems. Since Azure, Google, and AWS all take a different approach to hosting, an entire industry has been created to help developers configure their software for the cloud service provider they pick.

Paul Duvall, co-founder of Stelligent, is one of the pioneers of this industry called DevOps – which is a set of organizational, culture, process, and tooling practices that accelerate effective feedback between end users to improve the value of the software that's being delivered . Duvall started Stelligent in 2007 with his then silent partner Rob Daly. The goal was to help developers accelerate how quickly they could bring their software to market.

Stelligent was a typical consulting company, selling the time of the engineers Duvall hired on contract as his business required them.

By 2012, Stelligent had a half dozen contract workers and a few employees hovered around one million in annual revenue, as project demand ebbed and flowed. Duvall felt he was running on a treadmill. Each new project Duvall won required him to build a whole new team. Around this time, Rob Daly – who had enjoyed success starting and growing other companies - encouraged

Duvall to read the book Built To Sell, where Duvall especially found tips around specialization to be most valuable.

With a focus on shifting toward even more specialization, Duvall decided to go all in on AWS.

About a year later, in 2014, Daly then joined the team as its 5th employee and would transition to CEO throughout the course of the year becoming very influential in building a team of specialists focused on helping enterprise customers.

As time went by, Stelligent began earning a name for itself as the AWS specialists. As Amazon’s cloud provider service grew in popularity, so did demand for Stelligent’s services. Over the next three years, Stelligent blossomed into a multi-million-dollar business with 30 full-time employees.

By early 2017, Denver-based HOSTING Inc. saw how quickly AWS was growing and concluded that by acquiring Stelligent, they could leapfrog their competition and become a market leader in AWS almost overnight. Later that year, HOSTING acquired Stelligent for about double what a typical consulting company would hope to command for a similar-sized business (when comparing multiples around high-growth companies in the technology sector).

The story of Stelligent is a reminder why you should focus your limited resources on becoming so good in your niche that an acquirer reasons it would take too long – or cost too much – to compete.

Most small businesses with limited cash, can only afford to get that good at solving one problem for their customers. That kind of focus is the opposite of what most sales and marketing pundits preach but it may be the one thing that will make your company irresistible to an acquirer.

Being Stingy With Your Equity

Tue, 01 Oct 2024 17:15:13 GMT

It can be tempting to offer shares in your company to finance its growth. These days, there are plenty of investors chasing promising new companies and, in today’s tight labour market, employees are getting more brazen in their demands for equity-based compensation. However, using equity as a form of currency dilutes your position and may not be necessary with a pinch of creativity.

How David Hauser Bootstrapped His Way To a 9-Figure Exit

David Hauser has been an entrepreneur for most of his life. He had a number of small money-making ventures in high school and studied entrepreneurship at Babson College. He started a web design business after graduation, followed by an internet advertising company.

Through his early experiences in entrepreneurship, Hauser discovered that one of the most frustrating parts of starting and growing a small business was acquiring a phone system. Back in the late 1990’s, big companies used a PBX system to route calls throughout a switchboard, but a PBX system was prohibitively expensive for most small companies to acquire and maintain.

Hauser and his friend Siamak Taghaddos imagined a “virtual PBX” which allowed small business owners to leverage the internet to create a phone system without having to buy any of the hardware. They built a crude version of the technology, named their new company GotVMail (later rebranded as Grasshopper), and launched in 2003.

By 2004, they had acquired their first few customers and could see that in order to scale they would need to buy servers and a lot of advertising to drive demand. The venture capital markets were starting to thaw after the dot com bust of 2001 but Hauser chose not to raise venture capital. Instead, they clung to their equity and bootstrapped their little business.

Instead of ordering servers from Dell, Hauser found a local computer company and sold it on his vision for the future. Hauser asked the owner to make a server for him below cost arguing that if Grasshopper achieved its vision, Hauser would soon buy many more. When Howard Stern moved his show to satellite radio, Grasshopper offered to support Stern’s new medium in return for major concessions on the price of a commercial.

Grasshopper also offered discounts if customers paid for a year’s worth of service up front, effectively turning its customers into financiers of the business. Despite its growth from start-up to $30 million in revenue in just 12 years, Hauser was able to retain the majority of the equity in his business, which he sold to Citrix in 2015 for $165 million in cash and $8.6 million in Citrix stock.

As the story of David Hauser illustrates, owners who focus on value building will guard their equity like a greedy child hoarding a bag of Halloween candy. Rather than selling their friends and family cheap shares or giving every new employee options, they use other forms of financing to start and grow their business.

Rather than thinking of your shares as a currency to distribute lavishly, consider your stock as the essential ingredient to building value.

Starting Vs. Growing a Business

Mon, 30 Sep 2024 17:43:24 GMT

Most company founders are good at the first stages of entrepreneurship. But in the phases that follow, they may only be average. Just because you have a knack for starting companies, doesn’t necessarily mean that those skills translate well into growing one.

There are celebrated cases of founders who have successfully started and grown a business – Elon Musk and Bill Gates come to mind. There are, however, many more examples of entrepreneurs who perform well initially and then hold back their company as it ages. But, as a business owner, you can avoid this.

How One Founder Unlocked the True Value of His Company

Damian James grew up in Melbourne and learned a lot about the aging population in Australia. Realizing that healthcare could be a lucrative field, he discovered a sector ripe for disruption, podiatry. This is a branch of medicine devoted to the diagnosis, medical and surgical treatment of foot and ankle disorders.

At the time, most podiatrists in Melbourne worked from a retail location where the doctor owned and operated a private practice. The podiatrist would rent space, hire some staff, and charge patients per visit. At night, some enterprising doctors would also visit old age homes to offer care. Reasoning that many old people nodded off shortly after dinner, James saw an opportunity for a podiatrist to visit old age homes during the day when it was more convenient for patients.

The Million Dollar Idea

James, who had earned a bachelor’s degree in Podiatry in 1996, started Aged Foot Care. He approached old age homes with a compelling offer of removing the traditional overhead of an office.

Aged Foot Care went through a variety of growing pains over the years, including an expensive rebranding to the name Dimple. By 2015, Dimple was generating roughly $200,000 of profit on $2.5M in revenue.

Time to Grow

Despite his success, James was frustrated. The company’s growth had stalled. His management team seemed perpetually incapable of hitting its targets.

Quarter after quarter, he would set goals with his team, but they would fall short. James decided it was time to bring in outside help, so he hired a Chief Operating Officer.

To recruit the new COO, James knew he would need to give up some equity, so he commissioned a valuation for Dimple which came in at $2.5 million. He offered a salary, plus 5% of the company. James also offered another 3% of the business (up to a maximum of 20%) for every $1 million the COO would grow Dimple’s revenue past $5 million.

The new role was a success. James quickly promoted him to Chief Executive Officer and stepped back from the day-to-day operations. He decided to let the company thrive under the new CEO’s leadership.

Down to just one day a week, James limited his involvement to providing a vision and protecting the company’s core values. The CEO, on the other hand, ran the day-to-day business – pursuing James’ core strategy of contracting with aged care facilities.

The company hit $11 million in revenue by 2017.

The Big Bonus

Zenitas had a similar strategy of bringing healthcare to patients in homes or care centers rather than having them languish in hospital beds. The company was keen to add podiatry to its stable of services. The decision makers realized that acquiring Dimple would allow it to become an overnight market leader.

In July 2017, Zenitas announced they had acquired Dimple for $13.4 million. Under different leadership, the company had grown in value over 500% in less than three years.

Starting and growing a company require different skills which are rarely found in the same individual. This begs the question, ‘is it time to find someone else to run your business?’

Ownership Has Its Privileges

Fri, 27 Sep 2024 17:36:29 GMT

Walk down Nashville’s Lower Broadway any night of the week, and you can hear aspiring artists belting out cover tunes from Elton John to Garth Brooks.

In many cases, these musicians come to Nashville to be discovered but pay their rent using the tips they get by playing other people’s songs. Most are lucky to eke out a modest living while the stars they impersonate run thriving empires.

Forbes estimates [ 1 ] that Luke Bryan, country music’s highest-paid star last year, earned 52 million dollars on the back of his stadium tour and duties as an American Idol judge and Chevy spokesperson.

What’s going on here? Is Bryan that much more talented than the dozens of artists playing his songs in Nashville every night?

Probably not.

The difference comes down to who controls the product. In Bryan’s case, he owns the music and the personal brand he has created to perform it. The cover artist is just reselling his stuff.

The Value Of Your Brand

The music business can be a helpful analogy in explaining why creating a unique brand is such a big contributor to the value of your company. Acquirers want what they could not easily copy. If you’re reselling other people’s products and services, an acquirer will likely argue that there are probably dozens of competitors driving down your margin next to nothing. Further, they may even conclude that they too could earn a license to resell whatever you’re distributing and will, therefore, place little value in the company you’ve built.

However, if you have something exclusive – a unique product or brand that makes people believe what you do is different – an acquirer will pay more, arguing it is difficult to reproduce what you have created.

If you find yourself reselling other people’s products or services, you can still drive up the value of your business by creating a brand around the way you do it. You could argue that Peloton is just selling a stationary bike. Still, it is the unique company they have created around the bike –including the community of riders that subscribe – that has recently driven Peloton’s value north of $7 billion (almost eight times trailing twelve months revenue at the time of their recent Initial Public Offering).

To drive up the value of your company, own the stuff you sell. If that’s not possible, create a unique brand that makes consumers feel as if you do.

Why You Should Fire Yourself

Thu, 26 Sep 2024 17:09:54 GMT

If you find yourself in a position where your customers always insist on speaking with you directly instead of your employees, then you might want to consider shifting your structure so you can improve the value of your business.

Here's why: a business that can thrive without the owner at the center of all its operations is more valuable because processes can run smoothly with or without you. If you're too stuck in the weeds, you'll have a difficult time improving or evolving – and your employees won't have the opportunity to grow and become advocates for your brand.

To maximize the value of your business, you should set a goal to quietly slip into the background and let your staff take center stage. Here are five ways to make customers less inclined to call you:

1. Re-rank

If you display the bio of key staff members on your website, re-order the list so that it is alphabetical rather than hierarchical.

2. Re-brand

If your surname is in your company name, consider a re-brand. There's nothing that makes a customer want to deal with the owner more than having the owner's surname featured in the company name.

3. Hire a President

Giving someone the title of president conveys the message that they have real authority to solve customer problems.

4. Use an email auto-responder

Tim Ferriss, the author of The 4 Hour Work Week among other books, made the email auto-responder famous, and it can serve you well. Set up an automatic response to anyone sending you an email explaining that you are travelling or attending to a strategic project and unable to answer their questions immediately. Instead, train customers to direct questions to the person best suited to answer them quickly.

A word of caution using this strategy: if you continue to answer customer emails after setting up an auto-responder, it's going to become transparent that you're just trying to hide behind your autoresponder, which could diminish your credibility. If you set one up, you need to be ready to let others step in.

5. Play hookey

If you have the kind of business that customers visit in person, set up a home office so you can spend more time away from your location.

For a hard-charging A-type entrepreneur, the steps above can be complicated and feel counterintuitive. They may even have a short-term negative impact on your company's sales, but once you get your customers trained to go to your team, you'll be able to scale up further and ultimately maximize the value of your business.

The Start-Up Paradox

Wed, 25 Sep 2024 16:57:29 GMT

As we enter a new decade, it’s fun to look back on the companies that have stood the test of time. Despite a few well-financed chicken-focused start-ups, mounting pressure to reduce our dependence on meat, and our growing addiction to fancy coffee, McDonald’s has managed to thrive. This year McDonald’s is celebrating its 80th anniversary with a market capitalization of around $150 billion—up roughly 10% over last year.

McDonald’s started when Maurice and Richard (Mac and Dick) were invited by their father, Patrick McDonald, to help flip burgers at his diner, the Airdrome, which the brothers rebranded in 1940 as their namesake.

The two spent almost ten years tinkering with their business before they introduced the “Speedee Service System”—techniques that were pulled from the factory assembly line to serve customers quickly.

The McDonald clan ran their single-location hamburger stand for almost 20 years before Ray Kroc came along, asking to franchise the concept. Mac and Dick had the skills to create a successful one-location business, but it was Kroc who took their modest restaurant and made it world famous.

What Got You Here Won’t Get You There

Three skills are essential to survival as a start-up that you must eventually “unlearn” to grow a business. While these talents are prerequisites for getting a business off the ground, they become a liability as time goes on.

1. Flexibility

In the early days, when cash is scarce, you need to be flexible. Instead of hiring full-time employees, you may need to subcontract work to a partner. This arrangement works well as you pay subcontractors only when you have work, and they pay their expenses.

You also stay flexible when dealing with customers. If you’re just starting up, you’re likely not in a position to dictate to your prospects, so you listen carefully and adjust as necessary to suit their needs.

Instead of setting up a physical location, you may create a makeshift office by patching together a home office or working out of a coffee shop.

All of this bootstrapping allows you to get your business off the ground on a shoestring budget. The problem is that being too flexible can start to become a liability. Your contract employees may have other clients and can’t be at your beck and call when you need them. Your customers may start to ask for so much customization that the only person in your company with the technical skills to fulfill their special requests is you. And, eventually, a customer will want to see where you work and may think less of you if your office is your car.

Flexibility, a prerequisite in the beginning, actually becomes a liability as you grow.

2. Thrift

If you’re self-financing your business, you have no choice but to make it profitable from day one. If it doesn’t make you money today, you don’t do it.

This discipline of getting an instant return on cash invested allows us to get a business off the ground. Still, the problem with fixating on immediate profit is that it can undermine your ability to grow.

For example, redesigning your website won’t make you more profitable this month, but it could be a necessary investment to attract larger contracts from more significant customers in the future.

It’s true that you should never overlook profitability entirely, but it is a good idea to place an equal emphasis on top- and bottom-line results—even if the investment doesn’t pay off right away.

3. Self-reliance

With no money or people to delegate to, a new business owner gets things done on her own. Many of us grow to like the control of doing things our way and fear things might get messed up if we give them to someone else.

Since we can do every job in our company, we often just keep doing some things long after we should. But once you start generating more profit, a few extra bodies are necessary to ensure you’re managing your calendar appropriately and not wasting time.

If you’re not self-reliant in the early days, you won’t even get a business off the ground. But at some point, your inclination to roll up your sleeves and do it yourself can be what stops you from growing.

Overall, flexibility, thrift, and self-reliance are the essential ingredients of any start-up, and for your company to become a world-beater, you somehow have to unlearn those tendencies for a new set of skills.

How To Inoculate Your Business From The Dangers Ahead

Tue, 24 Sep 2024 17:46:45 GMT

A new decade always comes with a slew of predictions that can be scary. Will a new superbug take hold? Will the stock market crash? Will the economy tank?

These are all excellent questions, but without a crystal ball, you can feel helpless. However, there are three practical steps you can take to inoculate yourself from whatever the coming years will bring:

Inoculation Strategy #1: Stop Trying To Time The Market

Many founders try to time the sale of their business to coincide with the peak of an economic cycle, reasoning they will get the best price for their business when the economy is booming.

While this is true in theory, when you sell your company, you need to do something with the money. Perhaps you’ll consider investing in real estate or buying stocks. Still, most investments are impacted by the same macro-economic environment your business enjoys, which means you’ll be buying into just as frothy a market.

The alternative to timing the market is to consider selling when your business meets two criteria:

First, if your company is on a winning streak, it will command a premium compared with average performers in your industry. Pick a time to sell when your revenue is growing, gross margin improving, employees are happy, and customers satisfied.

Second never sell before you have all of the information you’ll need to survive due diligence. After you agree to terms with an acquirer, they’ll need some time to verify your business is as advertised. A sophisticated buyer will look into every aspect of your operations, including your financials, customer contracts, employee agreements, the way you produce your product or service your sales and marketing approach and just about every other facet of your business.

You can’t wait until due diligence to prepare this package of information. The volume of questions will suck up too much of your time. React slowly to an acquirer’s request for information and “deal fatigue” will set in. This malaise happens when an acquirer loses interest in closing an acquisition because it is taking too long.

The way to immunize yourself against whatever the economy may be in the years ahead is to sell when you’re on a winning streak, and you have the data assembled to skate through due diligence with ease.

Inoculation Strategy #2: Pick Your Lane

The global economy has been expanding for several years, fueled by low-interest rates and optimistic consumers, which can be a dangerous time for founders. When the economy is hot, it's tempting to expand outside of your original product and service category as customers seem to be willing to buy just about anything from you.

The problem with diversifying too broadly is that you can become less attractive to an acquirer over time. Acquirers buy what they could not quickly build on their own. When you diversify too broadly, a buyer may pass reasoning, that it would be relatively easy to compete with your similar products or services. They know you'll want to get paid for all of your business, yet they may only want a small part of it.

Remember that acquirers only buy what they could not quickly build themselves, so they place a premium on buying a business with a definite competitive advantage — for example, a proven brand that consumers prefer or a protected technology innovation.

No matter what the economy has in store for the years ahead, do one thing better than anyone else, and you’ll always have a ready pool of potential acquirers for your business.

Inoculation strategy #3: Create A Vision Board

A vision board is a display of images that illustrate where you want to be in the future. Creating one by grabbing a stack of magazines and cut out pictures that appeal to you and communicate the life you want to lead.

A vision board is a compelling way to immunize yourself from the inertia that sets in once the startup years of your company are behind you. When you’re no longer struggling to find the next customer or wondering how you’ll make payroll, running a business may become less exciting. When you no longer need to draw on your creativity and problem-solving skills, one day may flow into the next, and you can become content, but perhaps not truly happy.

Think about a time when you were happiest. You were probably doing something new, perhaps in a new place with new people, learning, contributing and growing. Most owners are happiest when they are starting and growing a business, but when a company matures, it can become stifling.

The problem is, it can be challenging to leave a successful business. Your lifestyle needs are satisfied through your company, so why go? That’s where a vision board can be handy. It allows you to decipher the difference between being happy and merely content. When you find yourself feeling comfortable but not necessarily happy, that might be the perfect time to sell – regardless of what’s happening in the economy at the time.

The Simplest Form Of Recurring Revenue Virtually Every Business Can Adopt

Mon, 23 Sep 2024 17:55:19 GMT

Recurring revenue makes your company more predictable, extends the lifetime value of a customer and ultimately makes your business more valuable. If you’re unsure how to create these automatic sales, a simple service contract can be the place to start.

A service contract is an agreement to provide an ongoing level of service in return for a regular payment. It can be a way to transform an ordinary service company into a predictable subscription business.

For example, Walter Bergeron started a small company servicing circuit boards for large food processing plants. It was a classic service business where Bergeron offered his time to fix customer’s circuit boards when they broke.

The business model worked fine, but cashflow was lumpy. Bergeron had reached a point where he could no longer sell any more of his time, and his growth stalled. Knowing something had to change, Bergeron made a 90-degree turn.

The Switch

He began offering a membership model where, instead of contracting him when a circuit board broke, he asked his customers to subscribe to a plan enabling them to have their circuit boards serviced at any time in return for a fixed monthly fee. Bergeron’s customers paid monthly for access to his technicians when they had a problem.

The switch to a subscription billing model transformed the business, and Bergeron quickly grew the company to $7 million in annual sales, at which point he sold it for $10 million — a significant premium over a standard service company.

As the example of Walter Bergeron illustrates, most small businesses begin life using the “break/fix” business model where a customer has a problem, and you swoop in to provide a solution. This business model may make you feel valued as a problem solver, but it comes at the expense of the value of your company. In the break/fix model, you must create demand, sell your product or service, deliver it, and start all over again, which is why acquirers place a lower value on these transactional businesses when compared to subscription-based companies.

By contrast, with a service contract, you create an ongoing stream of income that has the potential to grow the lifetime value of a customer dramatically. When you can accurately predict how much money you will get from a subscriber, you can invest more in wooing them.

The most compelling reason to adopt a recurring revenue model is the impact it can have on your company’s valuation. Dollar for dollar, recurring revenue can be worth more than twice that of transactional revenue, depending on your industry.

Service contracts are a simple and effective way to transform a transactional business into a recurring revenue goldmine.

3 Ways To Re-Invent Yourself In A Crisis

Fri, 20 Sep 2024 17:10:26 GMT

Veterans refer to “the fog of war” to describe how difficult decision making can be when you’re on the battlefield with imperfect information.

Sometimes the obvious answer in retrospect is not so apparent when you’re in the throes of a crisis which is why we wanted to share the stories of three owners who took bold and decisive action at a time of deep economic uncertainty.

Back in September 11, 2001…

During the days that followed the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001, most Americans believed they were at war. The crisis paralyzed owners who wondered what would become of the world. Spending stopped. The stock market tanked. At the time, Sunny Vanderbeck owned and operated a web hosting company called Data Return and had just seen a $1 billion acquisition offer from Compaq go up in smoke. Vanderbeck took stock. Data Return was burning cash, and Vanderbeck figured they had six months to get a deal done before they could face mortal danger. He continued to look for a buyer and soon received another offer from a technology consulting and software business rolling up IT services companies. Vanderbeck agreed to sell Data Return in return for stock in the IT services roll-up.

Soon after the transaction closed, Vanderbeck realized he had made a mistake. He recognized that his company's acquirer was suffering the consequences of a buying spree, during which they had made forty recent acquisitions. Data Return's acquirer had bitten off more than they could chew, and a little over a year later, they declared bankruptcy. Vanderbeck had fallen from being just days away from a $1 billion payday to owning shares in a bankrupt business. He still had his original Data Return partners and investors who believed in him, so Vanderbeck assembled his team again and bought the assets of his former company out of bankruptcy for $30 million. Four years later, Vanderbeck sold Data Return to Terremark Worldwide in a transaction valued at $85 million.

Listen to Sunny’s story

Back in 2003…

In 2003, the most common term used to describe the state of the economy was the "jobless recovery." The year began with concerns about the war in Iraq. The Dow Jones Industrial Average fell below 8,000 in February. Mortgage rates plunged to 30-year lows, and homeowners rushed to refinance. George Bush cut taxes hoping consumers would start spending. It was against this backdrop that Joshua Dick took over his father's company.

Urnex was generating less than $1 million in annual sales across seven product lines. Dick re-trenched and jettisoned six of the seven product lines to focus his limited resources on the one product that Dick thought had the potential to scale: cleaning supplies for commercial coffee makers. In other words, a niche of a niche. Dick poured all of his limited resources into becoming the best in the world at one thing and ultimately grew Urnex to more than $5 million of EBITDA, which is when he decided to sell for a double-digit multiple.

Back in 2008/9…

The Great Recession that began in 2008 was a time of massive disruption. Stock markets around the world were dropping hundreds of points a day. Banks were failing. Many, including John Moore, thought the world might be ending.

Moore is the founder of 3D4Medical.com , a company that created three-dimensional models of the human body, photographed them and licensed the images to textbook publishers. When the Great Recession of 2008/9 hit Ireland, Moore's business took a significant turn for the worse, and he realized he needed to re-invent the company. Moore decided to offer an application that students could use to learn about anatomy. Instead of focusing exclusively on textbook publishers, they started selling their app directly to students, teachers and medical professionals. The business began to hum as more Universities – including the likes of Stanford and Cambridge – signed on. By 2019, 3D4Medical was up to 75 employees, including a reliable management team. Moore was making plans to continue to grow the business when one of the biggest textbook publishers in the world made an offer to buy 3D4 Medical for $50.6 million.

Listen to John’s story .

8 Steps For Turning A Service Into A Product

Thu, 19 Sep 2024 17:30:11 GMT

Does your business offer a service or a product that you differentiate through a higher level of service?

If so, you're probably disproportionately impacted by the economic disruption caused by the coronavirus pandemic. Consumers are cutting back on services to avoid human contact and conserve cash, but we are still buying products that solve a specific problem.

Businesses are buying products like Zoom, and Slack for teleconferencing and consumers are dropping services in favour of products. Italy was the first western democracy to experience the brunt of the coronavirus pandemic, and it changed everything about daily life, right down to what people bought from Amazon. For example, in the week after the Italian government quarantined most of its citizens, there was a 236% increase in Italians buying sports gear, presumably to set up a home-based exercise routine instead of services like personal training.

Instead of going out to enjoy the service at a great restaurant, we're buying more alcohol. According to a recent Nielsen survey, overall sales of spirits like tequila and vodka were up 75% from the same period last year.

Service Providers Are Pivoting to Provide A Product

Many businesses have reacted by turning their services into what appears to consumers as a tangible product:

· Los Angels-based Guerrilla Tacos typically serves up a lively dining experience and has recently pivoted to offering a product called their "Emergency Taco Kit," a take-out survival kit for the taco lover.

· Spiffy, a US-based mobile car wash service, has switched to offering its COVID-19 "Disinfect & Protect" product.

· U.K.-based Encore has pivoted from a talent booking service to offering their “Personalised Music Message” product, which enables you to commission an artist to create a customized video greeting for a loved one.

To take advantage of our gravitation towards buying products, service providers can take the following eight steps:

Step 1: Niche Down

The first step is to narrow your focus to a single type of customer. Many people feel uncomfortable with this stage – in particular in times like these when you need more customers, not less. It's counterintuitive, but the first critical move in turning your service into a product is niching down because services can be adapted and customized for a variety of customers. In contrast, products need to fit one type of buyer.

Picking one niche also helps you design a great product and efficiently reach potential customers through things like Facebook groups set up to serve a specific target.

Niche down further than you're comfortable, then niche down some more. Consider:

· Demographics: (age, gender, income)

· Firmographics (company size, industry)

· Life stage (just married, retirement)

· Company life stage (start-up, mature etc.)

· Psychographics

Step 2: TVR-Rank Your Services

Once you've niched down more than feels comfortable, the next step in turning your service into a product is to identify the services you offer, which are Teachable to employees, Valuable to your customers who have a Recurring need for it. At The Value Builder System™, we call this finding your "TVR."

Grab a whiteboard or blank piece of paper and make a list of all the services you offer the niche you picked in step 1. Then score each service on a scale of 1 to 10 on the degree to which you can teach employees to offer the service, how valuable it is to your niche and how frequently they need to buy it.

Pick the service that scores the highest and move to Step 3 (you can always come back to this step if you want to consider multiple products).

Step 3: Get Clear on Your Quarter Inch Hole

Harvard Professor Theodore Levitt was famous for saying, “people don't want to buy a quarter-inch drill. They want a quarter-inch hole." Be clear about what problem your product solves for your niche. For example, "The Emergency Taco Kit" makes cooking at home fun for quarantined Angelinos, while the "Disinfect & Protect" product sanitizes cars for essential service providers who need to keep driving.

Step 4: Brand It

With a service, you're typically hiring a person. Still, with a product, you're selling a thing. Unlike people who have names, something like the "Emergency Taco Kit," "Disinfect & Protect" and the "Personalised Music Message" have brands.

Step 5: List Your Ingredients

Service businesses customize their deliverables in a unique proposal for every prospect, but product companies list their ingredients. Pick up any package at a grocery store — whether it's a bottle of dishwasher detergent or a box of cereal — and you'll see an itemized list of what's inside the box, which is why your offering needs to list what customers get when they buy.

Step 6: Pre-Empt Objections

When selling a service, you have the luxury of hearing your prospect's objections first-hand, and you can dynamically address them on-the-spot. When selling a product, you don't have the benefit of a person to overcome objections, so consider what potential objections customers might have and pre-empt them. When selling the “Disinfect & Protect” car cleaning product, Spiffy anticipated the four most common concerns customers raise and pre-empts each in their marketing material. For example, Spiffy assures prospects that they have:

· A money-back guarantee for people who aren't sure

· Insurance in case they damage your car

· Trained technicians who know what they are doing

· Environmentally friendly cleaning products so they don't damage the environment

Step 7: Price It

Services are quoted by the hour, day or project and usually come at the end of a custom proposal. Products publish their price.

Step 8: Manufacture Scarcity

One of the benefits of a service business is that you always have sales leverage because your time is scarce. You can't make more hours in the day, so customers know they need to act to get some of your time.

With product businesses, you need to give people a reason to act today rather than tomorrow. This means you need to manufacture a reason to act through things like limited time offers, limited access products etc.

Service providers have been walloped, but if you make your service look and feel more like a product, you may be able to take advantage of our society's flight to tangible products in uncertain times.

6 Ways to Overcome a Business Trauma

Wed, 18 Sep 2024 17:07:27 GMT

Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) is a mental health condition triggered by experiencing a terrifying event. Although not at the level of enduring a war zone, the events of March 2020 may leave you feeling similar symptoms.

If you’re like most business owners, the first quarter of the year was progressing like any other.

Then…bang!

A superbug started terrorizing the world. Professional basketball was cancelled. One by one, the world began to close its doors.

A significant blow impacted your business, unless you offer an essential service. Perhaps you’ve stabilized your company, or you might still be experiencing the worst of it. Either way, you’re probably a different person as a result of this pandemic.

Now, as things begin to slowly reopen, you may notice a change in your outlook. The Mayo Clinic reports four symptoms of PTSD:

1. Intrusive memories: recurrent, unwanted thoughts

2. Avoidance: trying not to think about the trauma

3. Negative changes in thinking and mood: destructive thoughts about yourself and other people

4. Change in physical and emotional reactions: being easily frightened, overwhelming guilt, or substance abuse

Any of those sound familiar?

If so, you may be experiencing the psychological toll a catastrophic event can have on your psyche. There are three constructive things you can do now.

Option #1: Talk to Someone

Soldiers deal with PTSD by talking to a psychotherapist. Speaking to an advisor about how this pandemic has impacted your business can be therapeutic, and we’re here to help.

Option #2: Rebuild a More Durable Business

Another constructive reaction to this crisis is to commit to building a more durable business that can better withstand shocks to the system in the future.

Option #3: Sell

Many owners—especially those that experienced the brunt of the 2008–09 global financial crisis—have been so traumatized by this pandemic that they don’t have the stomach for another disaster. As a result, they’ve decided to start planning their exit proactively.

If you find yourself choosing option 2 or 3, your immediate action plan will be the same. There are some things you can do now that will make your business more durable in the long term as well as more sellable:

1. Focus on your products and services where you have a point of differentiation. You’ll have more pricing authority in the short term, have better cash flow, and be more attractive to an acquirer in the long run.

2. Create recurring revenue streams that generate sales while you sleep. These can be in the form of service contracts, subscriptions, or maintenance plans. Aim to get the majority of your revenue automatically.

3. De-risk your business, ensuring you’re not too reliant on a single customer or supplier.

4. Create an employee handbook and systematize your processes to lessen your dependence on a key employee (or you calling all of the shots).

5. Clean up your bookkeeping.

6. Generate as much cash as possible from customers up front to create a positive cash flow cycle.

If you’re like a lot of the owners we work with, your business is part of who you are. When that gets threatened, it’s natural to feel traumatized. If you can redirect that energy into building a more durable business, you may never have to experience something like this again.

3 Ways to Get Your Life Back

Tue, 17 Sep 2024 17:05:04 GMT

How’s your workload these days?

If the pandemic has forced you back into the weeds of your business, you’re not alone. Many owners are again doing tasks they haven’t done in years because they have had to lay off front-line staff or their employees have fallen ill or are caring for someone in need.

Being back in the middle of things is neither healthy for you nor your business long term. Personally, it’s a recipe for burnout, and professionally, your business will be less valuable with you doing all the work.

Now is an excellent opportunity to retool your company so that it can start running without you again. These three steps should help:

Step 1: Sell less stuff to more people.

Most companies become too dependent on their owner because they offer too many products and services. With such a full breadth of offerings, it’s hard to find and train employees that can deliver. The secret is to pick something that makes you unique and focus on finding more customers, not more things to sell.

Take Gabriela Isturiz as an example. She cofounded Bellefield Systems, a company offering a timekeeping application for lawyers. Over the next seven years, Bellefield grew to 45 employees. Although many businesses bill by the hour, Isturiz focused exclusively on timekeeping for lawyers, which is one of the reasons she was able to integrate with 32 practice management platforms used by lawyers—a big reason Bellefield's product was so sticky. It worked out well for Isturiz as she was growing 50% a year with EBITDA margins of more than 25% when she sold her company in 2019.

Step 2: Systemize it.

Next, focus on creating systems and procedures for employees to follow. For example, Nashville-based Bryan Clayton built Peachtree, a landscaping business. Most lawn care companies are mom-and-pop operations, but Clayton built Peachtree up to 150 employees before he sold it to LUSA for a seven-figure windfall.

What made Peachtree so unique? Clayton focused on documenting his processes. For example, one of his customers was a McDonald’s franchisee who owned 40 locations. He was frustrated by how many people discarded cigarette butts in his drive-through, so Clayton offered to clear the debris from the lanes as part of his lawn care process. He then trained his employees on the drive-through clean-up process he had created so it was followed across all 40 of the customer’s locations.

Step 3: Outsource it.

Next, consider outsourcing what you’re not very good at. For example, David Lekach started Dream Water, a natural sleep aid bottled in a five-ounce shot similar to the famous 5-Hour Energy Drink.

Lekach built Dream Water to almost $10 million in annual revenue before selling it to Harvest One, a cannabis company, for $34.5 million in cash and Harvest One stock. Lekach saw his role as “selling Dream Water, not making it.” That meant he outsourced the manufacturing, packaging, and distribution of Dream Water to a co-packer, ensuring Lekach and his team could focus on selling Dream Water.

It’s natural for a leader to step in during a crisis, but that’s not sustainable for the long term. Pull yourself out of the doing, and you’ll build a valuable company for the long term that’s a lot less stressful to run along the way.

Raising Your Business Like a Child

Mon, 16 Sep 2024 17:14:58 GMT

Why did you decide to become an entrepreneur?

If you’re like most owners, you aspire to have the freedom that comes from owning your own business:

· The freedom to decide how you spend your time

· The freedom to choose whom to work with and to avoid people who drain your energy

· The freedom to make as much money as you deserve

This desire for freedom often leads owners to aspire for a bigger business, which they think will give them what they want. Unfortunately, most owners who strive for more revenue or profit as their primary goal often have:

· Less time because it’s spent managing an ever-expanding set of offerings.

· Less freedom because complexity inevitably leads to conflict.

· Less money because any available cash is reinvested in growth.

So, in many ways, growing a larger business gets you further from your ultimate goal of freedom.

Instead of thinking of your business as something to push harder and faster, there’s an alternative that may get you closer to what you want. Think of your business as a child, and your role is to guide her into becoming an independent, thriving adult.

If your goal is to create a business that can thrive without you, you will start to make different decisions. That demanding customer who wants your attention on their project no longer looks so attractive. That exciting new product that’s going to require you to sell no longer looks worth it.

By focusing on the role of parent rather than business driver, the demands on your time lessen as your employees pick up more of the load. You may also find your business selling more as you build a team of salespeople rather than relying only on yourself to drive the top line. The ultimate irony is that your business may end up being more valuable than a larger peer where the owner is still mostly responsible for sales.

Acquirers want businesses that will survive the loss of their owner. In many cases, they will pay a premium for companies where the owner is in the background. Consider the case of Damian James, who sold his network of mobile podiatry clinics generating $11 million in revenue for $13.2 million. He credits much of the sale to the fact that he was no longer running the businesses day to day and had reduced his time commitment to just one or two days per week.

David Hauser started Grasshopper, an Internet-based phone system he built to $30 million in annual revenue before he sold it to Citrix for $165 million in cash and $8.6 million in stock. Hauser was down to working just one day per week at the time of the sale of his company.

Growing revenue and profits will be valuable to an acquirer, but if you make them your only goal, you may find yourself with less of what you want. Treat your business like a child who needs guidance to become a thriving adult, and revenue, profits, and ultimate value will come as a by-product.

3 Things Wealthy Business Owners Do Differently

Fri, 13 Sep 2024 20:01:31 GMT

Much is made of analyzing the personality traits of successful entrepreneurs.

Some appear outgoing. Others are introverts. Some lean right, others left. Some are flashy. Others are monk-like with their money.

Their diversity can lead one to the conclusion that there are no common personality traits among successful founders.

Rather than trying to understand who they are, let’s look at what they do.

We’ve had the opportunity to help many businesses improve their value, with some going on to exit their business for seven, eight, or even nine figures. As such, we have a unique vantage point from which to observe the owners who achieve the most financial success. This point of view has allowed us to observe three things the most successful owners do differently:

1. They read business books.

Our most successful customers are voracious consumers of business content. When a new business book hits the bestseller list, most have either read it or summarized its central point.

It’s not just the printed word. Many get information through audiobooks, webinars, or podcasts, others via YouTube.

The actual medium is less important to these successful founders. What’s consistent is their continuous learning pattern and the desire to leverage other people’s smart ideas and put them to work in their own company.

2. They join masterminds.

In the absence of having a board of directors or a boss, successful founders often use a peer board to hold themselves accountable and gain an outside perspective when they’re stuck.

Initially popularized by Napoleon Hill in his class book, Think & Grow Rich, a mastermind gathers a small group of peers to act as one another’s board. Often led by a chair, these groups become lifelines for owners as they navigate big decisions in their businesses and personal lives.

3. They ask questions.

The character trait that makes successful entrepreneurs inclined to read business books and join peer groups is their natural curiosity. They have an unquenchable thirst for knowledge. No matter how successful, they never get full.

You may be surprised not to see the stereotypical attributes of successful entrepreneurs. Many founders are also action oriented, competitive, tenacious, etc., but all those common personality traits are who they are. Our interest is what they do.

Actions are the measure of a person. Take a look at what a founder does to stay sharp, and you’ll see a consistent pattern among the most successful entrepreneurs you know.

The Most Critical Factor in Achieving Your Goals May Surprise You

Thu, 12 Sep 2024 17:29:04 GMT

As we enter the final quarter of the year, it’s time to start thinking about your business goals for 2025.

Given the challenges of recent years, your main objective for next year might be to continue thriving amidst uncertainty. You may want to establish a recurring revenue stream, hire a key team member, or even begin planning your exit strategy..

Whatever your goals are, the most crucial step you can take right now is to write down your plan for achieving them.

A Revealing Study

This point was reinforced by a study published in the British Journal of Health Psychology. The study was designed to explore how different stimuli impacted participants' exercise habits. Researchers divided a random sample of participants into three groups.

In the first group, participants were asked to track how often they exercised. Before starting, they read an unrelated book passage.

For the second group, researchers wanted to measure the effect of motivation. This group also tracked their activity but was given a motivational passage outlining the benefits of exercise for maintaining a healthy lifestyle.

The third group read the same motivational passage as the second group but also had to write down their exercise goals for the upcoming week.

The Results

When the results came in, researchers were surprised. Only 35% of the motivated second group exercised once a week, which was even slightly lower than the first group, where 36% exercised. Motivation alone didn’t seem to make much of a difference.

But in the third group, where participants wrote down their goals, 91% exercised. The simple act of writing down their objectives nearly tripled their likelihood of success.

The conclusion? Motivation alone doesn't drive action. Instead, motivation combined with a written plan significantly increases the chance of achieving your goals.

As you prepare for 2025, this study serves as a powerful reminder: writing down your plan can be the key to making it your best year yet.

3 Things to Consider When You Hit “The Freedom Point”

Wed, 11 Sep 2024 17:08:53 GMT

When was the last time you calculated the percentage of your net worth tied to your company’s value?

When you started your business, its value was probably negligible. Unless you purchased or inherited your company, it wasn’t worth much when you opened your doors, but over time, the proportion of your assets tied to your business may have crept up.

Let’s imagine a hypothetical business owner named Tim, who starts his company at age 30. He has a little bit of equity in his first home and a small retirement fund. When he starts his business, it’s worthless, so it doesn’t yet factor into Tim’s net worth calculation.

By the age of 50, Tim has built up $600,000 worth of equity in his home, his retirement nest egg has grown to $400,000, and his business has blossomed and is now worth $4,000,000. Tim’s company has crept up to represent 80% of his net worth.

Tim knows the first rule of investing is to diversify, which he is careful to do with his retirement account. Still, he has failed to achieve overall diversity given the success of his business.

What’s more, he may have unknowingly passed something called “The Freedom Point,” which is when the net proceeds (i.e., after taxes and expenses) of selling his business would garner enough money for him to live comfortably for the rest of his life. Your lifestyle determines your Freedom Point, but when you pass it, it’s worth considering the risk you’re taking.

If this pandemic has taught us anything, it is that nothing is for sure, and a thriving business one day can turn into a struggling company overnight. When your business makes up most of your net worth and selling it would garner enough money to retire, there’s no financial reason to continue owning your business. You may enjoy the challenge, the social interactions, and the creative process of building a business, but keeping it may be unnecessarily risky.

When you’ve crested the Freedom Point and want to diversity—but still don’t want to retire—you have some options:

· Sell a Minority Stake: In a minority recapitalization, you sell less than half of your shares. Often sold to a financial investor such as a private equity group, a minority recapitalization allows you to diversify your net worth while continuing to control your business.

· Sell a Majority Stake: In a majority recapitalization, you sell more than half of your shares to an investor who will most likely ask you to continue to run your business for many years to come. You get to diversity your wealth, keep some equity in your business for when the investor sells, and continue to run your company.

· Earn-Out: When you sell your company, you’ll likely have to agree to a transition period of sorts. One of the most popular is called an earn-out, where you agree to continue to run your company as a division of your acquirer’s business for a specified period of time. Your earn-out may be as little as a year or as long as seven, but the average is three years. Therefore, if you’re past the Freedom Point and can see yourself wanting to step down in the next three to five years, an earn-out may be worth considering.

Building a successful business is rewarding, but when your personal balance sheet gets out of whack, it may be worth considering the risk you’re shouldering and the options you have for sharing some of it.

How to Create a Recurring Revenue Model That Appeals to Customers

Tue, 10 Sep 2024 17:36:07 GMT

Have you struggled to identify a recurring revenue model that will work in your business?

If so, you’re not alone.

Most owners understand the benefits of recurring revenue, such as predictable cash flow and an increase in their company’s valuation, but struggle with where to start. Just changing your pricing from a one-time transaction to a smaller, recurring fee does not make a sticky subscription model.

The first step of creating a recurring revenue model for your business has nothing to do with your billing platform and everything to do with your target customer. The secret to reimagining your business into a recurring revenue juggernaut is to niche way down.

Niche Down

For a recurring revenue model to retain subscribers, it needs to provide an outlandishly attractive value proposition to customers who agree to continue with the service over the long run. To create that kind of delight, you have to find a pain point where a group of customers feels uniform. That only happens when you niche way down.

For example, when Jorey Ramer, the founder of Super, moved to the San Francisco Bay area, he purchased a home. Ramer had previously been a renter and was surprised by the hassles of owning a house.

Ramer realized that everything from the ice maker in his fridge to the lighting in his backyard was susceptible to failing. He decided to create a subscription model that would allow homeowners to pay one monthly fee in return for a mobile app where subscribers can summon a repair person to fix just about anything that could break down in a home.

Last year Ramer raised $20 million from investors, who see the opportunity in putting home repairs on subscription.

Ramer’s first step in creating Super was not to put out a shingle as a home repair professional with a different billing model. Instead, he focused on niching down to a customer group with a common need. To begin segmenting, he picked homeowners. Then Ramer went further and identified a subsegment of homeowners who are not do-it-yourself types.

Some homeowners are tinkerers and don’t mind digging into a “honey-do”" list every weekend, but Ramer knows those aren’t his people. Instead, he chose to focus on the sub-niche of homeowners that don’t want the hassle and surprises that come with homeownership.

How Peloton Made Their Subscription Sticky

At Peloton, the fitness company that started with a souped-up stationary bike and now includes classes on everything from yoga to running, they have adopted a subscription model. Customers buy the bike (or the treadmill) and then subscribe to Peloton’s content package. To make Peloton’s subscription sticky, they didn’t just target people who wanted to get fit, many of whom were happy to go to a gym before the pandemic. Instead, they targeted relatively affluent people who are too busy to go to the gym. While the single twenty-something sees a spinning class at his local gym as a chance to connect with like-minded people, Peloton knew the forty-something mom with three kids often doesn’t have the time to go to the gym. Therefore, they defined their target customer as relatively affluent fitness enthusiasts who don’t have time to go to the gym—a niche of a niche.

Year to date for 2020, Peloton’s share price has more than tripled.

If you’re stuck trying to come up with a recurring revenue model that would work for your industry, segment your customers based on what makes them buy from you. Then determine if one of your niches has a recurring need for something you sell.

10 Resolutions That Will Boost the Value of Your Company

Mon, 09 Sep 2024 18:08:16 GMT

Finally, 2020 is in the books.

Good riddance.

If your goal is to build a more valuable company in 2024, here are some New Year’s resolutions to consider:

1. Stop chasing revenue. A bigger company is not necessarily a more valuable one if the extra sales come from products and services that are too reliant on you to deliver them.

2. Start surveying your customers using the Net Promoter Score methodology. It’s a fast and easy way for your customers to give you feedback, and it’s predictive of your company’s growth in the future.

3. Sell less stuff to more people. The most valuable companies have a defendable niche selling a few differentiated products and services to many customers. The least valuable businesses sell lots of undifferentiated products and services to a concentrated group of buyers.

4. Drop the products or services that depend on you. If you offer something that needs you to produce or sell it, consider dropping it from your offerings. Services and products that require you suck up your time and cash and don’t contribute significantly to your business’s value.

5. Collect more money up front. Turn a negative cash flow cycle into a positive one and you boost your business’s value and lessen your stress load.

6. Create more recurring revenue. Predictable sales from subscriptions or recurring contracts mean less stress in the short term and a more valuable business over the long run.

7. Be different. Refine your marketing strategy to emphasize the point of differentiation that customers value. Be relentless in highlighting this advantage.

8. Find a backup supplier for your most critical raw materials. Consider placing a small order to establish a commercial relationship and diversify the sources of your most-difficult-to-find materials.

9. Teach them to fish. Answer every employee question of you with “What would you do if you owned the business?” Your goal should be to cultivate employees who think like owners so they can start answering their own questions without coming to you.

10. Create an instruction manual. Document your most important processes so your employees can do their work independently.

Here’s to building a more valuable company in 2024!

4 Reasons Why It’s Better to Own a Big Chunk of a Small Company

Fri, 06 Sep 2024 16:55:30 GMT

Is it better to own a big chunk of a small business or a minority stake in a big company?

It’s one of the fundamental questions all owners must wrestle with. Owning a relatively small slice of a big pie has worked out well for both Elon Musk and Jeff Bezos, who recently traded places on the list of the world’s richest person. Musk still owns around 20% of Tesla, and Bezos controls about 10% of Amazon, so they both have chosen to sell most of their company to fund their ambitions. The success of their bet has been amplified lately given the stock market’s run over the last 12 months.

However, selling part of your business comes with some significant downsides. Let’s take a look at four reasons it’s better to own a big slice of a smaller pie.

Operational Freedom

The most obvious benefit of keeping all of your shares is that you get to decide how to run your company. Nobody can tell you what products to launch or markets to enter. You are the king or queen of your kingdom and can decide the rules.

No Pressure to Exit

Tim Ferriss, the author of five books, including the wildly popular New York Times bestseller The 4-Hour Workweek, recently urged his Twitter followers to consider their endgame before investing in a business: “Before you get into an investment position, know how and when you're going to get out, or at least how and when you will reevaluate. Getting in is the easy part….”

Once you accept outside investment in your business, you must try to earn your shareholders a return. For your investors to realize a gain, you must sell your company (or part of it). Needing to sell so your investors can realize a return means you give up the option to run your business forever and need to start thinking about how your shareholders will get liquid. Some will pressure you while others will wait patiently, but the exit clock starts ticking once you take outside investment.

Nobody Ahead of You in Line

Sophisticated outside investors often demand preferred returns when they invest in your company, which can undermine your take from a sale.

For example, Ana Chaud started Garden Bar to offer fast-casual salads to Portland hipsters. The first store was a success, but the restaurant industry’s thin margins inspired her to grow to get some economies of scale. She raised two rounds of outside capital, including one from a group of convertible noteholders. Chaud skimmed the term sheet but trusted her investors, so she didn’t think much about a clause that gave noteholders 2.5 times their money if she sold the business before the note expired.

Chaud continued to grow to nine locations, with a tenth on the way, when she attracted an exciting offer from Evergreens, Seattle’s fastest-growing salad restaurant. Things were going according to plan right up until Chaud’s lawyer pointed out the investors clause, which had the potential to wash out all her equity.

Chaud agreed to give the proceeds of her acquisition to investors. She negotiated an earn-out, which she hoped would allow her the possibility of a return on her years of sacrifice. Then COVID-19 hit, Portland restaurants were closed, and Chaud ended up with nothing.

Avoid an $80 Million Mistake

The most obvious reason to hang on to your shares is to avoid dilution. When your company is not worth very much in the early days, it can be tempting to give away equity to attract a key team member, but it could end up costing you dearly if you’re too generous.

Take a look at the story of Greg Alexander, who started Sales Benchmark Index (SBI). Alexander started the sales consultancy at his kitchen table and, early into his tenure, gave two employees a quarter share in his business. Ten years later, Alexander ended up selling SBI for $162 million, prompting him to refer to easily giving up half the company as an “$80 million mistake.”

Given the runaway success of some high-profile stocks of late, it can be tempting to consider raising money to fund your growth, but there are still several benefits to owning a big slice of a small pie.

How to Turn Repeat Customers into Subscribers

Thu, 05 Sep 2024 17:50:33 GMT

Many people mix up re-occurring and recurring revenue, but one is much more valuable than the other.

Re-occurring Revenue

Re-occurring revenue comes from customers that have a re-occurring need for whatever you sell and buy from you on an unpredictable yet regular basis.

Imagine a health food store. Customers come in to replenish their supply of vitamins when they run out. The owner is never quite sure when a customer will be back, but she’s pretty sure they will return when they run low on a critical supplement.

Recurring Revenue

Recurring revenue comes from sales to customers that buy from you on a predictable, automatic cadence, for example, a subscription or service contract.

Let’s take the same health food store owner. She recognizes her customer comes in every month or so to buy Vitamin C. She decides to offer a subscription for Vitamin C capsules, where she ships a new bottle to her subscribers each month automatically. The customer doesn’t need to make a dedicated trip to her store, and the owner automatically gets repeat sales.

Compared to one-off transaction revenue, both re-occurring and recurring revenue contribute positively to your company’s value, but one is much more valuable than the other.

For example, Mike Malatesta created Advanced Waste Services (AWS), which helped businesses dispose of their industrial waste. Energy giant Covanta (NYSE: CVA) saw acquiring AWS as the perfect way to enter the industrial waste industry and sent Malatesta a Letter of Intent to acquire AWS for $54.5 million.

Covanta liked that AWS had repeat business from loyal customers that they assumed were on recurring contracts. However, when Covanta started their diligence before closing their acquisition of AWS, they realized some of AWS’s revenue was re-occurring, not recurring, and used that as justification to lower their offer by $4 million.

To convert re-occurring revenue into recurring revenue:

1. Start by segmenting your customers that buy on a re-occurring basis.

2. Look for a segment whose purchase cadence is relatively predictable.

3. Design an offer for your regular, re-occurring customers that makes it more convenient for them to buy on a subscription or service contract rather than on a transactional business model.

4. Aim to give re-occurring customers three compelling reasons to subscribe.

For example, in the case of the vitamin store owner, she could make the case that subscribing to a regular shipment of vitamins is 1) more convenient for the customer because there is no need to drive to the store, 2) more reliable because subscribers would be given priority on available stock, and 3) safer because vitamin subscribers would be given a newsletter describing new clinical trial results of emerging vitamin therapies.

Re-occurring and recurring revenue may sound similar, but when it comes to your company’s value, recurring revenue is far better. Consider converting your re-occurring customers into subscribers, and you’ll build a more predictable—and valuable—business.

The Hidden Danger of Cross-Selling

Wed, 04 Sep 2024 17:12:09 GMT

You've likely heard the adage that it is far easier to cross-sell an existing customer a new product than it is to find a new customer.

And if your goal is to grow at all costs, then cross-selling makes sense.

However, all of that sales growth may not do much for the value of your company. If you cross-sell your existing customers too much stuff, it could make your business far less valuable.

When you cross-sell a customer so many things that they begin to account for more than 15–30% of your revenue, expect your value to drop. If a single customer represents more than 30% of your sales, expect an even deeper discount.

Customer concentration is one factor that makes up your score on The Switzerland Structure — one of eight drivers the folks over at The Value Builder System™ have discovered drives your business's value in an acquirer's eyes.

To summarize in simplistic terms, the least valuable companies focus on selling lots of stuff to a few people. The most valuable businesses do precisely the opposite: by selling less stuff to more people.

How 3D4Medical Made the Switch

As an example, let's look at the medical technology firm 3D4Medical. Founded in 2004 by John Moore, the company built 3-D models of the human body, photographed them, and sold or licensed their images to textbook publishers.

By 2010, 3D4Medical was selling images to a handful of large publishers around the world. Then the recession hit, severely impacting the entire publishing business.

To make things worse, new generations of students increasingly wanted to learn online, rather than through textbooks. The advent of inexpensive digital photography, and the resulting increase in competition for the same customers, also didn't help Moore.

Moore had built a successful company on a handful of customers, but when that segment began to dry up, so did his business. Despite working harder than ever, Moore's revenue plateaued for four straight years. Instead of punching through to the next level, Moore had his hands full just keeping his company going.

But while Moore had relied on too few customers, he still had something no one else had: thousands of 3-D models of the human body.

Then Moore had an idea.

He decided to re-purpose his 3-D images into a mobile app that medical students could use on their phones. Moore expanded the idea to include professors and medical professionals, who could use his 3-D images on an individual basis to learn, teach, and share with patients and students.

By 2019, 3D4Medical had become the biggest producer of medical apps on every app store. The company boasted over 300 of the top universities in the world as clients. Their app served 1.2 million paying customers and had 25 million downloads.

Thanks to having a diverse set of customers, Moore sold 3D4Medical in 2019 for $50.6 million.

The takeaway? Customer concentration is seen as a significant risk when a potential buyer determines the value of your business. That's why the most valuable companies are the ones that sell less stuff to more people.

Why the Future of Your Business Is Critical to Its Value

Tue, 03 Sep 2024 17:28:36 GMT

As a business owner, you’re likely proud of the results you’ve achieved in the past, but when it comes to the value of your business, your future is critical. That’s why your growth potential is one of eight factors that drive the value of your business.

One metric that acquirers may use to evaluate your growth potential is your revenue per employee.

Alphabet (Google’s parent company) generates around $1.3 million in revenue per employee. Compare that to the advertising agency WPP Group, whose average revenue per employee is around $100,000. For every dollar of revenue, WPP needs more than ten times the employees than Alphabet does.

It takes time to recruit, train, and motivate people, which is why WPP has grown more slowly and suffers much lower valuations when compared to a less people-heavy company.

Measuring your revenue per employee is just one of many ways an investor may evaluate how quickly they are likely to grow your company.

Looking Skyward

For an example of some of the other ways acquirers assess your growth potential, take a look at Verizon’s recent acquisition of Skyward. Jonathan Evans started Skyward in 2012 when he spotted companies like Amazon and Walmart using drones for package delivery. Evans was working as an air ambulance helicopter pilot and realized widespread use of drones would eventually create air safety issues.

Evans saw an opportunity where others hadn’t and launched Skyward to develop software that could safely route drone traffic. While he wasn’t a programmer, his extensive aviation experience enabled him to understand how the current airspace management guidelines could be turned into applications that created “digital train tracks” for drones.

Early adopters like utility, construction, and media companies used Skyward’s software to manage their drone fleets. Investors also came calling. Within a few years, Skyward had raised approximately $8 million.

One of those investors was Verizon. Drones would require fast and reliable Internet connectivity to operate safely, and the telecom giant wanted a piece of the future. Airbus came calling too, and when Verizon heard of the aerospace corporation’s interest, they leaped into action and offered to buy the company. For Evans, marrying his nascent technology to the country’s largest telecommunications giant was an ideal match.

Within days, Evans had sold Skyward to Verizon for top dollar. Investors enjoyed returns of between three and five times their original investment.

Given the growth of the industrial drone market, Verizon knew Skyward had the potential to expand quickly as significant companies started to adopt drones. Verizon also understood that as Skyward grew, so too would the customer’s need for Verizon’s data because drones rely on a data connection to communicate with the ground.

No matter what business you’re in, the critical takeaway is to remember that the value of your business is determined less by what you have done in the past and more by what you will likely do in the future.

Protecting Against the End Run

Fri, 30 Aug 2024 17:19:00 GMT

A football defensive coordinator needs to protect against an “end run,” a tactical play where your opponent sends the running back wide around the offensive line to try to evade the oncoming tackle.

Just like in football, you have to defend against an end run coming from a supplier that chooses to go around you to get to your customers. The more of your supply you get from a single provider, the more vulnerable you are to that supplier deciding they don’t need you and instead deciding to go straight to your customers.

TheAmazeApp

Let’s take TheAmazeApp as a case in point. Sebastian Johnston co-founded TheAmazeApp in 2014. The idea was simple. Social media influencers could upload a picture of what they were wearing (i.e., a “look”) and tag the items on TheAmazeApp’s database of e-commerce wholesalers. Then, when one of the influencer’s social media followers liked their look and wanted to purchase one or more of the items the influencer was wearing, TheAmazeApp would receive a commission, 20% of which was shared with the influencer.

TheAmazeApp’s founding team raised $800,000 through the San Francisco-based accelerator 500 Startups. By leveraging their influencers to drive traffic, TheAmazeApp quickly grew to 4 million active users per month.

The app was a huge success on the outside, but there was a flaw in their model that held back their valuation.

For the model to work, influencers needed to be able to tag whatever they were wearing, so TheAmazeApp needed to get a comprehensive catalog of hundreds of thousands of the latest fashion items. That meant that TheAmazeApp relied on the data feed of five e-commerce wholesalers who uploaded their data to TheAmazeApp.

TheAmazeApp was increasingly becoming dependent on Zalando, one of their five data suppliers. Zalando is one of Europe’s largest fashion wholesalers and controlled around 70% of TheAmazeApp’s inventory.

The more TheAmazeApp relied on Zalando’s data, the less leverage they had when it came time to sell. Johnston approached all five of his data providers to buy his business, and two expressed interest in buying TheAmazeApp. This buoyed Johnston’s spirits because he knew multiple bidders would give him some leverage with acquirers.

As the process dragged on, one of the two acquirers dropped out, deciding to set up a competitive app—doing an end run—and leaving only Zalando left. Given Zalando knew they controlled 70% of TheAmazeApp’s inventory and that a comprehensive selection was key to their business model, Zalando knew they were in the driver’s seat.

Johnston also knew that if he pushed Zalando too hard, he risked Zalando also doing an end run around TheAmazeApp and setting up their own competing service.

In the end, Zalando acquired TheAmazeApp for between two to three times revenue, which was a relatively modest multiple given the traffic the app was generating just eight months after being funded by an accelerator.

The lesson? The more of your supply that comes from one provider, the more susceptible you become to your provider doing an end run around you. This liability drags down the value of your business and undermines your negotiating leverage when it’s your time to sell. Do what you can to diversify your suppliers to maximize the value of your business.

Stop Selling Your Time

Thu, 29 Aug 2024 16:52:57 GMT

If your goal is to build a more valuable company, stop selling your time.

Billing by the hour or day means customers are renting your time rather than buying a result, which means that your business model lacks leverage. To grow, you need to either work harder or hire more people. Since it can take months to ramp up new employees, fast growth is just about impossible.

One of the eight factors that acquirers look for in the businesses they invest in is your company's Growth Potential. Simply put, they want to know how fast they could grow your business, and nothing diminishes your Growth Potential more than selling your time.

Billing by the hour can also drag down your customer's satisfaction with your business — because customers dislike the feeling of being nickel and dimed. They know you’re incentivized to lengthen the time a project takes, while they want a solution in the shortest time. This misalignment leads to unhappy customers, which can destroy the value of your business.

Peddling time also invites competition. When you sell your time, you allow customers to compare you with others offering the same service. This can lead to downward pricing pressure and lower margins as you become commoditized.

How Likeable Media Stopped Selling Time

Carrie and Dave Kerpen started Likeable Media, a social media agency, in 2006. Facebook was emerging as a dominant platform, and marketers were trying to figure out how to monetize users of their platform.

The Kerpens started selling their time but quickly realized the limitations of an hourly billing model. They realized that customers didn't want to buy their time. Instead, Likeable customers wanted to buy social content. Marketers wanted a video they could post to their Facebook feed, or a blog post they could publish on their site.

The Kerpens decided to switch from an hourly billing model to the Content Credit System. They assigned each piece of content several credits. For example, a tweet might be one credit, a written blog post might be ten, and a video might cost twenty credits. Customers signed up for an annual allotment of credits they could roll over month to month.

The Content Credit System transformed Likeable Media for the better. To begin with, customers were no longer buying time. Instead, they were happy to pay for tangible output rather than trying to scrutinize an hourly bill. The credits also made it easier for Likeable's Account Managers to upsell customers. They no longer needed to justify why a particular project would take more time. Instead, they suggested that customers buy more credits if they needed more content.

The Kerpens’ innovative billing approach also created recurring revenue because The Content Credit System relied on annual contracts renewed each year.

The Content Credit System also transformed Likeable's cash flow because customers paid for their credits upfront.

Most importantly, the Content Credit System enabled the Kerpens to stop selling their time and build a team. By 2020, Likeable was up to more than 50 full-time employees when they caught the attention of 10Pearls, a digital strategy company which acquired Likeable Media for 8.5 times EBITDA, a healthy premium over a typical marketing agency.

The bottom line? If your goal is to grow a more valuable company, stop selling your time and start selling your customers' results.

How to Avoid the Switzerland Valuation Discount

Wed, 28 Aug 2024 17:40:35 GMT

The Swiss are known to value their independence. They don’t use the Euro currency despite being sandwiched between France and Germany, and they never officially picked sides in the World Wars for fear of tying their wagon too closely to one geopolitical regime over the other.

That’s why we give the name the Switzerland Structure to a business model that is set up to be free of a reliance on a key customer, employee, or supplier.

You probably already know that a customer or employee dependency can undermine the value of your business, but have you ever stopped to think how one of your suppliers could also lead to a valuation drop?

Acquirers want to invest in businesses that inoculate themselves against danger and being dependent on a supplier can be a risk.

The $4 Million Haircut

In 1994 Robert Hartline started selling phones in the back of his car. By 2019 he had built Absolute Wireless into a chain of 56 wireless stores and 350 employees. He had two main carriers that supplied him with the bulk of his data plans.

Hartline was able to systematize his business while he grew by creating employee onboarding videos and delegating key processes for his new employees to follow.

The business was a success, and Hartline was riding high up until early 2020. The pandemic hit, and two of his wireless carriers merged, leaving Hartline’s business spinning out of control.

One carrier assumed the dominant position in the marketplace and promptly delisted its legacy dealers from their Google search listings. Panicked by the abrupt change of posture from his wireless carrier, Hartline decided to sell to another dealer, who was on better terms with the now dominant carrier.

Hartline agreed to an acquisition offer, but as diligence progressed, the carrier insisted Hartline drop 10 of his stores. Hartline’s acquirer promptly dropped the acquisition offer by $4 million. Frustrated but still happy to get out, Hartline agreed to the lower number only to be told the acquirer was not prepared to pay cash and that he would be asked to finance almost half of their acquisition over time.

Hartline has gone on to create successful businesses since his experience with Absolute Wireless and now prefers software businesses, which are not beholden to a major supplier.

If you find yourself too dependent on a supplier, make sure you invest in your customer relationships so that your customer thinks of themselves when buying from you, not your supplier. Next, consider cultivating a relationship with alternative suppliers even if it costs you a point or two of margin in the short term. Over time, the diversity of suppliers will allow you to avoid the valuation discount you incur when you become too dependent on a single supplier.

How Your Greatest Strength Becomes Your Weakness

Tue, 27 Aug 2024 16:35:04 GMT

What’s your greatest strength as a CEO?

Sales?

Marketing?

Operations?

Whatever you do well, know that it might become your Achilles’ heel. As owners, we tend to invest in areas where we know we’re weak. We know we have limited resources, so we spend what we have on backstopping the places where we’re most vulnerable.

This tendency leads many founders to under-invest in areas where they have natural strength. Two of the most common functions are sales and marketing. Most owners are decent salespeople, so they figure they can compensate for a weakness in generating revenue through force of personality and sheer will.

But determination only goes so far, and you may reach a plateau where your greatest strength becomes what’s holding you back.

How Gold Medal Service Got Stuck at $700,000

Mike Agugliaro is an electrician by training and a natural salesman in practice. He’s a gifted speaker, and his warm personality makes him a magnet for customers. When he started Gold Medal Service with his partner Rob Zadotti, they didn’t invest much in sales and marketing. When Agugliaro was interviewed on the Built to Sell Ratio podcast, he admitted the extent of their marketing in their first decade of operations was pinning a business card on the corkboard of the local coffee shop.

Over 12 years, the business grew slowly to around $700,000 in revenue, which was when Zadotti announced he was leaving. The news made Agugliaro re-evaluate what they had been doing. He realized they had been massively under-investing in sales and marketing.

Agugliaro convinced his partner to stay, and together they started investing heavily in sales and marketing. At the time, the yellow pages were still the primary way homeowners found service providers, so they invested in a double-page spread. They tried radio, fliers, and just about any marketing technique they could measure.

Then the partners started to think of their trucks as giant rolling billboards. Agugliaro’s wife did some research and discovered that humans are hardwired to notice the color yellow. Agugliaro and his wife reasoned that humans must have evolved to avoid bees, so they added black lettering. Gold Medal’s 65 trucks were bright yellow and black and became a mainstay on the streets of New Jersey.

The investments in marketing paid off, and Gold Medal went from $700,000 in revenue in 2004 to a whopping $32 million in sales by 2017. Months later, Sun Capital acquired Gold Medal for a significant premium over the 5 x EBITDA multiple typical of the home services industry.

The takeaway? Your greatest strength can help you start a business. Still, at some point, you may be tempted to underinvest in your strengths, which is when they switch from your most significant assets to a hidden liability. As your business grows, you may need to invest in areas you never considered necessary in the past.

The Downside of Being a “One-Stop Shop”

Mon, 26 Aug 2024 19:07:10 GMT

Before Jeff Bezos & Co. blew up traditional distribution channels, there was some value in being the local guy or gal. Being the local product retailer was a good business and being a regional distributor of a popular line could make you a mint.

Those days are almost over.

In a world where anything is available at the click of a mouse, the fact that you’re local means very little. To build a valuable company, you need to go beyond your physical location as a point of differentiation and cultivate a new value proposition. We refer to this process as improving your “Monopoly Control.” The name is inspired by Warren Buffett, who likes to invest in companies with a wide “competitive moat” — essentially a defendable point of differentiation.

While being a local provider may have gotten you into business, it’s not going to be enough to get you out for a decent multiple. To build a valuable company someone may want to buy one day, you need a fresh sales angle.

Take a look at the journey of Mehul Sheth, who went from a middleman to the owner of an eight-figure business. Sheth started VMS Aircraft in 1995 as a distributor of airline parts. He offered a “one-stop shop” for airlines and their maintenance crews to find parts and accessories.

VMS was the local distributor and survived on gross margins of 22–23%. It was a subsistence living, and Sheth was determined to build a more valuable company. He decided to evolve his value proposition from just being the local warehouse for distributing other people’s stuff to a sophisticated provider of advanced materials. Sheth chose to focus on the materials that airlines need to be stored and handled meticulously. If the safety of your metal tube flying 300 people 40,000 feet in the air is determined by the quality of a seam of metal, you want that steel to be handled carefully. You also want the sealant that joins the sheet of metal kept at a temperature that maximizes its adhesiveness. You may also want your rivets stored with the same care a surgeon uses to put away her scalpel after performing life-saving surgery.

Sheth invested in a clean room that minimized dust at his facility. He bought dry ice containers so certain materials could be stored in a cold environment, maximizing their effectiveness. He also repackaged materials into smaller containers so that an airline that only needed a small amount of a particular material didn’t need to buy an entire tub.

Sheth’s evolution from simple reseller to value-added provider fueled his gross margins to 60–70%. Along the way, Sheth attracted a French company that wanted to enter the U.S. market. Rather than set up shop to compete with Sheth, they realized VMS had created a unique offering with a layer of value-added services that would be difficult to imitate. They decided to acquire VMS for 7.4 times EBITDA.

If you find yourself clinging to the “one-stop shop” sales message, consider evolving to something that truly differentiates you in a world where Amazon (and its various e-tailing competitors) will ship you just about anything, anywhere, overnight.

Run Your Business Like You’re Going on Maternity (or Paternity) Leave

Fri, 23 Aug 2024 17:18:15 GMT

How well does your company run when you don’t show up for work?

The answer to this question has a significant impact on the value of your business. Suppose your company could survive your absence for a while. In that case, you will score well on something referred to as “Hub & Spoke,” a driver in increasing your company’s value.

To understand the Hub & Spoke value driver, visualize a big airport like Chicago’s O’Hare or London’s Heathrow. They act as a centralized routing location for the airlines that rely on them. The system works efficiently enough until a snowstorm shuts down a hub and the entire transportation system grinds to a halt.

Now imagine you’re the hub, and you run your business with important issues coming through you. It’s efficient right up until the point you are no longer there to run things, which is why anyone valuing your business will levy a steep discount.

The trick to removing yourself is to document your standard operating procedures so your employees have instructions for how you want things done when you’re not around.

How a Maternity Leave Created a Business That Was Built to Sell

Just like many young couples, Ben and Ariel Zvaifler got a puppy and found themselves trying to figure out how to train their new dog. They also wanted to understand what toys and food they needed. The couple figured they weren’t alone and decided to launch PupBox, a subscription box for new puppy owners.

Ariel Zvaifler was responsible for operations, among other things. She took great care in selecting products and merchandising them inside each PupBox. She even considered details around how each package would be shipped and how it felt when the customer received their PupBox.

When Ariel found out she was pregnant with the couple’s second child, she set to work documenting her standard operating procedures. She put together instructions for her staff describing how to order products, merchandise each item, and ship boxes. It took Ariel six months to document everything, but by the time she was ready to give birth, PupBox was prepared to run without her.

These standard operating procedures were a big part of how PupBox grew and why the giant pet retailer, Petco, acquired PupBox in 2017.

How to Get Your Company to Run Without You

Start by breaking down your job into tasks, and then prepare instructions for your team so that they can follow your standard operating procedures when you’re not there.

Test your team’s knowledge by taking a couple of vacation days to see where your processes have holes. Plug the gaps with more details, and then take a more extended vacation. Keep lengthening your time away from work and tweaking things upon your return so that by the time you’re done, your company can handle your extended absence, similar to a maternity or paternity leave.

One Personality Trait Most Successful Entrepreneurs Share

Thu, 22 Aug 2024 17:13:24 GMT

Survey a group of founders about the personality traits that made them successful, and they will be quick to use words like determination, sacrifice, and hard work. Others will show more humility and chalk their success up to personality traits like curiosity. Still others will credit dumb luck.

However, there is another personality trait that many of the most successful founders have in common: discipline.

They have the discipline to stick to their original vision despite the temptation to veer off course.

The discipline to stick to their original product or service offering despite clients asking for different things…

The discipline to ignore whatever shiny ball is demanding their attention and instead focus on what they set out to do…

Steve Jobs, the legendary co-founder of Apple, said it best:

“People think focus means saying yes to the thing you've got to focus on. But that's not what it means at all. It means saying no to the hundred other good ideas that there are. You have to pick carefully. I'm actually as proud of the things we haven't done as the things I have done. Innovation is saying no to one thousand things.”

How Saying No Led to a 7-Figure Exit

Andy Cabasso studied law at university but never really practiced. Instead, he co-founded JurisPage in 2013, an agency specializing in helping law firms with their marketing.

Cabasso understood the marketing services lawyers need, and his partner, Sam Brodie, knew how to build websites that ranked on Google. Their service was popular among lawyers but also attracted the attention of other service businesses that needed a website that ranked organically as well.

Cabasso and Brodie were tempted to wander outside of their niche but ultimately turned down the opportunity to work with other types of companies, knowing they had something unique to offer lawyers.

They also knew the importance of recurring revenue so insisted that their clients use JurisPage for website hosting, which gave the partners a base of recurring revenue. Prospects offered JurisPage thousands of dollars to build them a website for someone else to host, but Cabasso turned them down, knowing that the recurring website hosting revenue was a fundamental component to building a valuable business.

In the end, Cabasso and Brodie’s discipline paid off because they attracted the attention of Uptime Legal, an Inc. 5000 business specializing in technology and practice management software for law firms.

The two companies fit together like peanut butter and jelly, which is why Uptime Legal acquired JurisPage in a seven-figure deal that closed in 2016.

The moral? While curiosity and grit are important personality traits for any would-be founder, the ability to remain disciplined in the face of opportunity may be the most important attribute of all.

One Counterintuitive Strategy Led to This $380 Million Payday

Wed, 21 Aug 2024 17:56:17 GMT

When David Perry started his video game company, he filled a dartboard in his office with the names of companies he thought would want to buy his company, Gaikai, one day.

Why would a startup business with no revenue or employees be thinking about potential acquirers so early? For Perry, it comes down to something he refers to as “down-the-track thinking.”

Perry was recently interviewed about Sony’s $380 million acquisition of Gaikai, and he described his philosophy by using a moving train as an analogy. He described a train full of people representing an industry. Most people are comfortably inside the train watching the countryside go by. There are some people scrambling behind the train, hoping to jump on. Then there are a select few people who are obsessing over where the train is going and are constantly thinking about the upcoming stops along their journey.

Perry described himself as one of the people thinking about where the train is going next, so it only made sense to him to have a list of businesses he could sell to.

Sony was in the bullseye of Perry’s dartboard of companies to sell to so when his partner suggested they name their company Gaikai, a Japanese word that roughly translates to “open sea”, Perry agreed. The word gaikai is hard for the average English speaker to pronounce, but Perry knew the name would be irresistible to Sony.

Perry and his partners went further and named other parts of their product line with Japanese words and designed the company for the global gaming market, not just American customers, as was the habit of videogame makers at the time.

Years later, when Perry was ready to sell Gaikai, he approached all the big video game makers about buying his company, and Sony was the most enthusiastic. They were thrilled to see the extent to which Perry and his partners had gone to make Gaikai fit Sony’s culture.

Visualizing a shortlist of potential acquirers when you make key decisions is a good way to vet your next move. Imagining how your potential acquirers would react to hear how you are thinking of evolving your company can inspire a more strategic lens through which to make big bets. Whether you are looking to sell soon or are years away from selling, the process of developing a shortlist of potential acquirers tomorrow will help you make better decisions today.

3 Invisible Gates That Stop Most Companies Flat

Tue, 20 Aug 2024 19:23:38 GMT

How many people can one person manage?

Harvard Business Review estimates the ideal range for an experienced manager is between five and nine direct reports. Inc. pegs the sweet spot at seven.

The ratio of managers to direct reports matters because it explains why some companies grow and others plateau. Every business is different, but you can loosely think of a company’s evolution as a series of stages with an invisible gate holding most owners from progressing to the next stage:

Stage 1: Doers (up to 9 employees)

In stage 1, you direct a handful of doers. You need people who can follow your standard operating procedures and execute. Your best employees will often be generalists who can do a lot of things reasonably well. They thrive on variety and like the feeling of getting things done.

Many owners get stuck in stage 1 because they fear delegation. Owners don’t trust employees enough to do the work without their direct oversight. However, those owners courageous enough to hire some managers will graduate to stage 2.

Stage 2: Managers (10–40 employees)

In a Stage 2 company, the owner hires a small number of managers (usually less than five), who are paid to ensure their direct reports execute. The emphasis is on managing against the plan the owner gives them. Good managers understand the process they are being asked to manage. They are detail-oriented and stick to the plan.

While managers may contribute to the plan, they are not usually responsible for creating it. Managers typically need their leader(s) to supply their plan, which is why many companies stall out at stage 2.

Stage 3: Leaders (40 + employees)

For our purposes here, let’s define a leader as a person who can lead a team through more than one layer of management.

Let’s imagine you have a sales leader who oversees two sales managers, each of whom has five salespeople reporting to them. The leader’s job is to set direction and to provide a vision and plan for their managers to execute. They are leading a team of twelve (two managers plus ten salespeople) while simultaneously managing two direct reports.

While most leaders can manage, the opposite is not necessarily true. Leadership requires managers to learn a new set of skills. Leaders need to be able to communicate clearly, delegate effectively, and create strategy.

If you’re stuck at stage 2, you have two options: either you need to hire leaders to parachute into your organization, which risks alienating your managers, or train managers to become leaders. Both strategies are hard and time consuming, which is why many companies get stuck at stage 2.

Half Your People, Half Your Processes

For an example of a company that successfully managed the transition to stage 3, take a look at Acceleration Partners. Started by Robert Glazer in 2007, Acceleration Partners is an agency specializing in partner marketing. Acceleration Partners is a people-centric business that helps brands reach and manage their influencer relationships.

In the beginning, Glazer began hiring people to help him manage clients and their projects. As he described on a recent episode of Built to Sell Radio , Acceleration Partners’ needs evolved as the company expanded: “Every time your company doubles in size, you outgrow half your people and half your processes.”

Glazer grew Acceleration Partners for 14 years, and by the time he sold it in 2021, Glazer had an entire team of leaders overseeing a group of managers who were managing the people doing the work.

If you’re stuck, it’s worth asking if you have the right people in place to take your business to the next stage. In the beginning, you will need managers you can trust. And to graduate to stage 3, you’ll need people who can manage and lead. Some managers may need training, while other areas of your business may need an entirely new leader to make the transition successful.

Six Power Ratios to Start Tracking Now

Mon, 19 Aug 2024 17:36:04 GMT

Doctors in the developing world measure their progress not by the aggregate number of children who die in childbirth, but by the infant mortality rate – a ratio of the number of births to deaths.

Similarly, baseball’s leadoff batters measure their “on-base percentage” – the number of times they get on base – as a percentage of the number of times they get the chance to try.

Acquirers also like tracking ratios, and the more ratios you can provide a potential buyer, the more comfortable they will become with the idea of buying your business. 

Better than the blunt measuring stick of an aggregate number, a ratio expresses the relationship between two numbers, which gives them their power.

If you’re planning to sell your company one day, here’s a list of six ratios to start tracking in your business now to start building value:

1. Employees per square foot

2. Ratio of promoters and detractors

Fred Reichheld and his colleagues at Bain & Company and Satmetrix developed the Net Promoter Score® methodology. It is based on asking customers a single question that is predictive of both repurchase and referral.

Here’s how it works: survey your customers and ask them the question, “On a scale of 0 to 10, how likely are you to recommend <insert your company name> to a friend or colleague?” Figure out what percentage of the people surveyed give you a 9 or 10, and label that your ratio of “promoters.” Calculate your ratio of detractors by figuring out the percentage of people surveyed who gave you a score of 0 to 6. Then calculate your Net Promoter Score (NPS) by subtracting your percentage of detractors from your percentage of promoters. 

The average company in the United States has a NPS of between 10 and 15 percent. Reichheld found companies with an above-average NPS grow faster than average-scoring businesses.

3. Sales per square foot

4. Revenue per employee

Payroll is the number one expense for most businesses, which explains why maximizing your revenue per employee can translate quickly to the bottom line. Google, for example, enjoyed a revenue per employee of more than $1.5 million dollars in 2021, whereas a more traditional people-dependent company may struggle to surpass $100,000 per employee.

5. Customers per account manager

How many customers do you ask your account managers to manage? Finding a balance can be tricky. Some bankers are forced to juggle more than 400 accounts, and therefore do not know each of their customers, whereas some high-end wealth managers may have just 50 clients to stay in contact with.

It’s hard to say what the right ratio is because it is so highly dependent on your industry. Slowly increase your ratio of customers per account manager until you see the first signs of deterioration (slowing sales, drop in customer satisfaction). That’s when you know you have probably pushed it a little too far.

6. Prospects per visitor

What proportion of your website’s visitors “opt-in” by giving you permission to e-mail them in the future? Dr. Karl Blanks and Ben Jesson are the cofounders of Conversion Rate Experts, which advise companies like Google and Apple on how to convert more of their website traffic into customers. Dr. Blanks and Mr. Jesson state that there is no such thing as a typical opt-in rate because so much depends on the source of traffic. They recommend that rather than benchmarking yourself against a competitor, you benchmark against yourself by carrying out tests to beat your site’s current opt-in rate. 

Acquirers have a healthy appetite for data. The more data you can give them – in the ratio format they’re used to examining – the more attractive your business will be in their eyes. 

Will This Be the Year You Seriously Drive Up the Value of Your Company?

Fri, 16 Aug 2024 22:27:42 GMT

If you have resolved to make your company more valuable in 2022, you may want to think hard about how your customers pay.

If you have a recurring revenue model, by contrast, where customers subscribe and pay on an ongoing basis, you can expect your valuation to be a multiple of your revenue.

Buyers pay a pretty penny for companies with recurring revenue because they can clearly see how your company will make money long after you exit.

Not sure how to create recurring revenue? Here are four models to consider:

Products That Run Out

If you have a product that people run out of, consider offering it on subscription. The retailing giant Target sells subscriptions to diapers for busy parents who don’t have the time (or interest) in running to the store to re-stock on Pampers. Dollar Shave Club, which was acquired by Unilever in 2016 for five times revenue, sells razor blades on subscription. The Honest Company sells dish detergent and safe household cleaning products to environmentally conscious consumers and more than 80% of their sales come from subscriptions.

Membership Websites

Services Contracts

If you bill by the hour or the project, consider moving to a fixed monthly fee for your service. That’s what the marketing agency GoBrandGo! did to steady cash flow and create a more predictable service business.

Piggyback Services

Rentals

5 Ways to Get Your Business to Run Without You

Thu, 15 Aug 2024 23:49:39 GMT

Some owners focus on growing their profits, while others are obsessed with sales
goals. Have you ever considered making it your primary goal to set up your business so that it can thrive and grow without you?

A business not dependent on its owner is the ultimate asset to own. It allows you complete control over your time so that you can choose the projects you get involved in and the vacations you take.

When it comes to getting out, a business independent of its owner is worth a lot more than an owner-dependent company.  Here are five ways to set up your business so that it can succeed without you.

1. Give Them a Stake in The Outcome

Jack Stack, the author of The Great Game of Business and A Stake in The Outcome wrote the book on creating an ownership culture inside your company: you are transparent about your financial results, and you allow employees to participate in your financial success. This results in employees who act like owners when you’re not around.

2. Get Them to Walk in Your Shoes

If you’re not quite comfortable opening the books to your employees, consider a simple management technique where you respond to every question your staff brings you with the same answer, “If you owned the company, what would you do?”

By forcing your employees to walk in your shoes, you get them thinking about their question as you would, and it builds the habit of starting to think like an owner. Pretty soon, employees are able to solve their own problems. 

3. Vet Your Offerings

Identify the products and services which require your personal involvement in either making, delivering, or selling them. Make a list of everything you sell and score each on a scale of 0 to 10 on how easy they are to teach an employee to handle. Assign a 10 to offerings that are easy to teach employees and give a lower score to anything that requires your personal attention. Commit to stopping to sell the lowest scoring product or service on your list. Repeat this exercise every quarter. 

4. Create Automatic Customers

Are you the company’s best salesperson? If so, you’ll need to fire yourself as your company’s rainmaker in order to get it to run without you.

One way to do this is to create a recurring revenue business model where customers buy from you automatically. Consider creating a service contract with your customers that offers to fulfill one of their ongoing needs on a regular basis. 

5. Write an Instruction Manual for Your Business

Finally, make sure your company comes with instructions included. Write an employee manual or what MBA-types called Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs). These are a set of rules employees can follow for repetitive tasks in your company. This will ensure employees have a rulebook they can follow when you’re not around, and, when an employee leaves, you can quickly swap them out with a replacement to take on duties of the job. 

You-proofing your business has enormous benefits. It will allow you to create a valuable company and have a life. Your business will be free to scale up because it is no longer dependent on you, its bottleneck. Best of all, it will be worth a lot more to a buyer whenever you are ready to sell. 

One Tweak That Can (Instantly) Add Millions to The Value of Your Business

Thu, 15 Aug 2024 00:30:35 GMT

If you’re trying to figure out what your business might be worth, it’s helpful to consider what acquirers are paying for companies like yours these days.

Obsessing Over Your Multiple

How Profitability Is Open to Interpretation

This process of adjusting—and how you defend these adjustments to an acquirer—is where you can dramatically spike your company’s value.

Your multiple is important, but the subjective art of adjusting your EBITDA is where a lot of extra money can be made when selling your business.

The 2 Best Ways to Make Your Company Special

Wed, 14 Aug 2024 00:06:10 GMT

Specializing in one product or service allows you to focus on delivering that thing better than everyone else. It enables you to hire (or train) specialists in your field, improving the quality of your work, which leads to happier customers. And satisfied customers buy again and refer their friends.

That’s why specialists often grow faster even while they are spending less on marketing, leading to better profit margins and, ultimately, a more valuable company. Specializing in a specific product or service has tremendous benefits, but what if your customers expect you to deliver a range of offerings?

That’s when the second form of specialization can help: focusing on a specific industry.

The Benefits of Becoming an Industry Expert

Specializing in serving a specific industry confers several benefits. First, offering your products or services to one industry allows you to learn the language spoken in that sector. Every industry and profession has a unique language, and being able to speak the jargon can benefit your company. Knowing your industry’s lingo can indirectly communicate to your customers that you are experienced, knowledgeable, and able to navigate the space.

Furthermore, focusing on one sector ensures you stay current with industry trends, which will result in being able to identify new opportunities for your customers sooner than a competitor who serves multiple industries.

Most importantly, specializing in one industry allows your employees to become experts in a sector. You may be an expert in an industry, but chances are, they’re not (particularly when you first hire them). Focusing on a sector accelerates how quickly your staff can become fluent in your industry’s lexicon, which allows you to delegate customer relationship management faster and more successfully.

Specializing in an Industry Led to a 20x Increase in Revenue

For example, look at the story of UK-based founder Raman Sehgal. Sehgal started a small marketing agency called ramarketing in 2009. By 2015 the business had grown to the Pound Sterling equivalent of around $500,000 USD in revenue, but the company was losing customers as fast as they were winning new ones.

Frustrated with his company’s lack of progress, Sehgal decided to do a complete analysis of his business. He found that ramarketing’s most valuable customers (low maintenance, sticky, high gross margin, etc.) were in the pharmaceutical industry. Sehgal decided to pivot his business to solely serve clients in the pharmaceutical supply chain.

Beginning to serve one industry created a sequence of positive events for ramarketing.

Becoming an industry specialist allowed ramarketing to stay up to date with industry trends, learn the lingo, and ultimately improve the quality of their work. An increase in customer satisfaction led to more referrals and a strong reputation in the sector.

His employees began to understand the intricacies of the industry. In the pharmaceutical space, there are many rules and laws to adhere to. Understanding the regulations allowed Sehgal’s employees to better serve their customers.

Subsequently, the business boomed.

The Proof Is in the Pudding

Sehgal’s once stagnant marketing agency grew from $500,000 in turnover in 2015, to over $10 million by 2022, which is when Sehgal accepted an acquisition offer from NorthEdge Capital of more than 10x EBITDA.

In Summary

Sehgal’s bold decision to specialize in the pharmaceutical industry led to a 20x increase in revenue and, ultimately, a lucrative exit.

Narrowing your product or service line is the most common way to increase your company’s value but specializing in one industry carries many of the same benefits.

Systematize Your Business (Without Making it Boring)

Tue, 13 Aug 2024 00:16:30 GMT

Have you ever noticed that you get some of your best ideas in the shower? Every morning, you’re stuck there for a few minutes doing something you’ve done since you were a child. Your mind knows it has a couple of minutes to think.

Employees get the same mental holiday when you specialize and give them systems for routine tasks.

How Ethos3 Unleashes the Creativity of Their Team

Ethos3 is a Nashville-based design company specializing in creating presentation designs. Doing just one thing allows them to systematize their processes much more efficiently than most other design firms. They have a standardized business development method. It’s a templated proposal that includes the number of slides you’ll get, the number of revisions, and the pricing formula. For project management, they use teamwork.com. Again, there’s a set of templates for each stage of the development process, and the project delivery approach is the same every time. It’s a recipe - just add water.

When you give people a procedure to follow for the boring stuff, they can stop worrying about what to do and pour their creative talent into how to do it. Ethos3 has finished second in the World's Best Presentation Contest, and Apple pioneer Guy Kawasaki is among its fans.

As entrepreneurs, it’s easy to assume that everyone likes the adventure of bushwhacking their way through life, not knowing what’s around the next bend. In fact, a lot of your employees would prefer some consistency and structure.

Systems are not the enemy of creativity. And author and consultant Kathy Kolbe has developed a personality test that proves it. The so-called Kolbe Index ranks users on four personality attributes.

Fact Finder describes the extent to which someone likes gathering data before making decisions.

Follow Through measures how much someone likes systems, structure, and routine.

Quick Start quantifies one’s inclination to start new things.

Implementer measures one’s knack for building stuff.

Kolbe’s test shows that we all have a little bit of each attribute, yet we all also have a dominant operating style. Most entrepreneurs score high on “quick start” and low on “follow through.” It’s a classic combination. Most of us love starting things but quickly tire of the details.

Most of your employees will score higher than you on follow through, which means they need more structure to thrive. They may also score higher than you on fact finder, suggesting they need more data than you would before making a decision.

Specializing, and giving your team standard operating procedures, gives your employees the mental breathing room to be creative and the structure they need to thrive.

TAM vs. Target

Fri, 09 Aug 2024 23:32:41 GMT

As you enter the fourth quarter of the year, you may be starting to think about your marketing plans for 2023. Terms like Total Addressable Market (TAM) and Target Market may surface in your planning, and you could be tempted to use them interchangeably.

However, your TAM and your target market are related but slightly different. Treating them as synonyms may be a mistake.

First, let’s understand the difference between the two terms. Your TAM is an estimate of the total size of the market for your product or service over the long term. For example, if you sell left-handed spatulas, your TAM would be anyone who is left-handed.

Your target market is the person or company you plan to focus on in the short to medium term. Using the left-handed spatula example, you may decide to launch your utensil to restaurants, so you decide to target professional chefs who happen to be left-handed – a subsegment within your TAM.

The trick to writing an effective marketing plan is to pick a target market within your TAM that is large enough to meet your medium-term sales goals (i.e., the next year or two), but not so large that your messaging will become diluted.

How Avail Confused its TAM with their Target Market

In 2012, Ryan Coon started Avail, a software application designed to help landlords manage and communicate with their tenants more effectively.

Avail defined its TAM as landlords in the United States and Coon started marketing to all of them. Large commercial landlords have different requirements than small real estate investors, but Coon was treating them all the same. By 2016, the company had grown to $1 million in revenue, but Avail was experiencing churn, causing their growth to plateau.

Determined to get the company back on a growth track, Coon transformed his strategy. He niched down to his primary target market. A sub-segment of Avail’s TAM they defined as “DIY landlords managing less than ten units”.

Choosing a segment of their TAM helped Coon turn the company around. Narrowing their focus allowed the product team to simplify their features for amateur landlords. With a purpose-built product for smaller real estate investors, retention improved. The tighter definition of their market also led to better messaging that resonated with their target leading to improved response rates.

Between 2016 and 2020, Avail’s revenue grew from $1 million to $7 million. That’s when their expansion caught the attention of Realtor.com, who acquired Avail for around five times revenue.

Why Your TAM is Still Important

You may be wondering why your TAM still matters if the secret to better marketing is narrowing your target to a segment within it. However, your TAM remains important as you talk to investors or potential acquirers. Acquirers and investors place a premium on growth, so they are going to want to understand the total size of the market that is available for your product, even though you may have no intention of targeting them in the short to medium term.

Your TAM is important to the long-term value of your company, but tightening your target market in the short term, may be the key to meeting your goals for the coming year.

How to Get Your Customers to Pay for New Ideas

Fri, 09 Aug 2024 00:23:18 GMT

There is never enough money to invest in developing products when you’re running a self-funded business. When you’re running your company out of cash flow, most of your resources go into selling your existing products and services, leaving little left over to fund your new product ideas.

You could keep plugging away with your existing product or service lineup, but you will leave yourself exposed to competitors that dream up a better offering. The other option is to develop unique new offerings for customers that ask you to customize your solution, but that can eliminate any scale in your business as you develop a unique thing for every opportunity.

The other option is to offer to develop a custom product for one client with the understanding that you will retain the rights to the intellectual property (IP) associated with developing their unique solution.

The most famous example of getting your customer to fund your new product development comes from Microsoft. As legend has it, co-founder Bill Gates negotiated a deal with IBM that paid Microsoft $430,000 to develop the DOS programming language, which IBM was given a license to use. However, Gates retained ownership over the code, which allowed him to sell it under the MS-DOS brand.

How Brian Ferrilla Got a New Product and a Premium Valuation

In a more recent example, Brian Ferrilla ripped a page out of Bill Gates’s playbook when he started Resort Advantage to help casinos adhere to new anti-money-laundering laws. Criminals were laundering money through casinos, and Ferrilla’s software helped casinos spot the bad guys.

Ferrilla started by selling a simple version of his product to small casinos and eventually got a call from MGM, the granddaddy of casino operators. MGM needed extensive customizations to Ferrilla’s product, but instead of building a custom solution that MGM would own, Ferrilla offered to waive the customization charges in return for retention of the ownership of the product.

Ferrilla reasoned that since MGM was one of the biggest players in the gaming industry, whatever levels of security and features they wanted, other operators would also value.

MGM got their custom solution, and Ferrilla retained the rights to an underlying product that the entire gaming industry valued. In the end, Ferrilla was glad he kept the rights to his IP when his $3 million business, with just 15 employees, was acquired for more than $10 million.

Had he slipped into the trap of making custom software for each of this customers, Ferrilla’s business would have likely been worth less than half that as custom software development shops offering a unique solution for each customer usually trade at around one times annual revenue.

The next time a customer wants you to develop something just for them, consider agreeing provided you maintain ownership of the IP behind your work.

3 Ways to Create a Valuable Culture Inside Your Business

Wed, 07 Aug 2024 23:27:03 GMT

Many factors drive your company’s value, but perhaps the most important is how your business would perform without you.

To get your company to flourish when you’re not around, you need owner-like effort from your team. Inspiring owner-like effort comes from cultivating a vibrant culture inside your business..

Here are three ways to get your employees to care as much as you do:

1. Cast Your Employees as Stars in a “David vs. Goliath” Movie

In 2008 Gavin Hammar started Sendible, a platform that allows companies to manage all their social media accounts from one place.

Sendible grew steadily until 2016, when a large competitor entered the space, causing it to hit a sales plateau. Hammar gathered his employees and explained the challenge they were facing. Rather than sugar coat the problem, Hammar encouraged his team to think of themselves as underdogs in an us-against-the-world battle.

Hammar set out to position his company as smaller and started a podcast, shared photos of his employees online, answered customer questions via asynchronous video, and sent personalized LinkedIn messages to every new customer.

With an enemy to hate, Hammar’s employees followed the boss’s lead and gave extra effort to humanize themselves and the company.

Sendible started to grow again. By 2021 the company was thriving, which is when Hammar accepted a lucrative acquisition offer from ASG.

2. Provide Perks Others Can’t

Another way to create a thriving culture is to offer perks your competitors can’t.

Natalie and Chris Nagele are the life and business partners behind the software as a service (SaaS) company Postmark. Unlike most hard-driving software executives, the Nageles were committed to creating a great place to work. Rather than take on outside investment and the corresponding pressures of demanding investors, the Nageles decided to self-fund their business.

Obsessed with helping her employees do more meaningful work, Natalie began researching ways to inspire her staff. She came across data from the Henley Business School suggesting implementing a four-day workweek created a healthier workplace culture.

Inspired by Natalie’s findings, the Nageles considered implementing a four-day workweek. They didn’t need the permission of their board or outside investors, because the couple owned the company outright. After a short discussion, the couple decided to try it.

Transitioning to a three-day weekend created a culture in which their employees enjoyed working, resulting in consistent growth for Postmark until 2022, when the Nageles sold the company in a life-changing exit.

3. Gamify Your Business

Another way to inspire your employees to give owner-like effort is to gamify your business.

Josh Davis is the founder of the freight brokering company Speedee Transport. Brokering freight is all about gross margin—the difference between what you charge the customer and how much it costs to hire a driver to move the stuff.

Rather than simply telling his employees to focus on gross margin, Davis made a game of it. He created quoting software with a virtual gross margin scoreboard for his employees to see. The software gave each employee a very public, objective, and transparent scoreboard they could follow daily to know whether they were winning or losing that day.

Davis then tied his employees’ compensation to gross margin, which created a healthy competitive culture within the company.

After gamifying his business, the company saw tremendous growth. Within two years, Speedee Transport grew from two to forty-five employees, which caught the attention of an acquirer, who offered to acquire Speedee Transport for a truckload in 2019.

In Review

One of the secrets to building a valuable company is to get your employees to work as hard as you do. Owner-like effort comes from making your people feel like part of a shared mission and giving them a working environment that brings out the best in them.

5 Strategies for Identifying Innovative Candidates to Replace Yourself as Founder

Tue, 06 Aug 2024 19:45:49 GMT

In 2012, Jaclyn Johnson founded Create & Cultivate, a media company that educates and inspires women to succeed in business.

By 2018, Johnson had grown Create & Cultivate to eight employees when an acquirer offered her a staggering $40 million. Unfortunately, the deal was too good to be true. When the acquirer discovered how dependent the business was on Johnson to succeed, they pulled out.

A few years later, Johnson signed an acquisition offer from Corridor Capital for $22 million. While still a lucrative deal, it was a significant decrease from the original offer.

Like Johnson, if your company becomes dependent on you, it may end up costing you down the road. The most valuable companies don’t rely on the owner’s involvement to succeed. However, finding extraordinary talent to replace yourself can be challenging.

The Biggest Mistake Most Founders Make When Trying to Replace Themselves

Finding a general manager, second-in-command, or Chief Operating Officer to replace themselves is one of the hardest projects founders may ever tackle.

Whether you rely on a recruiter, paid advertising, or your personal network to find candidates, one of the first steps to shortlisting talent is a comprehensive review of their background. That’s when many founders make the common error of being bamboozled by a Fortune 500 name on a resume or LinkedIn profile. While a stint at a big company may be impressive, the skills held in high regard at a Fortune 500 company tend to differ from what most young companies need.

Big companies often have well-established processes, systems, and hierarchies that have contributed to their success. People that thrive in big companies tend to excel at winning within a predetermined framework. However, in a younger, scrappier start-up, there is no framework to follow, which is why big company veterans often struggle in a more entrepreneurial environment.

Instead of basing your hires off an impressive name on a resume, look for someone innovative, comfortable with chaos, action oriented, and creative—someone with an entrepreneurial mindset.

Here are five strategies you can use to identify innovative candidates when making hiring decisions:

1. Look for problem-solvers: Innovation often involves finding creative solutions to problems. Look for candidates that have demonstrated the ability to think strategically and come up with innovative solutions to challenges they have faced in the past.

2. Ask about their approach to problem-solving: During the interview, ask candidates to describe their approach to problem-solving and how they have produced innovative solutions in the past. This will give you insight into their thought processes and willingness to take risks and think creatively.

3. Evaluate their learning agility: Innovative employees are often those that are open to learning and adaptable. Look for candidates with a history of taking on new challenges and learning new skills.

4. Assess their ability to work in teams: Innovation often involves collaboration, so look for candidates that have demonstrated the ability to work effectively in teams. Ask about their past experiences working in teams and how they have contributed to the success of those teams.

5. Consider their creativity: Look for candidates that have a creative portfolio or have pursued creative hobbies or projects outside of work. This can be a good indicator of their potential to bring new and innovative ideas to your organization.

Right now, your company probably relies on you for a healthy dose of creativity and innovation. But if your goal is to replace yourself, following these five strategies can increase your chances of identifying innovative candidates that will bring fresh thinking and creativity to your organization.

The Purest Way to Increase the Value of Your Business

Mon, 05 Aug 2024 19:33:30 GMT

Picture a magic slot machine. Each time you pull the arm, you make back a multiple of whatever you wagered. How much time would you devote to cranking that arm?

When it comes to the value of your business, you can make many bets, but only one has a virtually guaranteed return. Most companies are valued on a multiple of earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization (EBITDA), so every dollar of incremental profit you earn in the short term will translate into a multiple of that down the road.

Since most acquirers look at three years’ worth of financial reporting, squeezing out every extra dollar of profit makes even more sense if you’re considering an ownership transition in the next thirty-six months.

How Derek Morin Jacked Up the Value of His Business

For an example of a founder obsessed with finding every dollar of profit available, let’s look at Derek Morin. Morin founded Tabarnapp to create after-market sales applications for Shopify website owners.

The business was a success, but when his partner, who handled finance, left the company, Morin was forced to look closely at his profit & loss (P&L) statement. Morin saw potential improvements, so he made notes in the margin next to each line item he wanted to change.

To save time, he started using a single letter beside each entry to represent the action he wanted to take:

P stood for “Plus,” something profitable, and he wanted more.

U stood for “Unnecessary,” an expense he could eliminate.

R stood for “Replaceable,” a cost that could be replaced with a better or cheaper option.

E stood for “Equal” and was used for items that should be left untouched.

Morin realized his shorthand notes could be organized into a memorable acronym he referred to as “PURE.”

Morin treated the PURE method like a game. Every month he scrutinized his P&L with the same four-letter system. Morin engaged his team to act on each item that needed improvement. He became obsessed with squeezing out a few more dollars of profit every month.

His game worked. In 2020 Morin had bought out his business partner in a deal that valued the company at around $400,000. Two years later, after applying the PURE methodology of improving profitability, Morin sold Tabarnapp in an agreement that implied a roughly tenfold increase in the value of his business.

The Downside of Using Your Company’s Bank Account as a Slush Fund

There’s a downside to treating your company like your piggy bank. Co-mingling personal and business expenses while letting other costs go unchecked may help you reduce taxes in the short term but could end up costing you more in lost value when you decide to sell your business. Instead, keep your P&L “PURE” to jack up the value of your business.

Headline: One Overlooked Metric That Could Transform Your Company’s Value

Fri, 02 Aug 2024 19:22:03 GMT

You know gross margin impacts your profit, but have you considered the impact it has on the value of your company?

When assessing your company’s value, acquirers and investors will often scrutinize your gross profit margin. Gross profit margin is the difference between a company’s revenue and its cost of goods sold. In other words, it’s the profit a company makes from each unit of product or service sold after accounting for the cost of producing or delivering that unit but does not include other fixed expenses. For example, if a company sells a product for $100 and it costs $70 to produce and deliver it, the gross profit margin would be $30, or 30%.

A high gross profit margin is a crucial factor for investors and potential acquirers as it indicates that a company has established pricing power through marketing differentiation and possesses a competitive advantage. A strong competitive moat is an indicator of a company’s long-term sustainability, making it more appealing to potential investors.

When a company’s gross margin shrinks, it indicates to investors that the company may be competing on price. This is typically a sign that the business lacks a unique value proposition or marketing differentiation and that competing on price is the only way to attract customers. A shallow moat leaves the company vulnerable to competitive threats and makes it less appealing to potential acquirers.

24 vs. 6 Times Earnings

To illustrate the impact of gross margin on a company’s value, let’s compare two companies: Apple and Dell. Apple has a strong competitive advantage and a healthy gross margin, whereas Dell’s competitive moat is weaker and its gross margin is lower. In 2022 Apple’s average gross margin was 43%, compared to just 23% for Dell.

Apple has a highly differentiated brand and controls the buying experience through its Apple Stores. Additionally, Apple has invested in a range of high-margin subscription offerings, such as Apple TV and Apple Music. The market is willing to pay more than 24 times Apple’s 2023 earnings forecast, and the company has a market capitalization of over $2 trillion.

By contrast, Dell offers commoditized technology products, which puts them in a weaker competitive position, requiring them to compete on price and resulting in a lower gross margin. The market is only paying around six times Dell’s 2023 earnings estimates, giving it a total market capitalization of around $30 billion.

Just as gross margin impacts the world’s largest publicly traded companies, it also impacts smaller businesses. Ron Holt started Two Maids & a Mop, a residential cleaning company, in 2003. Holt ran a lean business and enjoyed healthy gross margins and a net profit margin of around 30%. Holt invested his earnings in differentiating his business from mom-and-pop cleaning services. He built a network of 12 locations across the southern U.S. and had plans to expand across the country.

Holt was curious about franchising as a business model and attended a Las Vegas conference where he had a chance encounter with Subway founder Fred DeLuca. Subway had more than 40,000 locations around the world at the time, so Holt asked DeLuca for his expansion advice.

DeLuca cautioned Holt about actioning every idea from his employees as his company got bigger. He told Holt, “Most of the time, employees bring you ideas to make their life easier, not to make you more money. Every time you make your employees’ lives easier, it comes at a cost.”

Armed with DeLuca’s advice, Holt grew Two Maids & a Mop from 12 to 91 locations and $40 million in revenue without seriously compromising his gross margin. In 2021 Holt sold his business to JM Family Enterprises for over ten times EBITDA.

Taking Action

Apart from raising prices or reducing input costs, an often overlooked approach to improving gross margin is to invest in carving out a point of differentiation for your business in the minds of your customers. When your customers see your business as unique, you are less likely to have to compete solely on price. Charge a premium for a differentiated product or service, and you’ll beef up your gross profit margin—and the value of your company.

How to Protect Your Equity When Your Business Is Thirsty for Cash

Thu, 01 Aug 2024 19:12:11 GMT

When it comes to financing the growth of your business, you may find yourself facing a difficult choice between the lesser of two evils. Selling shares in your business can provide an immediate cash injection, but it means giving up some of your valuable equity stake. Borrowing money from a bank, on the other hand, can be costly to repay, can limit your growth, and often requires that you provide a personal guarantee.

However, there is a third option: customer financing. This approach involves convincing your customers to prepay for some or all of your product or service, providing you with the necessary working capital to drive growth. This method can be a great alternative to selling equity or taking on bank debt and gives you access to cash without having to sacrifice ownership or pay interest.

How Brad Lorge Got His Customers to Fund the Growth of His Business

In 2015 Brad Lorge founded Premonition, a technology company that provides logistics software to streamline delivery operations for large enterprise companies. While working with big businesses brought in good revenue, large enterprise customers were slow to make purchasing decisions, and when they did decide to buy, getting them up and running was slow and costly. If an implementation failed, Premonition risked losing months’ worth of work for nothing.

Rather than the traditional approach of financing a software start-up (rounds of dilutive funding), Lorge asked his customers to prepay. Having customers pay in advance allowed Premonition to utilize the cash from their customers to fund its growth.

By March 2022 Premonition had grown to $3 million in Annual Contract Value (ACV) when Shippit acquired it for $20.5 million—an implied valuation of just under seven times ACV. Better yet, because they used customer financing, Lorge and his partners still owned 80% of the equity in the company when they sold it.

Customer financing can be a powerful tool for business owners looking to raise money without giving up equity in their businesses. If you’re considering getting your customers to prepay, like Lorge, start by understanding your customer’s needs and motivations. Consider what’s in it for your customer to prepay. Could you guarantee delivery times in return for a project deposit? Could you offer incentives or discounts that make sense for your business and your customers?

Productize Your Service

If you offer a service, another strategy for getting customer prepayments is to consider productizing it. A productized service is a type of service offering that has been standardized and packaged as a product with a defined scope, price, and deliverables. It is essentially a predefined service that is delivered repeatedly to multiple clients in a similar fashion, with a

mike@mikelecount.comfixed set of deliverables, processes, and pricing. Examples of productized services include website design packages, social media management plans, and content creation bundles.

The goal of productizing a service is to simplify the sales process, increase efficiency, and provide a predictable customer experience. By creating a standardized offering, service providers can reduce the amount of time and effort required to close a sale as well as minimize the need for customization, which can be time-consuming and expensive.

Best of all, when it comes to products, we are accustomed to paying in advance (e.g., you expect to pay for that box of cereal at the grocery store before going home to dig in). Therefore, if you package your service offering into a product, your customers will be more inclined to pay up front for some or all of your offering.

Productizing your services or asking customers to prepay can be effective ways to obtain the cash your business needs to grow while keeping a tight grip on your equity and avoiding the obligations of a hefty bank loan.

How First Impressions Can Drive the Value of Your Business

Wed, 31 Jul 2024 17:42:39 GMT

The initial impression customers have of your business often influences how much they decide to spend with your company. This is well known, but have you ever considered how first impressions affect the way potential investors value your business?

When raising capital, investors’ initial perception of your business significantly impacts their valuation, affecting both the equity you’ll need to give up for growth and the company’s value when selling.

Take Jeremy Parker’s experience raising money for Swag.com as an example. Investors initially perceived Swag.com as a simple distributor of promotional products. Despite Parker’s efforts to position the company as more than a middleman, investors weren’t convinced. They categorized Swag.com with other promotional product companies, offering Parker a low single-digit multiple of EBITDA for a stake in his business.

Parker re-strategized, presenting Swag.com as an e-commerce platform with a memorable domain name and a world-class, elegant, direct-to-consumer buying experience. This shift in perception transformed Swag.com from a simple distributor to a technology company in investors’ eyes. As a result, Parker received an acquisition offer that valued his $30 million company at a healthy multiple of revenue.

When it comes to raising funds or selling your business, optics matter significantly, and the way investors categorize your business in their minds plays a crucial role.

The Alibaba Discount: Why Diversification Can Hurt Your Valuation

Speaking of being categorized incorrectly inside the minds of investors, recently Chinese Internet giant Alibaba announced its intention to split into six separate businesses. In the two weeks following the announcement, Alibaba’s market value increased by $19 billion. Why would investors welcome such a move? Alibaba consists of a range of businesses resembling those of Amazon.com, including e-commerce, logistics, and cloud storage. Before the announcement, Alibaba was valued at just ten times their earnings forecast for next year, yet each individual business as a standalone will likely fetch a much higher multiple.

Investors often discount businesses like Alibaba, as they are compelled to purchase assets they may not be interested in. They frequently apply the lowest value multiple of a particular business to the entire group of companies. Amazon faces a similar situation. The Bloomberg Intelligence Unit estimates that Amazon’s cloud storage division, AWS, could be valued at $2–3 trillion as a standalone business.

However, as a collection of various services, from e-commerce to audiobooks and cloud storage, Amazon’s entire market capitalization is less than half (around $1 trillion) of what Bloomberg analysts believe just one of its divisions could be worth as a standalone.

Focus or Diversify? Striking a Balance Between Revenue and Valuation Goals

Investors typically prefer businesses that concentrate on dominating a single product or service rather than diversifying into various unrelated offerings. A diversified portfolio may lead investors to perceive your business as unfocused, which can result in a lower valuation. The same principle applies when you decide to sell your company. If your business appears scattered, potential acquirers may focus on your least valuable division and apply that multiple to your entire organization.

It’s essential to prioritize your goals: Do you aim to grow your business by increasing revenue or enhancing its value? While these objectives are related, they require different strategies. Pursue diversification if your primary goal is to boost revenue. However, if you’re striving for a more valuable company that could potentially be sold, maintaining a clear focus is crucial.

The Recurring Revenue Bump

Tue, 30 Jul 2024 18:49:24 GMT

Last month, Darden, the owner of the Olive Garden restaurant chain, announced it was acquiring Ruth’s Chris, the legendary American steakhouse, for $715 million, implying a valuation of around one times last year’s annual revenue, or about ten times their adjusted EBITDA for 2022.

Not bad for a giant company, but Ruth’s Chris’s value was likely hindered by its lack of recurring revenue.

Comparing Ruth’s Chris to another traditional business with recurring revenue demonstrates the power of automatic customers. For instance, Waste Management, a private garbage collection company that disposes of trash for clients through long-term contracts, trades at over three times its annual revenue.

Two companies in traditional industries, have nothing to do with software, yet one trades at one times revenue while the other fetches three.

Recurring Revenue: Not Just for Software Companies Anymore

Many people consider recurring revenue to be exclusive to software companies, but traditional businesses can also reap the benefits of creating recurring income streams. For example, let’s look at Gamal Codner, the founder of Fresh Heritage, a line of men’s grooming products that began with beard oil for softening facial hair prior to shaving.

Codner used Facebook ads to acquire customers at a cost of around $15 each. However, with an average order value of $30, there was little margin left to support his expanding operation. Recognizing the need for change, Codner decided to broaden his product line by introducing additional grooming offerings and launching the VIP Club, a subscription program for men wanting automatic shipments of Fresh Heritage products.

A Subscription Program That Goes Beyond Just Discounts

Codner conducted an in-depth survey among approximately 500 customers and made an intriguing discovery. He found that his target customers were less captivated by discounts and more attracted to the empowering notion of being an alpha male in their respective fields. The insightful results from this survey perfectly aligned with Fresh Heritage’s inherent goal of building a distinct brand that appealed specifically to growth-oriented men, those that were keenly focused on boosting their self-confidence.

Subsequently, to incentivize men to join the VIP program, Gamal moved beyond merely offering financial incentives such as discounts. He strategically created a sense of community and belonging by emphasizing membership in a group of like-minded individuals, all striving for personal excellence. To nurture this sense of community, Gamal established quarterly local area meetups, providing valuable opportunities for members to network and share experiences. These empowering gatherings soon evolved into a significant driving force, steering new customers toward the experience offered by Fresh Heritage’s VIP program.

Converting Customers into Subscribers

Gamal continued to acquire customers through Facebook advertising, and instead of relying on one-time purchases, he successfully converted them into subscribers, significantly increasing their lifetime value. The average order value also surged to over $60, and with the subscription program expanding to 3,000 members, Codner’s EBITDA margin grew to 40%.

That got the attention of BRANDED, an aggregator of digitally native, direct-to-consumer brands that made Gamal an acquisition offer he couldn’t refuse in 2022.

Recurring revenue will make your business more valuable. As the example of Fresh Heritage demonstrates, you don’t have to be in the software business to create an annuity stream. Find out what your customers crave on an ongoing basis, and you will have the raw material for a subscription offering.

How to Increase the Value of a Distribution Business

Mon, 29 Jul 2024 16:53:29 GMT

Transforming a distributor or reseller into a valuable company may seem like a daunting task. Distributors are usually not worth very much, because an acquirer reasons that without a point of differentiation, a distributor is vulnerable to a price war. Rather than acquire a target company, a savvy potential acquirer of a distributor could temporarily lower their price for whatever is being distributed and woo most of the target company’s customers without acquiring the company.

However, the key to this transformation lies in setting yourself apart through innovation and the development of intellectual property (IP).

The Value of Developing Your Own IP

Look at the story of Miles Faulkner, the founder of Blended Perspectives, a reseller specializing in Atlassian products, which offer software solutions for large teams. Faulkner’s story provides a blueprint for how to punch above your weight when selling a business that distributes or resells other companies’ products.

Driven to create a more valuable reseller, Faulkner set his sights on creating a product of his own: the Marketplace Analytic Research Service, or MARS. This tool is designed to guide Atlassian users in selecting the most appropriate aftermarket apps to supplement their Atlassian software.

While Blended Perspectives still made the lion’s share of their money by reselling Jira and Confluence licenses, MARS provided Blended Perspectives with a unique selling proposition, separating it from the multitude of other Atlassian resellers and, in the process, enhancing its appeal to prospective clients. MARS also rendered Blended Perspectives an attractive acquisition target for Contegix, a larger reseller of Atlassian products.

At the time Contegix acquired Blended Perspectives, observers may have wondered why the larger firm didn’t simply lower its prices temporarily to attract Blended Perspectives’ customers. However, for Contegix, the acquisition was not just about growing market share; Blended Perspectives brought a differentiating element to the table.

By owning MARS, their intellectual property, Blended Perspectives was more than just a distributor in the Atlassian ecosystem. This point of differentiation gave Contegix a compelling reason to acquire the firm far above what would typically be paid for a distributor, underlining the value of creating unique products and services in a highly competitive marketplace.

How a Parts Distributor Became a Valuable Company

Another example of someone who went from middleman to eight-figure business is Mahul Sheth. Sheth started VMS Aircraft in 1995 as a distributor of airline parts. He offered a “one-stop shop” for airlines and their maintenance crews to find parts and accessories.

In Conclusion

If you’re a business owner operating in a highly competitive field like distribution, it's crucial to pinpoint your unique selling proposition and dedicate resources to developing your own intellectual property. These strategies not only augment your business's value but also strategically position it for potential acquisition down the line.

What to Do When Your Clients Want You

Fri, 26 Jul 2024 16:45:20 GMT

Do your customers ever ask that you personally get involved in their account? If so, one of the best things you can do to improve the value of your business (and your life) is to get your employees to treat your customers as well as you do. That’s easy to say but hard to do, which is why the story of Ian Fraser is so instructive.

A former pro golfer, Fraser got his start in business by helping elite golfers find the perfect clubs as a master fitter at TaylorMade Europe.

When Fraser launched his own club-fitting business, he quickly realized the necessity of teaching his club-fitting expertise to his employees if he aimed to elevate his company beyond a lifestyle business. Fraser used the following five-step approach to clone himself:

1. Master Your Craft on Someone Else’s Dime

Before founding TXG, Fraser had already dedicated most of his professional life to golf. He began playing at 15, and within three years, he had become a scratch golfer. He then spent eight years at TaylorMade Europe, working in various club-fitting roles where he collaborated with some of the biggest names in the PGA in Europe, including Colin Montgomerie, Gary Woodland, Eduardo Molinari, and Chris Wood. In his final role with the company, Fraser designed and operated the TaylorMade Performance Lab at Scotland’s world-famous Turnberry golf resort.

Fraser describes himself as “underpaid” while at TaylorMade, but he was content to accept a below-market wage because he had a vision for the company he wanted to start. He knew the insights he was gaining at TaylorMade would assist him in building TXG.

2. Think Like Nobu

Fraser drew inspiration from Nobu, the five-star restaurant chain partly owned by Robert De Niro. Fraser argued that when you visit one of the 50 Nobu restaurants worldwide, you never question who the chef is that night. Nobu has established the benchmark for five-star dining, so you’re assured that regardless of the chef or location, you will have a fine dining experience.

Fraser utilized the Nobu example to communicate his vision to his team of club fitters.

3. Hire for EQ, Not IQ

Fraser aimed to establish a customer experience company that happened to fit golf clubs, as opposed to a golf-fitting business that offered good customer service. That’s why he prioritized EQ over IQ when hiring TXG staff. “I can teach you to fit a golf club,” Fraser argues, “but I can’t teach you to be a good person.”

Fraser implemented a behavioral interview question to identify the right candidates. He presented potential interviewees with a scenario that offered two choices: one that would benefit the client and another that would provide short-term gains to the company at the expense of the client. Candidates who opted for short-term profit over doing what was right for the customer were eliminated from consideration.

4. Teach Your Employees Through Osmosis

Most golf-fitting studios are private offices where the fitter works one on one with a player. Fraser, however, wanted to observe his apprentices at work and wanted them to learn from his interactions with clients. Therefore, he designed his location with three open-concept bays. He worked from the middle bay so his apprentices could overhear his client interactions and he could listen in on their client conversations as well.

Fraser contended that being physically close to his employees accelerated their learning curve more than any other technique he tried.

5. Broadcast Your Expertise

Fraser established a YouTube channel where he provided club-fitting advice for free. The channel amassed 216,000 subscribers. Fraser understood that only one percent of his subscribers would ever step foot in a TXG store, but the channel reinforced TXG’s reputation as the world’s best club fitters. Additionally, it transformed his marketing strategy from a cost into a profit center as the channel generated over $300,000 per year in advertising revenue, which Fraser reinvested in growth.

When asked if he was concerned about divulging his “secret sauce” in the YouTube videos, Fraser referred to celebrity chef Gordon Ramsay. He reasoned that Ramsay shares his recipes in cookbooks, but this doesn’t make people any less likely to visit his restaurants.

By implementing an innovative hiring process and utilizing a creative teaching approach, Fraser succeeded in expanding Tour Experience Golf (TXG) to a team of 14 employees, developing a YouTube fan base of over 200,000 subscribers, and generating revenue exceeding $3 million. In 2022 TXG was acquired by Club Champion, the largest club-fitting company in the United States, with more than 100 locations.

Hidden Value: A 3-Part Approach to Hiring High-Potential Employees

Thu, 25 Jul 2024 17:24:23 GMT

French economist Jean-Baptiste Say characterized an entrepreneur as one who “shifts economic resources out of an area of lower and into an area of higher productivity and greater yield.” This expands the term’s literal translation from the French for “one who undertakes” to include the concept of value creation.

Bootstrapping founders epitomize the principle of creating more value with less resources, particularly when hiring. While it may be tempting to try and hire C-level executives with extensive resumes and impressive LinkedIn profiles, smaller businesses often cannot afford those seasoned professionals. To combat this, value creators need to develop a knack for hiring talented people about to blossom.

High Potential Employees, or HIPOs, might have thin resumes—but spotting their burgeoning talent allows you to create significant value that others overlook. This is challenging to do well, however, since most HIPOs have limited credentials for you to evaluate.

Here’s a three-part process for spotting HIPOs, developed by Skubana co-founder Chad Rubin, who built his company to $5 million in revenue with the help of a team of HIPOs before deciding to sell it to 3PL Central.

Rubin criticized the traditional hiring process as “broken.” How can you evaluate a candidate’s potential in just a 45-minute meeting? Rubin’s alternative solution comes in a three-part approach:

1. Hide a Golden Egg

Many young candidates apply for any (and every) job they come across, but Rubin sought detail-oriented applicants who took the time to understand his business and the specific role. He embedded an obscure request within each job posting to identify those who had read it in full. For instance, he asked candidates to include the name of their favorite ’90s band in their cover letter. Rubin’s intention wasn’t to compile a new playlist; he wanted to see who had read the entire posting.

2. Pattern Recognition

Aware that traditional interviews wouldn’t suffice to gauge a candidate’s potential, Rubin turned to pattern recognition assessments to evaluate their intelligence. He discovered an online puzzle that required candidates to recognize patterns in a set of images, and he found this to be a reliable measure of their intellectual potential.

3. Measure the Fit

Once satisfied with their cognitive abilities, Rubin aimed to gauge how well a candidate would mesh with his team. Instead of relying on a conventional interview, he used a Culture Index psychometric test to assess psychological attributes beyond IQ, thereby measuring their fit within the company culture.

Another psychometric assessment you can leverage is the Kolbe A Index. It measures the ways people instinctively take action and is a great barometer to use when evaluating the value that new employees will bring to your business.

Let’s walk through a concrete example of how you can use a Kolbe score to assist your hiring process. If you need a manager who will run the daily operations of your business, here’s what to look for on the four attributes Kolbe measures, on a scale from 1 to 10:

Fact Finder: 6-8

This attribute measures how someone gathers and shares information. For someone running the day-to-day operations of your business, look for the sweet spot of someone who gathers a lot of info before taking action, without succumbing to analysis paralysis.

Follow Thru: 5-8

This category focuses on how candidates organize and design. You’re looking for someone who initiates systems, structure, and organization, so they should score relatively high here.

Quick Start: 4-6

This one’s about how a candidate deals with risk and uncertainty. Look for someone with a healthy dose of risk aversion. Watch out though, because if they score too low, say a 1, they might not be a fit for an entrepreneurial company.

Implementor: 3-7

The last bucket covers how candidates handle space and tangibles. Ideally, you’ll find someone in the middle who is able to keep things working the way they should, and construct tangible solutions when needed.

This unique three-part hiring strategy, paired with these effective assessment tests, will empower you to consistently recruit high-potential employees—even when they’re entry-level—and unlock hidden value for your organization.

3 (Creative) Ways to Get Your Business to Run Without You

Wed, 24 Jul 2024 16:53:30 GMT

If you aspire to build a valuable company, one crucial factor is to ensure your business can operate independently without your constant involvement, but embarking on this journey can feel daunting. In this article, we'll explore three cost-effective, simple strategies to set your business on a path to autonomy and allowing it to thrive without your constant presence.

1. Replace yourself by niching down.

The reason most owners can’t replace themselves is that a substitute would be too expensive. Trying to replace your breadth of experience would likely require a very high-salaried employee. If you can’t afford to replace all of what you do, niche down your core offering.

For example, Casey Cavell’s baseball business, D-Bat Academy, could have catered to a broad range of players: professionals, softball players, slow-pitch beer leaguers, fast-pitch…but instead, he got specific about who his business was for: 5- to 10-year-old kids.

Sure, he could have charged more per customer if he catered to college athletes and aspiring pros—but those elite athletes would expect to get a hitting coach with years of expertise, and Casey would have had to staff for that.

On the other hand, when you have a business where one of its primary objectives is to give an 8-year-old an awesome birthday party, well, an entry-level employee can deliver on that.

When you narrow down your offering, you can bypass the high salary that comes with someone with a wide breadth of experience.

2. Create a question diary.

When Jodie Cook was building her social media agency, she made a conscious choice every time an employee came to ask her a question.

The easy thing to do would have been to answer the question, but she forced herself to write each question down. She turned that question diary into a business manual that documented how to do every single task required of her employees.

Her manual came in the form of an Excel spreadsheet with 50 tabs, each one documenting a specific process, like payroll for example.

Challenge yourself to do the same: When an employee asks you a question, resist the urge to just answer and move on. Document those queries, and turn them into a standard operating procedure (SOP) that enables your staff to develop expertise in their role. The go-to reference becomes the manual…instead of you.

3. List your employees alphabetically on your site.

Most companies list their employees by seniority, with the owner and CEO as the top listing. However, this communicates that you are the most important person in your company, which will trigger everyone from salespeople to suppliers and prospective partners to want to go straight to the top by calling you.

An effective strategy to downplaying your role in your company (and getting others to step up and shoulder more) is to list employees alphabetically rather than by seniority on your company’s website. This approach can minimize the spotlight on you. Additionally, using titles like “Head of Culture” and “Head of Product” instead of “CEO” or “Owner” can further obscure your seniority, making it less likely customers will call you by default.

Getting your business to thrive without you gives you the freedom to cherry pick the projects you want to work on or just own your business and collect passive income. A business that runs without you is also a valuable, sellable asset if you ever choose to move on to a new chapter in your life. Niching down, creating SOPs, and downplaying your role on your website are all tactical things you can do today to get your business running more independently in the future.

Core Values as a Growth Catalyst: The $14 Million Journey of Sauceda Industries

Tue, 23 Jul 2024 17:16:14 GMT

In the competitive third-party logistics (3PL) sector, Jay B Sauceda turned Sauceda Industries into a standout business, ultimately reaching $14 million in sales before being acquired by Cart.com.

His secret weapon? His core values: “Yes, And,” “Explore More,” and “Give a Sh!t.”

Talent Recruitment

Sauceda found his first significant opportunity with Howler Brothers, the digitally native purveyor or stylish and rugged outdoor gear whose leadership related to Sauceda’s core values.

Sauceda’s values weren’t mere posters on a wall but embedded into job descriptions, ensuring new hires were aligned with the company ethos. “Yes, And” fostered constructive dialogue, “Explore More” encouraged initiative, and “Give a Sh!t” signaled a commitment to quality.

In the fiercely competitive landscape for hourly workers, Sauceda utilized job ads as both a magnet and a filter. His distinctive ads read:

“We’re looking for someone who gives a shit about their work, gets annoyed with coworkers who don’t pull their weight, wants to level themselves up in a big way and cares about being somewhere long enough that people remember their name.”

Such postings instantly distinguished Sauceda Industries from the mundane listings of competitors, drawing talent aligned with the company’s dynamic culture.

Employee Training and Metrics

New hires were introduced to Sauceda’s values through dedicated training programs. Performance evaluations considered not just revenue metrics but also the embodiment of Sauceda’s core principles. Employees who exemplified “Yes, And,” “Explore More,” and “Give a Sh!t” found themselves rewarded and recognized. Their Slack channel was full of praise for team members embodying their core values.

Creating a distinctive culture was crucial for Sauceda. He recalls, “Our values lived in our daily interactions, whether it was an employee going above and beyond for a client or in our collaborations.”

Client Relationships

The core values extended to client interactions, offering criteria for long-term partnerships. A cornerstone example was Howler Brothers, whose alignment with these values set the stage for both parties’ success. Sauceda emphasized, “When a client fits naturally with our core values, the collaboration is far more likely to be fruitful.”

A Valuable Company

Leveraging this values-centric model, Sauceda Industries grew from a 3,000-square-foot office in 2013 to a sprawling 126,000-square-foot facility with 150 employees by 2020. “We bootstrapped all the way to the top,” Sauceda asserted, attributing the company’s fast, self-funded growth to its value-driven framework.

In the competitive 3PL landscape, Sauceda Industries didn’t just serve clients; it built relationships based on shared values. Through strategic recruitment, impactful training, and a vibrant work culture, these core values helped pave the way for a business that thrived, achieving $14 million in sales before it was acquired by Cart.com in 2021.

The Switzerland Structure

Mon, 22 Jul 2024 17:12:52 GMT

One of the eight factors that impact the value of your company is something the team at The Value Builder System refers to as “The Switzerland Structure,” which emphasizes the importance of business independence. It cautions against excessive reliance on any single entity, whether suppliers, employees, or customers. While many business owners recognize the risks associated with dependency on a high-profile customer or employee, the hazards of anchoring to a single supplier are often overlooked.

Supplier dependency comes in many flavors, but the most pernicious is a dependency on a single marketing supplier for sales leads, such as a dominant e-commerce site or social media platform.

6 Ways Marketing Supplier Dependency Cuts Your Value

Amazon, for instance, is a prime example where businesses heavily invest to gain market access and visibility. However, dependence on a single sales platform like Amazon can devalue a business in the eyes of investors or acquirers for several reasons:

1. Increased Risk Exposure:

Sole reliance on one platform exposes a business to risks of sudden policy, fee, or algorithm changes. Such negative alterations by the platform could significantly impact the business's sales and profitability.

2. Lack of Diversification:

Over-dependence on a single channel is perceived as a vulnerability, while a diversified sales approach suggests resilience and adaptability, appealing attributes to both investors and acquirers.

3. Limited Growth Potential:

Exclusive reliance on one platform can restrict a company's growth opportunities. Investors typically favor businesses with multiple channels for growth. Being bound to one platform can limit a business's potential for expansion.

4. Brand and Customer Relationship Limitations:

Operating primarily through a third-party platform may lead to limited customer interaction, hindering the development of a strong brand identity and customer loyalty, both highly valued by investors.

5. Negotiating Power and Autonomy:

Dependence on a platform like Amazon can reduce control over crucial business aspects, such as pricing and customer service. Investors may view this lack of autonomy as a strategic weakness.

6. Perception of Innovation and Independence:

Businesses demonstrating innovation and independence are often more attractive to investors. Over-reliance on a single platform can create an impression of a lack of these qualities.

How Chad Maghielse Improved His Score on the Switzerland Structure

Chad Maghielse’s company, Pets Are Kids Too, originated with a simple spray to help improve his dog’s breath and swiftly expanded to over $2 million in sales with a 35% profit margin within three years, relying solely on Amazon. Recognizing the risks of this dependence on the e-commerce giant, Maghielse embarked on a path of supplier diversification.

Maghielse expanded to another e-commerce platform, Chewy.com, and launched his own online store. This strategy reduced Amazon’s share of his sales to 65%, while Chewy and his store contributed 30% and 5%, respectively. A significant reduction in his business’s platform risk and an increase in its appeal to potential buyers resulted from this strategic shift.

Thanks in part to Maghielse’s diversification strategy, Pets Are Kids Too was acquired in a deal that valued the company at three times its EBITDA, with a substantial portion paid up front. Maghielse’s journey highlights the critical insight that diversification not only shields against market volatility but also enhances a business’s overall value.

Embracing the Mentality of the Swiss

Reducing your reliance on a single marketing supplier not only bolsters your company’s market resilience but also notably increases its value. Adopting a Swiss-style mindset, which values independence and strategic autonomy, is more than a tactical move; it is a key strategy for achieving sustainable growth and boosting the value of your business in the long run.

Just Add Capital

Fri, 19 Jul 2024 17:09:02 GMT

If you’re looking to attract an investor or an acquirer one day, expect them to dig into your sales and marketing process.

If you’re a company that sells to other businesses, an investor will want to know where you get your leads from and how much each costs you to generate. They’ll want to know what technology you are utilizing to support your sales team. They’ll want to understand how your sales reps get meetings and how many appointments a good rep has each week. They’ll want to know the close rate of a high performer and how it compares to an average performer.

The investor’s questions aim to gauge the scalability of your sales model under significantly higher investment rather than simply to assess your past performance. Acquirers love stumbling over a business where the main constraint to growth is capital. They fall over themselves for a company that has an efficient sales engine that needs more fuel (i.e., money). Most investors have lots of capital but struggle to find businesses with a sales system that won’t collapse under the weight of more money.

How Gregg Romanzo Built a Sales System

In 2004 Gregg Romanzo started an old-school freight brokering business. Most freight brokers are nothing more than a handful of people arranging shipments in return for razor-thin margins, but Romanzo realized his sales model had the potential to grow into something much bigger.

Romanzo’s model involved hiring high-potential people with a relatively modest base salary of between $40,000 and $60,000 per year and teaching them the business from scratch. He armed them with a computer and access to the best scheduling software and tied their variable compensation to the gross margin of the jobs they booked. Romanzo knew if he could get a rep to clear $100,000 per year in total compensation, he would be able to keep them for the long run.

Romanzo took his very best talent—the top one or two percent—and built a team around them so they could earn even more. This cohort of salespeople could clear three, four, or even five hundred thousand dollars in an exceptional year.

Since Romanzo paid a relatively low base salary and his people didn’t need a lot of equipment, he was able to hire a lot of salespeople. By the time he sold his company, he had 200 employees, 190 of which were salespeople. That’s 95% of his headcount dedicated to sales.

How does that compare to your company? If you have a winning formula you think would hold up if you doubled or quadrupled your sales team, consider monetizing the sales model you’ve created. Either hire a lot more reps or show a deep-pocketed investor or acquirer how durable your sales model is and how all you need is their capital to grow it.

Growth vs. Value

Thu, 18 Jul 2024 16:50:09 GMT

We live in a business world where growth is worshipped. Entrepreneurs measure themselves by how many people they employ. Many founders dream about making lists whose sole criterion is revenue growth.

However, if your endgame is to sell your business to a strategic acquirer one day, indiscriminate revenue growth may not result in a commensurate spike in your company’s value; in some cases, it may even detract from it.

Strategic Buyers Value What They Cannot Replace

Strategic acquirers—the buyers that usually pay the most—are looking for something they can’t easily do themselves. They covet that unique offering that would take too long—or cost too much—for them to duplicate. But the more extraneous offerings you add, the less valuable you become in their eyes.

Take Michael Lieberman, who co-founded a software company named Datastay. It revolutionized how brake manufacturers cataloged their design drawings through its product lifecycle management software. Datastay became synonymous with the brake manufacturing industry. Lieberman was on a first-name basis with almost every brake manufacturing executive in the industry. He was the man to know, the one who hosted dinners at trade shows—he was the guy.

Then Autodesk entered the picture, seeing Datastay as their gateway to the product lifecycle management software market. Autodesk, a billion dollar serial acquirer renowned for software tools indispensable to designers and builders across various sectors, acknowledged Datastay’s dominance in the brake industry and saw the potential to market Datastay’s product lifecycle management software across the myriad industries Autodesk served.

Autodesk offered Lieberman an extraordinary ten times revenue for his nine-employee company.

Had Lieberman prioritized broad revenue growth, he might have diversified his offerings to the brake manufacturers, diluting the core value that attracted Autodesk. Brake manufacturers need all sorts of other software, but Lieberman remained disciplined and focused exclusively on product lifecycle management tools.

Lieberman could have branched out to other industries, but spreading his attention to other industries would have weakened his connection to the brake industry and invited competition.

Instead, he stuck to his knitting: Make the world’s best product lifecycle management software for the brake industry.

Private Equity and Strategic Acquirers See Things Differently

Unlike the private equity acquirer that usually bases their valuation on a multiple of your Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation, and Amortization (EBITDA), the typical strategic acquirer is trying to calculate what your product or service offering is worth in their hands.

The typical strategic acquirer is much larger and better resourced than the companies they target. They don’t need you to diversify for them. Instead, they want the company that has the one puzzle piece they want, and the less diversified that offering is, the higher the premium they’re prepared to pay.

Big vs. Valuable

Wed, 17 Jul 2024 16:47:12 GMT

Most founders aim to boost sales, but prioritizing top-line growth can attract low-quality revenue, potentially reducing your company’s value.

To an acquirer, revenue quality varies. They prioritize future revenue predictability, valuing recurring income from contracts and subscriptions higher than one-off sales. Consequently, firms with recurring revenue often command a revenue-based valuation, whereas businesses reliant on transactional revenue are usually valued based on a multiple of EBITDA.

Why Mike Winnet Turned Google Down

Mike Winnet provides an excellent case study on the importance of prioritizing the right kind of revenue.

Winnet started U.K.-based Learning Heroes after recognizing that most e-learning programs were long and boring. He saw an opportunity to transform the industry by selling large companies a subscription to his short, engaging, animated training courses.

Although his company was growing, it was still thirsty for cash. Winnet was drawing a salary of just £500 a month when he received a lucrative offer from Google. The giant search firm offered Winnet £90,000 to create a custom course for them. The course would have taken his team just three months to develop, and Winnet would have welcomed the injection of cash.

But Google’s offer was a one-time transaction and didn’t sit right with Winnet, who was trying to build a company based on recurring revenue. “I know loads of people who would have taken that £90,000 contract, but we didn’t because it didn’t fit the model. We used to have a sign on the wall that said, ’Does It Make the Boat Go Faster?’ and if the decision didn’t make the boat go faster, we wouldn’t do it.”

Not only was Winnet concerned Google’s offer would slow their journey to becoming a subscription-based e-learning juggernaut but he also knew the one-off nature of the revenue had the potential to undermine the value of his company in the eyes of potential acquirers.

Winnet started Learning Heroes with the intent of selling it within three years for £10 million. He knew he would need to position the company as a product-based subscription business to garner such a premium offer.

Winnet understood that a simple service company doing one-off projects, like the one Google was offering, would be lucky to garner an offer of one times revenue. In contrast, a subscription-based product company could command a much higher valuation from an acquirer.

By accepting the Google project, Winnet would have run the risk of appearing to be a project-based consultancy and accidentally falling into the service business category in an acquirer’s mind.

In the end, Winnet’s discipline paid off when he accepted an acquisition offer from Litmos of £8 million, representing roughly four times his revenue at the time.

Had Winnet been viewed by an acquirer as a traditional service company, he would have likely been offered a quarter of what he received.

Rather than focusing exclusively on revenue growth as a goal, owners that sell for the highest multiples tend to concentrate on growing value, even if that occasionally comes at the expense of short-term sales.

3 Ways to Get Your Employees to Sell More

Tue, 16 Jul 2024 17:14:42 GMT

Who does the selling inside your business?

If you’re involved, your business will be less valuable than if you weren’t. Investors and acquirers are reluctant to invest in a business where the owner is the rainmaker of the company.

The team at the Value Builder System™ analyzed more than 70,000 businesses, and the data revealed that companies that can sustain a three-month absence of the owner are more than twice as likely to receive a premium acquisition offer (defined as greater than 6x pre-tax profit).

In other words, to maximize the value of your business, you need to get other people doing the selling.

Easier said than done.

Why Employees Can’t Sell Like the Owner

Unsurprisingly, most young recruits struggle to sell at the same level as the founder. In addition to having experience on your side, you also have a built-in advantage over your young reps based on your job title.

Founders often sell by offering customers a great experience, which is believable coming from you. After all, you are the expert in your industry, you control who works on each project, and, if something goes wrong, a customer always knows they can call you to fix it.

When junior salespeople try to use your company’s reputation for customer service as a selling point, it often sounds like a hollow promise. That’s why Matt Dixon, the author of The Challenger Sale, suggests you arm new salespeople with the answer to a simple question: “Why should your prospects buy from you?”

There’s just one catch. The answer can’t have anything to do with the customer service you provide.

To figure out your answer, keep in mind that a great selling proposition includes three elements. It must be something that:

1. customers care about;

2. makes you different; and

3. is believable.

Arm your salespeople with a compelling point of differentiation, and you’ll have given them the raw material they need to sell without you, making your business more valuable in the process.

How First Impressions Can Impact Your Company’s Value

Mon, 15 Jul 2024 23:15:46 GMT

When potential acquirers first evaluate your business, most will quickly categorize it into a specific industry. This initial classification can significantly impact the value they place on your business. Some industries are inherently perceived as more valuable than others, and if your business is placed in a less favorable category, it can be challenging to change that perception.

When Jeremy Parker was raising money for Swag.com, he ran into investors who were left with the impression that Swag.com was a simple distributor of promotional products, which is an industry plagued by low valuations.

Parker tried to make the case that Swag.com was more than a middleman, but investors weren’t buying it. They lumped Swag.com into the promotional products category and offered Parker a low single-digit multiple of EBITDA for a slice of his business.

Parker regrouped and began positioning the business as an e-commerce play with an unforgettable domain name, world-class merchandising, and one of the most elegant direct-to-consumer (DTC) buying experiences online. Investors began to see the company differently. No longer a simple distributor of “trinkets and trash,” Swag.com began to be seen as a technology company and a digital commerce leader. Instead of a low single-digital multiple of profit, Parker attracted an acquisition offer valuing his $30 million company at a healthy multiple of revenue.

Once an acquirer has categorized your business into a particular industry, it can be challenging to shift that perception. If your business doesn’t fit neatly into their preferred categories, it can be difficult to change their initial impression.

Additionally, acquirers often compare your business to others within the same industry. If they have already placed you in a less favorable industry, they might use lower benchmarks and valuation multiples from that industry, making it harder to argue for a higher valuation. Furthermore, the initial narrative you present about your business can stick. If this narrative places you in a lower-valued industry, subsequent efforts to reframe your business may be met with skepticism.

How to Look Like a Valuable Business

To ensure your business is categorized favorably from the start, consider these strategies:

1. Clear Positioning:

Clearly articulate your business’s value proposition and industry position. Avoid ambiguous descriptions that might lead to misclassification. Be explicit about where your business fits and why it should be valued accordingly.

2. Highlight Industry Trends:

Emphasize positive trends in your industry and how your business is positioned to capitalize on them. Use data and market analysis to back up your claims and shift perceptions.

3. Put Your Best Foot Forward:

If your business spans multiple industries, highlight the most favorable one. Demonstrate how your company leverages the strengths of high-value industries, and downplay associations with lower-value ones.

4. Leverage Third-Party Validation:

Use endorsements, industry awards, and analyst reports to support your positioning. Third-party validation can lend credibility to your claims and help shift acquirer perceptions.

When selling your company, perception is everything. The category investors place your business in can make or break the deal.

¿Por qué una vendedora vendería un negocio rentable?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 05:15:09 GMT

Estrategias de planificación de salida de vendedor inteligente

Descubra las razones por las que un vendedor vendería lo que parece ser un gran negocio rentable.

Muchos empresarios exitosos también hacen algo más que la mayoría de los dueños de negocios no hacen: planean una estrategia de salida.

Entonces, la pregunta es por qué la persona que está operando un negocio que funciona con éxito y gana dinero buscaría una estrategia de salida.

Las razones típicas para planificar una estrategia de salida o considerar la venta son (y no en ningún orden de importancia): 1. El propietario ha alcanzado la meta que quería lograr; 2. El propietario ha encontrado otra idea que quería seguir; 3. Aburrimiento o agotamiento; 4. No gratificante financieramente; o 5. No te satisface emocionalmente. 6. Necesidad de un nuevo desafío.

Por lo tanto, es bueno saber que muchos empresarios que están ocupados construyendo su negocio también están considerando su estrategia de salida.

Como dueño de un negocio, ¿conoce su estrategia de salida y estará preparado?

Los compradores buscan empresas que puedan proporcionar dos componentes principales, uno son los ingresos sostenibles y el segundo es el potencial de crecimiento. Después de veinticuatro años de reunir a compradores y vendedores, descubrimos que si estos dos ingredientes están en el negocio que un comprador está investigando, las posibilidades de que el comprador haga una oferta son muy altas.

Si está considerando vender su negocio en el futuro, asegúrese de que un comprador pueda verificar sus ingresos. La mayoría de los compradores abandonarán una transacción si no se puede verificar el ingreso. Su corredor de First Choice Business puede asesorarlo con más detalle sobre lo que un comprador necesitará de usted cuando esté listo para vender.

Artículos recientes para ti

Why Would A Seller Sell A Profitable Business?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 05:13:12 GMT

Smart Seller Exit Planning Strategies

Discover the reasons that a seller would sell what appears to be a great profitable business.

Many successful entrepreneurs also do something else that most business owners don’t do, they plan an exit strategy.

So the question is why would the person who is operating a business that is running successfully and making money look for an exit strategy.

The typical reasons are for either planning an exit strategy or considering selling are (and not in any order of importance): 1. The owner has reached the goal that they wanted to achieve; 2. The owner has found another idea that they wanted to pursue; 3. Boredom or burn out; 4. Not financially rewarding; or 5. Not emotionally fulfilling. 6. Need of a new challenge.

So it is good to know that many entrepreneurs who are busy building their business are also considering their exit strategy.

As a business owner, do you know your exit strategy and will you be prepared?

Buyers look for businesses that can provide two major components, one is sustainable income and the second is growth potential. After twenty four years of bringing buyers and sellers together we found that if these two ingredients are in the business that a buyer is investigating, the chances that the buyer will make an offer are very high.

If you are considering selling your business in the future make certain that a buyer can verify your income. Most buyers will walk away from a transaction if the income cannot be verified. Your First Choice Business broker can advise you in more detail as to what a buyer will need from you when you are ready to sell.

¿Cuánto vale su negocio?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 04:49:06 GMT

Descubra cómo un Business Broker valorará su negocio.

Trabajar con un corredor de negocios profesional puede ayudarlo a establecer un precio realista para la venta de su negocio.

Muchos vendedores, antes de reunirse con un corredor comercial, tienen una idea en mente de cuánto deben pedir por su negocio.

Su CPA o su amigo o su agente de bienes raíces pueden haber ofrecido sugerencias. Entonces, en el momento en que se encuentran con su corredor comercial y el corredor ofrece un precio de venta sugerido, los vendedores a veces responden con la cifra en dólares por la que su CPA, amigo o agente inmobiliario pensó que deberían vender.

El dilema de los corredores de negocios es cómo y le dirán al vendedor que el precio será demasiado alto para su negocio.

La mayoría de los corredores comerciales profesionales explicarán la realidad de un negocio sobrevaluado, incluido el hecho de que los negocios sobrevaluados ayudan a los negocios con precios razonables del mismo tipo a vender.

El propietario de un negocio debe comprender que un corredor de negocios está valorando el negocio de manera lógica y realista en función de las ventas y la experiencia pasadas, mientras que un vendedor mira el negocio emocionalmente.

El arte de valuar un negocio es solo eso, es un arte y no una ciencia. Un negocio vende por lo que pagará un comprador dispuesto y lo que aceptará un vendedor dispuesto.

Otra opción es obtener un avalúo externo por un costo aproximado de $3,000.00. A veces, estas valoraciones externas son teóricas y no un análisis de precios de mercado y pueden no valer la pena.

Para obtener más información sobre cómo se valora un negocio, comuníquese con su profesional First Choice Business Broker, cuyo único puesto es cotizar y vender negocios a tiempo completo.

Artículos recientes para ti

What Is Your Business Worth?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 04:44:49 GMT

Discover how a Business Broker will value your business.

Working with a professional Business Broker can help to realistically price your business for sale.

Many Sellers, before meeting with a Business broker have an idea in their mind as to how much they should ask for their business.

Their CPA or their friend or their realtor may have offered suggestions. So at the time when they do meet their Business Broker and the Broker offer a suggested selling price, sellers will sometimes respond with the dollar figure that their CPA, friend or realtor thought that they should sell for.

The predicament of the business Brokers is how to and will they tell the seller that the price will be too high for their business.

Most professional business brokers will explain the reality of an overpriced business including the fact that overpriced businesses help reasonably priced businesses of the same to type to actually sell.

A business owner needs to understand that a Business Broker is valuing the business logically and realistically based upon past sales and experience whereas a seller looks at the business emotionally.

The art of valuing a business is just that, it is an art and not a science. A business sells for what a willing buyer will pay and what a willing seller will accept.

Another option is to obtain an outside valuation for a cost of about $3,000.00. Sometimes these outside valuations are theoretical and not a Market Price Analysis and may not be worth the cost.

For more information on how a business is valued, contact your First Choice Business Broker professional whose only position is listing and selling businesses full time.

¿Qué es la parálisis por análisis?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 02:36:44 GMT

Cómo puede perderse una oferta "excelente" al analizar en exceso.

Aprende por qué deberías arriesgarte y tomar una decisión.

En el corretaje de negocios, vemos muchos compradores potenciales que han decidido que quieren seguir su sueño de ser dueños de su propio negocio. Estos compradores potenciales le pedirán a su agente que los contacte rápidamente cuando surja una "oferta especial" cuando estén listos para comprar.

Sorprendentemente, vemos que pasan seis o incluso nueve meses con docenas de presentaciones de oportunidades comerciales realizadas y avisos de "ofertas especiales" enviadas al comprador para descubrir que este comprador ansioso está afectado por una "parálisis de análisis". Este comprador ha perdido las "ofertas interesantes" potenciales frente a otros compradores que han aprovechado estas oportunidades.

¿Qué es la “parálisis por análisis”? En pocas palabras, la incapacidad de tomar una decisión. Los compradores quedan tan absortos en la revisión y el análisis de tantos negocios que el proceso en sí mismo se convierte en su negocio, siempre preguntándose si la próxima oportunidad será una mejor opción o un negocio más sólido, etc. Algunos compradores ejercen una presión extraordinariamente grande sobre sí mismos para comprar el negocio "correcto" que pierden la oportunidad correcta debido a la parálisis del análisis. De hecho, hemos escuchado a los compradores decir: "¿Puedo hacer este negocio todos los días por el resto de mi vida"? Por supuesto, es una pregunta razonable, sin embargo, esta pregunta también puede hacer que todos los negocios parezcan abrumadores y genera una gran tensión indebida en el comprador. Sí, por supuesto que desea que la compra del negocio sea lo más adecuada posible; sin embargo, también recuerde que si no es la opción adecuada, tiene la oportunidad de vender ese negocio y mudarse a otras empresas.

Nuestro consejo de muchos años de experiencia es que los compradores mantengan una mente abierta a diferentes oportunidades, es posible que se sorprenda de cuál es el negocio adecuado para usted. También es importante que los compradores obviamente hagan su diligencia debida; sin embargo, esos mismos compradores también deben darse cuenta de que otros compradores comerciales también están buscando las oportunidades que surgen y es posible que esos compradores no se vean afectados por la "parálisis de análisis". ¡Prepárese para participar cuando surja el negocio adecuado!

Artículos recientes para ti

What Is Analysis Paralysis?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 02:03:11 GMT

How you can miss out on a “great” offering by over analyzing.

Learn why you should take a chance and make a decision.

In business brokerage, we see many potential buyers who have decided that they want to follow their dream of owning their own business. These potential buyers will ask their agent to quickly contact them when a “hot deal” comes up as they are ready to buy.

Amazingly we see six or even nine months pass with dozens of business opportunity introductions made and “hot deal” notices sent to the buyer to find this anxious buyer is stricken with “analysis paralysis”. This buyer has lost out on the potential “hot deals” to other buyers who have taken advantage of these opportunities.

What is “analysis paralysis?” Simply put, the inability to make a decision. Buyers get so caught up in the review and analysis of so many businesses that the process itself becomes their business, always wondering if the next opportunity will be a better fit or stronger business etc. Some buyers put an extraordinarily large amount of pressure on themselves to buy the “right” business that they miss out on the right opportunity due to analysis paralysis. We’ve actually heard buyers say, “Can I do this business every day for the rest of my life”? It is of course a reasonable question however this question can also make every business seem overwhelming and puts a lot of undue stress on the buyer. Yes of course you want the business buy to be as a good fit as possible however also remember if it is not the right fit you have the opportunity to sell that business and move into other ventures.

Our advice from many years of experience is for buyers to keep an open mind to different opportunities, you might be surprised about what the right business fit for you actually ends up being. Also it is important for buyers to obviously do their due diligence however those same buyers must also realize that other business buyers are also looking at the opportunities that come up and those buyers may not be stricken with “analysis paralysis”. Be ready to jump in when the right business comes along!

Vender o no vender, ¿esa es la cuestión?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 01:55:33 GMT

¡No esperes a que sea demasiado tarde!

Los dueños de negocios se enfrentan al dilema de si deben vender y, de ser así, ¿cuándo es un buen momento?

¿Deberían los dueños de negocios vender cuando su negocio está en auge, cuando el negocio está en declive o cuando están cansados y agotados?

Después de 24 años vendiendo negocios, definitivamente podemos afirmar que el mejor momento para vender es cuando el negocio está en una tendencia alcista. Este es el momento en que los compradores están dispuestos a pagar el precio más alto. Desafortunadamente, muchos dueños de negocios esperan hasta que su negocio esté en declive cuando deciden que ya es suficiente y quieren poner su negocio en venta. Los compradores generalmente no pagarán mucho dinero si ven que el negocio está decayendo durante un período de tiempo. Los vendedores quieren vender el potencial, sin embargo, los compradores solo pagarán por lo que puedan ver como ingresos y la tendencia de los ingresos en el momento en que el negocio esté disponible.

Su First Choice Business Broker puede ofrecerle las experiencias de nuestros 24 años de venta de negocios. Cuando llegue el momento de considerar la venta, estaremos aquí para usted. Mientras tanto, mantenga su negocio funcionando con fuerza para que la "tendencia" de su negocio a los ojos de un comprador sea estable o tenga una tendencia al alza. Durante el proceso de venta, nos ocuparemos de los compradores entrantes y usted se encargará de su negocio para que pueda capturar el precio más alto por sus esfuerzos ganados con tanto esfuerzo.

Artículos recientes para ti

To Sell Or Not To Sell, That Is The Question?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 01:54:16 GMT

Don’t wait until it’s too late!

Business owners are faced with a dilemma of whether they should sell and if so when is a good time?

Should business owners sell when their business is booming, when the business is declining or when they are tired and burned out?

After 24 years of selling businesses we can definitely state that the best time to sell is when the business is on an upward trend. This is the time that buyers are willing to pay the highest price. Unfortunately many business owners wait until their business is declining when they decide enough is enough and want to put their business up for sale. Buyers will not usually pay top dollar if they see the business is declining over a period of time. Sellers want to sell on potential however buyers will only pay for what they can see for income and the income trend at the time the business is available.

Your First Choice Business Broker can offer you the experiences of our 24 years of selling businesses. When the time comes to consider selling we’ll be here for you. In the meantime, keep your business running strong so the “trend” of your business in the eyes of a buyer is stable or on an upward trend. During the sale process we’ll take care of the incoming buyers and you take care of your business so you can capture the highest price for your hard earned efforts.

¿Lista para dejar tu trabajo?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 01:49:59 GMT

¿Es ahora el momento adecuado para comprar un negocio?

Use su plan 401k de impuestos diferidos para comprar un negocio, obtenga más información.

¿Cuándo tiene sentido renunciar a su trabajo y utilizar los fondos de su plan de jubilación para comprar un negocio?

Esta es una pregunta que muchos empleados se hacen a menudo.

¡Estas son algunas de las señales de que es hora!

Estás aburrido con lo que estás haciendo porque no hay desafío en tu trabajo.
Tus ingresos no están en la cantidad que crees que deberían estar.
Su empleador es propiedad de una familia, por lo que no puede ascender demasiado en la escalera.
Está cansado de mudarse y quiere estabilizarse a usted y a su familia.
Temes los lunes por la mañana.

Estas son solo algunas de las razones para considerar "retirarse" y tomar su 401K (libre de impuestos y multas) y usar el dinero para comprar un negocio existente.

First Choice Business Brokers recibe muchas llamadas de personas que posiblemente estén en su puesto, sin embargo, lo que no nos sorprende es que el negocio que están considerando comprar no está relacionado con su puesto de trabajo actual.

Muchas veces una persona quiere un negocio que haga algo que sienta que disfrutará y le dará el estilo de vida que desea.

¿Estás listo para el desafío?

Artículos recientes para ti

Ready To Quit Your Job?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 01:46:08 GMT

Is now the right time for you to buy a business?

Use your 401k tax deferred plan to buy a business, learn more.

When does it make good sense to quit your job and use your retirement plan fund to buy a business?

This is a question that many employees ask themselves on a regular basis.

Here are some of the signs that it is time!

You are bored with what you are doing as there is no challenge in your work.
Your income is not at the amount you think that it should be.
Your employer is family owned so you can’t go too high up the ladder.
You are tired of relocating and want to stabilize you and your family.
You dread Monday mornings.

These are just some of the reasons to consider “retiring” and taking your 401K (tax free and penalty free) and using the money to buy an existing business.

First Choice Business Brokers receives many calls from people possibly in your position, however what does not surprise us is that the business they are considering purchasing is not related to their current work position.

Many times a person wants a business doing something that they feel they will enjoy and give them the lifestyle they desire.

Are you ready for the challenge?

Preparación para la condonación de préstamos PPP

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 01:17:18 GMT

Ahora que tiene su préstamo PPP, es hora de prepararse para su "perdón de préstamo".

Algunos pueden pensar en su préstamo PPP como "dinero gratis", sin embargo, hay pautas que deben seguirse para recibir la condonación total del préstamo.

El 15 de mayo, la SBA publicó la solicitud de condonación de préstamos, lo que dejó confundidos a los bancos y a los propietarios de pequeñas empresas. Una semana después, la SBA preparó comentarios adicionales para su publicación en un intento de brindar orientación adicional; sin embargo, aún quedaban muchas preguntas sin respuesta para algunos prestatarios. Con más de $ 511 mil millones en préstamos PPP y el 79% de los cuales son préstamos de menos de $ 100,000, seguramente habrá muchas preguntas para los trabajadores estadounidenses que intentan mantener abiertas sus pequeñas empresas.

Realmente apreciamos el resumen de Kyle Westaway de la guía más reciente sobre la condonación de préstamos PPP y creemos que usted también lo hará. Este artículo proporciona información sobre lo que el banco revisará en una solicitud de condonación y el plazo para la decisión del prestamista sobre su condonación.

Una pregunta que ha surgido una y otra vez es ¿qué costos son elegibles para la condonación? A continuación se encuentran las pautas de elegibilidad directamente de la solicitud de perdón de la SBA.

Resumen de los costos elegibles para la condonación: los prestatarios son elegibles para la condonación de préstamos por los siguientes costos:

1. Costos de nómina elegibles. Los prestatarios generalmente son elegibles para la condonación de los costos de nómina pagados y los costos de nómina incurridos durante el Período Cubierto de ocho semanas (56 días) (o Período Cubierto de Nómina Alternativo) ("costos de nómina"). Los costos de nómina se consideran pagados el día en que se distribuyen los cheques de pago o el Prestatario origina una transacción de crédito ACH. Los costos de nómina se consideran incurridos el día en que se gana el salario del empleado. Los costos de nómina incurridos pero no pagados durante el último período de pago del Prestatario del Período cubierto (o Período cubierto de nómina alternativo) son elegibles para la condonación si se pagan en o antes de la próxima fecha de nómina regular. De lo contrario, los costos de nómina deben pagarse durante el Período cubierto (o Período cubierto de nómina alternativo). Para cada empleado individual, la cantidad total de compensación en efectivo elegible para la condonación no puede exceder un salario anual de $100,000, prorrateado para el período cubierto. Cuente los costos de nómina que se pagaron y se incurrieron solo una vez. Para obtener información sobre lo que califica como costos de nómina, consulte la Norma final provisional sobre el Programa de protección de cheques de pago publicada el 2 de abril de 2020 (85 FR 20811).

2. Costos elegibles no relacionados con la nómina. Los costos que no son de nómina elegibles para la condonación consisten en: (a) obligaciones hipotecarias cubiertas: pagos de intereses (sin incluir ningún pago anticipado o pago de capital) sobre cualquier obligación hipotecaria comercial sobre bienes muebles o inmuebles incurridos antes del 15 de febrero de 2020 ("pagos de intereses hipotecarios comerciales ”); (b) obligaciones de alquiler cubiertas: pagos de alquiler o arrendamiento comercial de conformidad con contratos de arrendamiento de bienes muebles o inmuebles vigentes antes del 15 de febrero de 2020 ("pagos de alquiler o arrendamiento comercial"); y (c) pagos de servicios públicos cubiertos: pagos comerciales por un servicio de distribución de electricidad, gas, agua, transporte, teléfono o acceso a Internet cuyo servicio comenzó antes del 15 de febrero de 2020 ("pagos comerciales de servicios públicos"). Un costo elegible no relacionado con la nómina debe pagarse durante el Período cubierto o incurrirse durante el Período cubierto y pagarse en la siguiente fecha de facturación regular o antes, incluso si la fecha de facturación es posterior al Período cubierto. Los costos elegibles no relacionados con la nómina no pueden exceder el 25 % del monto total de la condonación. Cuente los costos no relacionados con la nómina que se pagaron y se incurrieron solo una vez. El monto de la condonación del préstamo que solicita el Prestatario puede estar sujeto a reducciones, como se explica en el Anexo A del PPP.

Artículos recientes para ti

Preparing For PPP Loan Forgiveness

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 01:07:06 GMT

Now that you have your PPP loan it's time to look at preparing for your "loan forgiveness".

Some may think of their PPP loan as "free money" however there are guidelines that must be followed in order to receive full loan forgiveness.

On May 15, the SBA released the loan forgiveness application , which left banks and small business owners confused. A week later the SBA prepared additional comments for release in an attempt to provide additional guidance however there were still many unanswered questions for some borrowers. With over $511 billion out in PPP loans and 79% of those being loans under $100,000 there are bound to be a lot of questions for hard working American's trying to keep their small businesses open.

We really appreciated Kyle Westaway's summary of the latest guidance on PPP loan forgiveness and think you will as well. This article provides information on what the bank will review in a forgiveness application and the timeline for the lender's decision on your forgiveness.

One question that has come up time and time again, is what costs are eligible for forgiveness? Below are eligibility guidelines directly from the SBA forgiveness application .

Summary of Costs Eligible for Forgiveness: Borrowers are eligible for loan forgiveness for the following costs:

1. Eligible payroll costs. Borrowers are generally eligible for forgiveness for the payroll costs paid and payroll costs incurred during the eight-week (56-day) Covered Period (or Alternative Payroll Covered Period) (“payroll costs”). Payroll costs are considered paid on the day that paychecks are distributed or the Borrower originates an ACH credit transaction. Payroll costs are considered incurred on the day that the employee’s pay is earned. Payroll costs incurred but not paid during the Borrower’s last pay period of the Covered Period (or Alternative Payroll Covered Period) are eligible for forgiveness if paid on or before the next regular payroll date. Otherwise, payroll costs must be paid during the Covered Period (or Alternative Payroll Covered Period). For each individual employee, the total amount of cash compensation eligible for forgiveness may not exceed an annual salary of $100,000, as prorated for the covered period. Count payroll costs that were both paid and incurred only once. For information on what qualifies as payroll costs, see Interim Final Rule on Paycheck Protection Program posted on April 2, 2020 (85 FR 20811).

2. Eligible nonpayroll costs. Nonpayroll costs eligible for forgiveness consist of: (a) covered mortgage obligations: payments of interest (not including any prepayment or payment of principal) on any business mortgage obligation on real or personal property incurred before February 15, 2020 (“business mortgage interest payments”); (b) covered rent obligations: business rent or lease payments pursuant to lease agreements for real or personal property in force before February 15, 2020 (“business rent or lease payments”); and (c) covered utility payments: business payments for a service for the distribution of electricity, gas, water, transportation, telephone, or internet access for which service began before February 15, 2020 (“business utility payments”). An eligible nonpayroll cost must be paid during the Covered Period or incurred during the Covered Period and paid on or before the next regular billing date, even if the billing date is after the Covered Period. Eligible nonpayroll costs cannot exceed 25% of the total forgiveness amount. Count nonpayroll costs that were both paid and incurred only once. The amount of loan forgiveness the Borrower applies for may be subject to reductions as explained in PPP Schedule A.

De lo malo sale lo bueno

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 00:59:16 GMT

¡Grandes cadenas fuera, pequeñas empresas adentro!

Un estudio reciente de la Asociación Nacional de Agentes Inmobiliarios cita datos interesantes sobre la reutilización de centros comerciales vacíos.

Las grandes cadenas se han mudado de sus tiendas físicas, dejando enormes vacantes y dolores de cabeza para los propietarios de centros comerciales y negocios independientes en esos centros comerciales que basaron su negocio en el tráfico peatonal de los ahora desaparecidos inquilinos ancla. Nombres como J Crew, Sears, Foot Locker, Nordstrom, Payless Shoes y muchos otros han desaparecido y con ellos, la pérdida de puestos de trabajo. Con estas enormes cantidades de espacio vacante, los centros comerciales han estado vendiendo a grupos de inversión a precios increíblemente reducidos, incluso tan bajos como $1 por pie cuadrado. Como ejemplo de un centro comercial remodelado está el Cloverleaf Mall en Richmond Virginia. En 2006, el centro comercial fue remodelado para un desarrollo de uso mixto de varias fases anclado en un Kroger Marketplace de 123,600 pies cuadrados que incluye espacio para oficinas, restaurantes, tiendas minoristas y un componente residencial llamado Chippenham Place. Algunos centros comerciales incluso se han convertido en centros logísticos de Amazon y otros en edificios de oficinas.

Hay muchos otros centros comerciales vacantes que han reutilizado sus centros para atraer a las pequeñas empresas independientes. Sí, estamos hablando de las mismas empresas que lucharon y perdieron negocios debido a las cadenas ahora desaparecidas.

NAR informa que las ciudades locales de todo el país se han sumado a la remodelación de estos centros comerciales no operativos con incentivos fiscales para atraer nuevos inquilinos. Algunos centros comerciales se han remodelado para incluir apartamentos e incluso senderos y parques para caminar o pasear.

Entonces, de todas las malas noticias de hoy, ¿cuál es la buena noticia? La buena noticia es que el propietario de la pequeña empresa ha regresado a estos centros comerciales reconstruidos ahora no anclados y también los trabajos. Las pequeñas empresas en los EE. UU. proporcionan más del 60% de todo el empleo según la Administración de Pequeñas Empresas y crean más de 1,5 millones de puestos de trabajo al año. BusinessInsider.com confirmó que al menos 3300 cadenas de tiendas cerrarán en 2020. Las malas noticias del cierre de las grandes cadenas brindan una oportunidad muy necesaria para los empresarios comerciales de "mamá y papá" en los EE. UU.

Desde 1994, First Choice Business Brokers ha ayudado a compradores y vendedores de pequeñas empresas. Ahora vemos el resurgimiento de los propietarios de pequeñas empresas que anteriormente pueden haber perdido negocios debido a la llegada de los centros comerciales y las grandes cadenas. Como decíamos, de lo malo sale lo bueno.

Artículos recientes para ti

Out Of The Bad Comes The Good

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 00:58:07 GMT

Big Chains Out, Small Business In!

National Association of Realtors recent study cites interesting facts regarding the re-purposing of vacant malls.

The big chains have moved from their brick and mortar stores leaving huge vacancies and headaches for mall owners and independent businesses in those malls who based their business on the foot traffic from the now gone anchor tenants. Names such as J Crew, Sears, Foot Locker, Nordstrom, Payless Shoes and many others have disappeared and with them, the loss of jobs. With these huge amounts of vacant space the malls have been selling to investment groups at unbelievably discounted prices even as low as $1 per square foot. As an example of a redeveloped mall is the Cloverleaf Mall in Richmond Virginia. In 2006 the mall was redeveloped for a multi-phased, mixed-use development anchored by a 123,600 square foot Kroger Marketplace which includes office space, restaurants, retail stores and a residential component called Chippenham Place. Some malls have even been converted to Amazon fulfillment centers and others to office buildings.

There are many other vacant malls that have repurposed their centers to bring in the small independent businesses. Yes, we are talking about the same businesses that struggled and lost business due to the now defunct chains.

NAR Reports that across the country local cities have joined in redeveloping these non-operational malls with tax incentives to bring in new tenants. Some malls have been redeveloped to include apartments and even walking/strolling paths and parks.

So, from all of today’s bad news, what is the good news? The good news is that the small business owner has returned to these now non anchored redeveloped malls and so have the jobs. Small businesses in the US provide over 60% of all employment per the Small Business Administration and create over 1.5 million jobs annually. BusinessInsider.com confirmed that at least 3,300 chain stores are closing in 2020. The bad news of the big chains closing provides a much-needed opportunity for the “mom and pop” business entrepreneurs in the US.

Since 1994, First Choice Business Brokers has been assisting buyers and sellers of small businesses. Now we see the resurgence for small business owners who may have previously lost business due to the advent of shopping malls and big chains. As we said, from the bad comes the good.

Due Diligence ¿Qué significa para la vendedora?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 00:52:27 GMT

La preparación del vendedor facilita la debida diligencia

Pasos para que los vendedores se preparen para el eventual proceso de diligencia debida.

El Comprador ha hecho una oferta sobre su negocio y en el Acuerdo de Compra establece que necesita diez días para completar su diligencia debida sobre su negocio, ¿qué debe hacer usted como vendedor?

El comprador querrá ver sus estados financieros y declaraciones de impuestos si aún no se han proporcionado.

Sugerencia # 1 cuando le entrega la lista de negocios a su corredor; trate de dar los últimos 3 años de sus pérdidas y ganancias, balances y declaraciones de impuestos. Esto no solo le ahorrará mucho tiempo y le mostrará al Comprador que usted es franco con sus documentos.

El Comprador querrá validar los ingresos y los gastos que ha mostrado en sus P&L para que comprenda completamente los ingresos reclamados en el negocio.

Consejo # 2 es una gran idea dar una explicación por escrito a su agente de cualquier "agregación posterior" para que el Comprador no esté tratando de adivinar cómo llegó a sus cifras.

A menos que el Comprador comprenda cómo llegó a sus cifras de ingresos, seguirá solicitando más pruebas de ingresos.

Consejo # 3 Cuanta más información (mantenimiento de registros) proporcione a su corredor por adelantado, menos información tendrá que seguir solicitando el comprador. Trate de proporcionar la mayor cantidad de documentación (informe de impuestos sobre las ventas, etc.) a su corredor. Recuerde que dependiendo de la época del año, el Comprador querrá información financiera actualizada.

Consejo # 4 Trate de mantener su grabación al día. Se han perdido muchas ofertas debido a que el Vendedor no le informó al Comprador sobre cambios importantes en los ingresos brutos o netos.

Due Diligence ¿Qué significa para el Comprador?

Muchos compradores solicitan la debida diligencia en un negocio cuando hacen una oferta, pero no están seguros de lo que esto abarca.

El Vendedor debe proporcionarle al Comprador sus declaraciones de ingresos y posiblemente sus declaraciones de impuestos.

La diligencia debida generalmente no incluye contingencias que deban completarse, como licencias, acuerdos de empleados u otros elementos similares.

Trate de armar una lista de los elementos que desea revisar para que no esté constantemente pidiendo elementos adicionales. El Vendedor habrá sido informado por el Corredor de que necesitará proporcionar ciertos artículos a un comprador.

Como Comprador, tiene la obligación de revisar los documentos proporcionados por el Vendedor o hacer que su asesor profesional los revise. Desafortunadamente, no puede pedir ni confiar en su corredor para que complete su diligencia debida por usted.

Una vez que reciba los documentos solicitados, deberá tomar una decisión dentro del plazo establecido en el Acuerdo de Compra.

Si decide que necesita más documentación para respaldar los ingresos que reclama el Vendedor, intente hacerlo lo antes posible, ya que tiene ciertas limitaciones de tiempo para obtener estos documentos. Está bien pedirle al vendedor que explique ciertos gastos o cambios en los ingresos netos del vendedor.

Finalmente, asegúrese de comprender completamente los ingresos y gastos del negocio antes de seguir adelante.

Una vez que libere su Diligencia debida, declara que está satisfecho de que las cifras que le proporcionó el Vendedor parecen ser correctas y está avanzando en la transacción.

Artículos recientes para ti

Due Diligence What Does It Mean To The Seller?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 00:50:00 GMT

Seller’s preparation makes smooth due diligence

Steps for sellers to prepare for the eventual due diligence process.

The Buyer has made an offer on your business and in the Purchase Agreement it states that he needs ten days to complete his due diligence on your business, what should you as the seller do?

The buyer will want to see your financial statements and tax returns if they have not already been supplied.

Tip # 1 when you give the business listing to your Broker; try to give the last 3 years of your P&L’s, Balance Sheets and tax returns. This will not only save a lot of time and will show the Buyer that you are forthright with your documents.

The Buyer will want to validate the income and expenses that you have shown on your P&L’s so that they fully understand the income claimed on the business.

Tip # 2 it is a great idea to give a written explanation to your agent of any “add backs” so that the Buyer is not trying to guess how you arrived at your figures.

Unless the Buyer understands how you arrived at your income figures he or she will keep asking for more proof of income

Tip # 3 The more information (record keeping), that you supply to your Broker up front, the less information the Buyer will have to keep asking for. Try to provide as much documentation (Sales tax reports etc.), to your Broker. Remember depending upon the time of the year, the Buyer will want up to date financials.

Tip # 4 Try to keep your recording keeping up to date. Many deals have been lost due to the Seller not letting the Buyer know of any major changes to the Gross or Net income.

Due Diligence what does it mean to the Buyer?

Many Buyers ask for Due diligence on a business when making an offer but are not sure what this encompasses.

The Seller should be supplying the Buyer, with their income statements and possibly their tax returns.

Due diligence usually does not include any contingencies that need to be completed such as licensing, employee agreements or other such items.

Try to put a list together of the items that you want to review so that you are not constantly asking for additional items. The Seller will have been advised by the Broker that he will need to supply a buyer with certain items.

As a Buyer you do have an obligation to either review those documents supplied by the Seller or have your professional advisor review the documents. Unfortunately you cannot ask or rely on your Broker to complete your Due diligence for you.

Once you receive the documents requested, you will need to make a decision within the time period set up in the Purchase Agreement.

If you decide that you need more documentation to support the income that the Seller is claiming, try to do this as soon as possible since you have certain time constraints to obtain these documents. It is OK to ask the Seller to explain certain expenses or changes to the Sellers net income.

Finally, make certain that you fully understand the income and expenses of the business before going forward.

Once you release your Due Diligence, you are stating that you are satisfied that the figures given to you by the Seller appear to be correct and you are moving forward in the transaction.

Últimas noticias sobre sus fondos de jubilación

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 00:40:09 GMT

La SBA anuncia un acceso más rápido a los fondos de jubilación para compras comerciales

Últimas noticias sobre la compra de un negocio con fondos de jubilación.

Si planeaba usar sus fondos de jubilación para el pago inicial o el precio total de compra de un negocio, pero se desanimó por la cantidad de tiempo adicional que tomaría, ¡tenemos EXCELENTES NOTICIAS!

El jueves 7 de mayo de 2020, la SBA anunció que los socios prestamistas preferidos, conocidos como PLP, ahora pueden aprobar estas transacciones internamente.

¿Qué significa esto para usted? No más largos tiempos de espera de la SBA.

Puede utilizar sus fondos de jubilación libres de impuestos y multas.

Ahora puede utilizar sus fondos de jubilación rápidamente y, por qué no, ¡es su dinero!

Obtenga más información sobre cómo usar sus fondos de jubilación libres de impuestos.

Artículos recientes para ti

Breaking News On Your Retirement Funds

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 20 Jul 2023 00:36:29 GMT

SBA announces faster access to retirement funds for business purchases

Breaking News on purchasing a business with retirement funds.

If you planned on using your retirement funds for the down payment or total purchase price of a business but were put off by the extra amount of time it would take we've got GREAT NEWS!

Thursday, May 7th 2020 the SBA announced that preferred lending partners, known as PLPs, are now able to approve these transactions in-house.

What does this mean to you? No more extensive SBA wait time.

You can use your retirement funds free of taxes and penalties.
You can now utilize your retirement funds quickly and why not, it's your money!

Learn more about using your retirement funds tax free.

Añadir Espaldas: ¿Qué Son?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 15 Jun 2023 03:59:49 GMT

Comprender el verdadero ingreso neto del vendedor

Una comprensión más profunda de qué gastos del vendedor se pueden agregar de nuevo a la línea de fondo de manera realista.

El posible comprador de un taller de reparación de automóviles en venta en California notó, mientras realizaba due diligence, que un asistente de oficina figuraba en la nómina. Pero había visitado el negocio como cliente y nunca había visto a nadie trabajando en la oficina.

Al preguntar sobre esto, se enteró de que se estaba pagando un "salario" de $ 1,500 por mes a la cuñada del vendedor, y que ella figuraba como asistente de oficina, pero en realidad no trabajaba en la compañía.

Eso es un "add-back" y debe incluirse con los ingresos netos que dijo el vendedor.

El comprador estaba preocupado por este descubrimiento. También fue confusa la afirmación del vendedor de que los gastos de automóviles, como la gasolina y el seguro cobrados como costos comerciales, deberían agregarse nuevamente a las ganancias.

Estos son solo dos ejemplos de las muchas preguntas y fuentes de confusiones que pueden surgir al tratar de comprender los costos reales involucrados con la operación de un negocio. La confusión se produce porque muchos, si no la mayoría de los vendedores, intentan mostrar la menor cantidad de ingresos posible para reducir los impuestos que deben pagarse. Luego, cuando llega el momento de vender, el propietario del negocio tiene el objetivo opuesto, querer mostrar la mayor cantidad de ganancias posible para justificar el precio que se pide para el negocio.

La forma típica de resolver este dilema es que el vendedor señale los costos cobrados a la empresa pero que no son realmente necesarios para operar.

Buenos ejemplos de estos gastos son los gastos personales del propietario pagados a través del negocio, entre otros artículos.

Estas explicaciones, sin embargo, a veces plantean más preguntas de las que responden.

Cuando el comprador que estaba investigando el negocio Investigó lo que decía el vendedor, se enteró de que aunque no había nadie físicamente presente en la oficina durante el horario comercial, era necesario tener a alguien que se encargaba del trabajo de oficina. La cuñada venía por las tardes o los fines de semana para equilibrar la chequera de la compañía, verificar que todas las piezas ordenadas se cargaran contra las órdenes de reparación, comparar los estados de cuenta de los proveedores con las facturas individuales, manejar las responsabilidades de nómina e impuestos sobre las ventas y encargarse de las tareas relacionadas.

Y si bien era cierto que el vendedor estaba cobrando al negocio por sus gastos personales de automóvil, también era el hecho de que el automóvil se usaba para actividades comerciales necesarias, como recoger piezas y llevar a los clientes a su hogar u oficina.

Un estado de pérdidas y ganancias ajustado bien preparado anticipa las preguntas del comprador y define claramente qué gastos en el estado operativo son y cuáles no son necesarios para una gestión eficiente del negocio.

Pero no todos los vendedores saben cómo proporcionar esa información de una manera que sea fácil de entender. Y no todos están dispuestos a participar en una divulgación completa y completa.

Depende del comprador cuidadoso cuestionar cada elemento en el estado de ingresos y gastos. Y para hacer preguntas como:

- ¿Es necesario cada gasto detallado para operar el negocio correctamente?

- ¿El total listado para cada artículo es el gasto real, o es el costo real más bajo o más alto que lo que se ha ingresado en los libros?

El comprador de negocios inteligentes no acepta, sin lugar a dudas, las cifras enumeradas en el P&L y las finanzas de una empresa que se está considerando, pero investiga un poco para saber qué representan realmente las cifras.
Parte del trabajo de Business Brokers es interrogar al vendedor sobre cada artículo para determinar si el gasto es un "verdadero gasto comercial" o es un gasto que es necesario para administrar el negocio.

Un Business Broker competente revisará los P & L del vendedor y "refundirá" los números agregando los "gastos no esenciales" que se pagaron a través del negocio para llegar a un ingreso neto ajustado para el negocio.

Los compradores encontrarán que el 98% de los propietarios de pequeñas empresas tienen algún tipo de adición y no deben alejarse del negocio si están satisfechos con las explicaciones del vendedor de las "adición".

Artículos recientes para ti

Add Backs: What Are They?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 15 Jun 2023 03:56:15 GMT

Understanding the seller’s true Net income

A deeper understanding of which seller expenses can be added back to the bottom line realistically.

The prospective buyer of an auto repair shop for sale in California noticed, while conducting Due Diligence noticed that an office assistant was listed on the payroll. But he'd visited the business as a customer and had never seen anyone working in the office.

When inquiring about this, he learned that a "salary" of $1,500 per month was being paid to the seller's sister-in-law, and that she was listed as an office assistant, but didn't actually work at the company.

That's an "add-back" and it should be included with net income the seller said.

The buyer was troubled by this discovery. Also confusing was the seller's assertion that auto expenses, such as gas and insurance charged off as business costs, should be added back to profits.

These are just two examples of the many questions and sources of confusions that can surface when trying to understand the actual costs involved with operation of a business. The confusion comes about because many, if not most sellers attempt to show as little income as possible to reduce the taxes that have to be paid. Then, when it's time to sell, the business owner has the opposite objective, wanting to show as much earnings as possible to justify the price being asked for the business.

The typical way of resolving this dilemma is for the seller to point out the costs charged to the business but not really necessary to operate.

Good examples of these expenses are the owner’s personal expenses paid through the business amongst other items.

These explanations, however, sometimes raise more questions than they answer.

When the buyer who was investigating the business looked into what the seller was saying, he learned that although there was no one physically present in the office during business hours, it was necessary to have someone handling office work. The sister in law came in on evenings or weekends to balance the company check book, verify that all parts ordered were charged against repair orders, to compare vendor statements with individual invoices, handle payroll and sales tax responsibilities and take care of related duties.

And while it was true that the seller was charging the business for his personal auto expenses, it also was the fact that the car was used for needed business activities such as picking up parts and taking customers to their home or office.

A well prepared adjusted profit and loss statement anticipates buyer questions and clearly defines what expenses on the operating statement are, and what are not necessary for efficient management of the business.

But not every seller knows how to provide that information in a way that's easy to understand. And not everyone is willing to engage in full and complete disclosure.

It's up to the careful buyer to question every item on the income and expense statement. And to ask questions such as:

- Is each itemized expense necessary in order to operate the business properly?

- Is the listed total for each item the actual expense, or is the real cost lower, or higher than what has been entered in the books?

The smart business buyer does not accept, without question, the figures listed in the P&L and financials of a company being considered, but does some investigating to learn what the figures actually represent.
Part of the Business Brokers job is to question the seller about each items to determine if the expense is a “true business expense” or is it an expense that is necessary to run the business.

A competent Business Broker will review the seller’s P & L’s and “recast” the numbers by adding back the “non-essential expenses” that were paid through the business in order to arrive at an Adjusted net income for the business.

Buyers will find that 98% of small business owners have some type of add back and should not walk away from the business if they are satisfied with the seller’s explanations of the “add backs”.

¿Su negocio se trata solo de usted?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 15 Jun 2023 03:46:35 GMT

Mirando su negocio a través de los ojos del Comprador

Ideas para despersonalizar su negocio y hacerlo más deseable para los compradores.

Muchos vendedores sienten que su negocio debe reflejar su propio toque personal y, de alguna manera, eso puede ser bueno, SIN EMBARGO, no cuando está vendiendo su negocio.

Hay muchos vendedores que "personalizan" demasiado su negocio y hacen que sea demasiado sobre ellos como propietarios de negocios para que un comprador se vea a sí mismo en el negocio. Los compradores a menudo se preocupan de que el negocio dependa del vendedor y cuando esté tratando de vender su negocio, esto funcionará en su contra.

Incluso hemos visto a lo largo de los años muchos escenarios diferentes que con pequeños ajustes podrían haberse evitado. Por ejemplo, teníamos un restaurante exclusivo donde los propietarios etiquetaban cada elemento del menú con sus propios nombres, por ejemplo, Mary's Meat Loaf o Ricky's Ribs. ¿Qué sucede cuando un comprador se hace cargo de ese negocio? ¿Mantienen los elementos del menú como Mary's Meat Loaf a pesar de que su nombre es Sue? Si cambian los nombres de los elementos del menú, la reimpresión de los menús tiene un costo y, lo que es más importante, los clientes pensarán que las recetas ahora son diferentes y que no pueden pedir su comida favorita. Incluso es una buena idea mirar alrededor de su negocio con nuevos ojos. ¿Su negocio está cubierto con artículos personales como fotos familiares o fotos de su último viaje de pesca, o incluso recuerdos de logros? Los premios para un restaurante o servicios comerciales son excelentes, pero demasiados artículos personales pueden restar valor a la hora de vender.

Mire su negocio a través de los ojos de un comprador. Podría tener un negocio muy exitoso que sea propiedad de una familia con demasiada personalización. Cuando llegue el momento de vender, esto asustará a los compradores potenciales porque creen que los propietarios están tan atados a sus clientes que la empresa perderá ingresos una vez que la empresa cambie de manos.

Los vendedores de este restaurante en particular habían intentado anteriormente vender su negocio sin éxito. Cuando tomamos la lista, nos dimos cuenta de que nos estaban contratando por nuestra experiencia y, a menudo, por consejos de sentido común. Inmediatamente sugerimos que los vendedores hicieran cambios en su menú para eliminar sus nombres de cada artículo. El resultado fue que vendimos el negocio en un período de tiempo muy corto. Su negocio fue realmente exitoso, pero los compradores no pudieron ver más allá de toda la personalización con este pequeño cambio, su negocio se volvió mucho más vendible, lo que por supuesto resultó en compradores y vendedores felices.

Un comprador potencial debe creer que el negocio que se ofrece es transferible sin una pérdida importante de negocio debido a la relación de los vendedores después de que se complete la transacción.

Como Business Brokers, siempre aconsejamos a los dueños de negocios que están considerando vender que despersonalicen su negocio antes de comercializarlo. Entonces, ¿cómo elimina el propietario de la empresa la personalización, como una gran cantidad de fotos familiares, etc., sin alertar a todos de que está considerando vender? Un método del que hemos sido testigos es que el dueño del negocio considera alguna remodelación o pintura "pequeña" donde necesita quitar artículos.

La conclusión es que si está considerando vender su negocio, hable con su profesional de First Choice para revisar si su negocio no solo es vendible y deseable, sino también si su negocio está listo para venderse según la forma en que el comprador lo verá. Asegúrese de que el comprador no sienta que su negocio es "todo sobre usted".

Artículos recientes para ti

Is Your Business All About You?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 15 Jun 2023 03:35:20 GMT

Looking at your business through the eyes of the Buyer

Ideas to de-personalize your business and make it more desirable to Buyers.

Many sellers feel that their business should reflect their own personal touch and in some ways that may be good HOWEVER not when you are selling your business.

There are many sellers who over “customize” their business making it too much about them as business owners for a buyer to see themselves in the business. Buyers often have concern that the business is dependent on the seller and when you are trying to sell your business this will work against you.

We have even seen over the years many different scenarios that with small tweaks issues could have been avoided. For instance we had an upscale restaurant where the owners labelled each menu item with their own names, for example Mary’s Meat Loaf or Ricky’s Ribs. What happens when a buyer takes over that business? Do they keep the menu items as Mary’s Meat Loaf even though their name is Sue? If they do change the names of the menu items there is a cost for menus to be re-printed and more importantly will the customers think that the recipes are now different and they can’t order their favorite meal. It’s even a good idea to look around your business with fresh eyes. Is your business covered with personal items such as family photos or photos of your last fishing trip, or even mementos of achievements? Awards for a restaurant or business services are great but too many personal items can detract when selling.

Take a look at your business through the eyes of a buyer. You could have a very successful business that is family owned with too much personal customization. When it comes time to sell, this will scare off potential buyers because they believe that the owners are so tied in with their customers or clients that the business will lose revenue once the business changes hands.

The sellers of this particular restaurant had previously attempted to sell their business with no success. We realized when we took the listing that they were hiring us for our experience and often common sense advice. We immediately suggested that the sellers make changes to their menu to remove their names from each item. The result was that we sold the business within a very short time period. Their business was truly successful but buyers couldn’t see past all the personalization with this small change their business became much more saleable which of course resulted in happy sellers and buyers.

A potential buyer must believe that the business that is being offered is transferable without a major loss of business because of the relationship of the sellers after the transaction is completed.

As Business Brokers, we always advise business owners who are considering selling to de-personalize their business prior to the business being marketed. So how does the business owner remove personalization such as an abundance of family photos etc. without alerting everyone that they are considering selling? One method we have witnessed is that the business owner considers some “small” remodeling or painting where he or she needs to remove items.

The bottom line is that if you are considering selling your business, talk to your First Choice professional to review whether your business is not only saleable and desirable but also if your business is ready to sell from how the buyer will view it. Make sure that the buyer will not feel that your business is “All about you”.

¡El CALIENTE mercado de ventas de pequeñas empresas de hoy!

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 15 Jun 2023 02:02:06 GMT

La economía hace que comprar sea una realidad

Ventas récord reportadas por el sitio web nacional BizBuySell

El mercado está caliente: los baby boomers que se jubilan y los ingresos en aumento impulsan las ventas récord de las pequeñas empresas

El informe Insight del segundo trimestre de 2018 de BizBuySell.com examina las transacciones y la demografía detrás de los niveles récord de pequeñas empresas que cambian de manos

San Francisco, CA - BizBuySell.com, el mercado de negocios para la venta más grande de Internet, informó hoy un número récord de pequeñas empresas que cambiaron de manos en la primera mitad de 2018. El crecimiento se puede atribuir en gran medida a un número creciente de Baby Boomers que salen su negocio, así como mejorar las finanzas del negocio. Los resultados completos se incluyen en el informe Insight Q2 2018 de BizBuySell, que agrega estadísticas de transacciones comerciales para la venta informadas por los corredores comerciales participantes en todo el país.

Se informó la venta de un total de 5,383 negocios en los dos primeros trimestres de 2018, lo que pone el año en camino de superar el récord de 2017 de 9,919 transacciones. Solo en el segundo trimestre, 2.705 empresas cambiaron de manos, un aumento del 6,7 por ciento con respecto al mismo período del año pasado y la mayor parte de cualquier trimestre desde que BizBuySell comenzó a rastrear datos en 2007.

Artículos recientes para ti

¿Cómo puedo reducir los gastos comerciales durante Covid?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 15 Jun 2023 01:59:34 GMT

Reducir los costos mediante la revisión de los gastos puede ayudarlo a superar estos tiempos difíciles.

Todos sabemos que cada dólar cuenta especialmente durante esta crisis.

Mientras que algunos dueños de negocios están solicitando préstamos PPP, los dueños de negocios inteligentes también están evaluando dónde se gasta cada $.

Ahora es un buen momento para examinar todos los gastos de su negocio. Uno de esos gastos son las tasas y tarifas de procesamiento de su tarjeta de crédito.

Ahora más que nunca, todos los dueños de negocios están tomando tarjetas de crédito como su principal forma de pago para un servicio sin contacto y sin contacto. Encontramos un banco de procesamiento de tarjetas de crédito que ofrece revisiones gratuitas de las tasas y tarifas de procesamiento de tarjetas de crédito. Si no pueden superar sus tarifas y cargos actuales, le pagarán $1,000*. ¿Quién no podría usar $ 1,000 adicionales en este momento? U.S. Bank Payment Solutions dice que confían en que pueden superar la mayoría de las tasas porque son un administrador directo, sin intermediarios para pagar. También descubrimos que ni siquiera requieren que tengas una cuenta bancaria en su banco.

Algunos otros gastos a considerar revisar son las primas de seguros, servicios de seguridad y servicios de nómina. Muchos proveedores de servicios comerciales ofrecen algunos de sus servicios a precios regulares sin costo alguno o con grandes descuentos, solo tiene que preguntar.

First Choice Business Brokers está ayudando a los dueños de negocios a organizar su tasa de procesamiento de tarjetas de crédito y revisiones de tarifas sin costo alguno.

¡Queremos ayudarte a ahorrar cada $ que puedas!

*Se pueden aplicar los términos y condiciones de Cumplir o Superar.

No hay ninguna obligación, no tiene nada que perder al tener una revisión de las tasas y tarifas actuales del servicio de procesamiento de tarjetas de crédito.

Artículos recientes para ti

Vender un negocio durante un divorcio

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 15 Jun 2023 01:33:03 GMT

Información sobre el proceso de venta de un negocio durante un divorcio de un experto.

El Sr. Smith es dueño de algunas lavanderías. Los ha tenido durante 15 años. Ha estado casado durante 19 años. Desde hace algunos años, el Sr. Smith ha pensado en venderlos. Se puso en contacto con un par de corredores de negocios y decidió que First Choice sería su elección si decidiera vender.

Su esposa ha solicitado el divorcio, lo que fuerza la mano del Sr. Smith. Ahora debe decidir vender las lavanderías o tasarlas y comprárselas a su cónyuge pagando la mitad del valor.

Le pedimos al abogado de divorcios de Las Vegas, Rock Rocheleau, que nos ayudara a nosotros y al Sr. Smith a comprender las opciones del Sr. Smith.

Nevada es un estado de propiedad comunitaria. Lo que significa que durante un divorcio todas las propiedades y bienes adquiridos durante el matrimonio se valoran y se dividen en partes iguales. Con un negocio, como una casa, el valor puede basarse en una tasación o permitir que la casa se venda. Al permitir que un corredor comercial venda el negocio, el Sr. Smith afirma que el valor debe ser el que pagará el mercado. Esto lo convierte en la solución más fácil. Pero, ¿y si el Sr. Smith quisiera quedarse con las lavanderías?

¿Cómo se determina el valor de un negocio?

Se utilizan tres enfoques principales para determinar el valor de una empresa: Estos tres enfoques se utilizan cuando la empresa no se vende realmente en el mercado abierto.

Enfoque basado en el mercado . Compara el negocio con otros negocios similares que han vendido. Con estos datos, se asigna un valor. Similar a cómo se tasa o valora una casa.
Enfoque basado en activos . A los activos tangibles del negocio se les da un valor justo de mercado y se suman. Esto es similar a la venta de activos de una empresa, excepto que no se considera la buena voluntad de la empresa o la base de clientes.
Income-Based Approach . Evalúa el valor presente de las ganancias futuras basadas en el negocio. Este es el enfoque más común.

Mi primera impresión es que sería mejor para el Sr. Smith contratar a First Choice Business Brokers para vender el negocio. De esta manera, no hay que adivinar cuál es el valor adecuado. Pero el Sr. Smith puede querer que un negocio continúe funcionando después del divorcio. En ese caso, se deben revisar los enfoques de valoración comunes y elegir el mejor.

Market Approach to Valuing a Business

El enfoque de mercado utiliza métodos similares a los que utilizan los agentes inmobiliarios cuando determinan el valor de una propiedad. Se compara el precio de venta de otros negocios similares que han sido vendidos recientemente. El evaluador luego asigna un valor justo de mercado del negocio de propiedad comunitaria basado en el rango de precios de negocios similares.

El problema está en encontrar negocios que hayan vendido que sean verdaderamente comparables. El precio de venta de estos negocios puede haber sido influenciado por factores desconocidos, tales como:

La motivación para la venta.
Las tendencias del mercado
El negocio vendido puede haber sido descontado por alguna razón no revelada, por lo que la venta no es realmente comparable.
Es posible que otras comparaciones no sean precisas, como el tamaño de la empresa, la cantidad de empleados y las ganancias anuales.
Los activos intangibles, o la falta de ellos, pueden haber afectado la venta
Es posible que no se hayan vendido negocios similares, lo que obligó al evaluador a buscar un nicho comercial más amplio. Por ejemplo, una empresa que vende específicamente silenciadores personalizados para vehículos ecológicos puede tener que valorarse con un mercado de piezas de vehículos más amplio. Como resultado, estas valoraciones podrían inflar o devaluar considerablemente el valor real de las empresas.

Debido a todos estos factores, el enfoque de mercado dista mucho de ser preciso al dividir el negocio de bienes gananciales entre los dos cónyuges durante un divorcio.

Enfoque de activos para valorar un negocio

El método de enfoque de activos puede funcionar bien para empresas que tienen un valor basado en activos tangibles como bienes inmuebles, equipos, inventario y cuentas por cobrar. En el enfoque de activos, un tasador suma todos los activos y resta los pasivos.

Desafortunadamente, esto no es tan fácil como parece. La mayoría de las empresas tienen activos tangibles e intangibles. Un activo intangible se refiere a cosas como propiedad intelectual, contratos comerciales y buena voluntad. El enfoque de activos no tiene en cuenta estos factores al asignar un valor.

Para las prácticas profesionales cuyo valor se basa en estos activos intangibles, el enfoque de activos no suele ser el mejor método de valoración.

Enfoque de ingresos para valorar un negocio

El enfoque de ingresos utiliza diferentes enfoques matemáticos basados en el flujo de caja. El evaluador revisa la historia del negocio específico y compara sus ganancias con otros negocios similares. También se consideran los riesgos de falla. Todos estos enfoques matemáticos convierten las ganancias futuras esperadas en un valor actual.

La desventaja es que el valor se basa en una predicción en lugar del valor actual. No puede garantizar que el valor asignado coincidirá con el valor futuro de las empresas. Esto puede dejar a uno o ambos socios en corto a largo plazo.

Para el Sr. Smith, debe contratar a un experto para que valore el negocio en función del enfoque de ingresos y, al mismo tiempo, contratar a un corredor de negocios para ver a cuánto se venderían las lavanderías en el mercado abierto. De esta manera, el Sr. Smith puede elegir qué vía produce la mayor cantidad de dinero para que él y su esposa se dividan.

Artículos recientes para ti

¿Listo para la jubilación pero no la mecedora?

duda@fcbb.com — Thu, 15 Jun 2023 01:13:43 GMT

Ideas para mantener tu cerebro activo después de la jubilación

Por qué la vida no termina con la jubilación laboral

Como corredores de negocios durante más de 24 años, escuchamos una y otra vez a personas que desean retirarse de sus trabajos corporativos y tomar una nueva oportunidad en la vida como propietarios de negocios. Orgullosamente hemos sido parte de estos eventos que cambian la vida y estamos aquí para ayudarlo a encontrar el "negocio del próximo capítulo" perfecto.

Después de pasar años trabajando en un empleo, por fin llega el día de la jubilación. ¡Excelente!

Muchos médicos creen que una persona que deja de usar su poder mental es un gran candidato para la enfermedad de Alzheimer. La solución es muy simple. El jubilado debe dedicarse a un pasatiempo que requiera capacidad mental o considerar la posibilidad de iniciar un negocio. Muchas de las personas que contactan con nuestras oficinas son jubilados que aún son jóvenes y activos y quieren controlar su futuro.

Hoy, muy afortunadamente, vivimos en un mundo donde los 65 años todavía se consideran jóvenes. La esperanza de vida de un hombre en 1958 se consideraba de 72 años. Hoy, según la Tabla uniforme de esperanza de vida de 2013, un hombre de 70 años tiene una esperanza de vida de 27 años más.

¿Qué quiere decir esto? Significa que nunca es demasiado tarde para trabajar por cuenta propia siendo dueño de su propio negocio. Esto puede brindarle la oportunidad de disfrutar de su retiro posterior al trabajo en una nueva carrera en la que usted determina su éxito. First Choice Business Brokers tiene una gran selección de muchos negocios en venta y uno de estos podría satisfacer sus necesidades.

Artículos recientes para ti

Ready For Retirement But Not The Rocking Chair?

duda@fcbb.com — Wed, 14 Jun 2023 02:07:49 GMT

Ideas to keep your brain active after retirement

Why Life does not end with Job Retirement

As business brokers for over 24 years, we hear time and time again people wanting to retire from their corporate jobs and take on a new lease in life with business ownership. We’ve proudly been part of these life changing events and are here to help you find the perfect “next chapter business”.

After spending years working in a job, the day for retirement finally comes. Great!

Many doctors believe that a person who stops using their brain power is a great candidate for Alzheimer’s disease. The solution is very simple. The retiree should take up a hobby that requires brain power or consider owing a business. Many of the people who contact our offices are retirees who are still young and active and want to control their future.

Today, very luckily, we are living in a world where age 65 is still considered young. The life expectancy of a male in 1958 was considered to be 72. Today according to the Uniform Life Expectancy Table 2013 a 70 year old man has a life expectancy of an additional 27 years.

What does this mean? It means that it is never too late to become self-employed by owning your own business. This can give you the opportunity to look forward to enjoying your post job retirement in a new career where you dictate your success. First Choice Business Brokers has a large selection of many businesses for sale and one of these just might fit your needs.

Selling A Business During A Divorce

duda@fcbb.com — Fri, 09 Jun 2023 04:53:33 GMT

Information on the process of selling a business during a divorce from an expert.

Mr. Smith owns a few laundromats. He’s owned them for 15 years. He’s been married for 19 years. For a few years now Mr. Smith has thought about selling them. He’s contacted a couple of business brokers and decided First Choice would be his choice if he decided to sell.

His wife has filed for a divorce, which forces Mr. Smith’s hand. He now must decide to sell the laundromats or value them and purchase them from his spouse by pay for half of the value.

We asked Las Vegas divorce attorney Rock Rocheleau to help us and Mr. smith understand Mr. Smith’s options.

Nevada is a community property state. Which means during a divorce all the property and assets acquired during the marriage are valued and divided evenly. With a business, like a home, the value can be based on an appraisal or allow the home to be sold. By allowing the business to be sold by a business broker, Mr. Smith is stating the value should be what the market will pay. This makes for the easiest solution. But what if Mr. Smith wanted to keep the laundromats?

How Do You Determine the Value of a Business?

There are three main approaches used in determining the value of a business: These three approaches are used when the business is not actually being sold in the open market.

Market-Based Approach . Compares the business to other similar businesses that have sold. Using this data, a value is assigned. Similar to how a home is appraised or valued.
Asset-Based Approach . The tangible assets of the business are given a fair market value and added up. This is similar to an asset sell of a business except the goodwill of the business or customer base is not considered.
Income-Based Approach . Assesses the present value of the business based future earnings. This is the most common approach.

My first impression is it would be best for Mr. Smith to hire First Choice Business Brokers to sell the business. This way there is no guessing at what the proper value is. But Mr. Smith may want a business to continue running after the divorce. In that case, the common valuation approaches should be reviewed and the best one chosen.

Market Approach to Valuing a Business

The Market Approach uses similar methods that are used by real estate agents when they determine the value of a property. The sale price of other similar businesses that have been recently sold is compared. The evaluator then assigns a fair market value of the community property business based on the price range of similar businesses.

The problem is in finding businesses that have sold that are truly comparable. The selling price for these businesses may have been influenced by unknown factors, such as:

The motivation for the sale
Market trends
The business sold may have been discounted for some unrevealed reason, so the sale is not truly comparable.
Other comparisons may not be accurate, such as the size of the business, the number of employees, and annual profits.
Intangible assets, or the lack thereof, may have affected the sale
There may have been no such similar businesses sold, forcing the evaluator to look for a broader business niche. For example, a business that specifically sells custom mufflers for eco-friendly vehicles may have to be valuated with a broader vehicle parts market. As a result, these valuations could considerably inflate or devalue the businesses’ actual worth.

Because of all these factors, the Market Approach is far from accurate in dividing the community property business between the two spouses during a divorce.

Asset Approach to Valuing a Business

The asset approach method may work well for businesses that have value based on tangible assets like real estate, equipment, inventory, and accounts receivable. In the asset approach, an appraiser adds up all the assets and subtracts the liabilities.

Unfortunately, this is not as easy as it sounds. Most businesses have both tangible and intangible assets. An intangible asset refers to things like intellectual property, business contracts, and goodwill. The Asset Approach does not take these factors into account when assigning a value.

For professional practices whose value relies on these intangible assets, the asset approach is usually not the best valuation method.

Income Approach to Valuing a Business

The Income Approach uses different mathematical approaches based on cash flow. The evaluator reviews the history of the specific business and compares its profits to other similar businesses. Risks of failure are also considered. All these mathematical approaches convert expected future profits into a present-day value.

The downside is that the value is based on a prediction rather than the current standing value. It cannot guarantee the assigned value will match the businesses’ future value. This can leave one or both partners shorted in the long term.

For Mr. Smith he should hire an expert to value the business based on the income approach, while at the same time hiring a business broker to look at what the laundromats would sell for on the open market. This way Mr. Smith can choose which avenue produces the most money for him and his wife to split.

How Do I Cut Business Expenses During Covid?

duda@fcbb.com — Fri, 09 Jun 2023 04:53:32 GMT

Cutting costs by reviewing expenses can help you through these tough times.

We all know that every dollar counts especially during this crisis.

While some business owners are applying for PPP loans savvy business owners are also evaluating where every $ is spent.

Now is a great time to examine all your business expenses. One of those expenses is your credit card processing rates and fees.

Now more than ever, every business owner is taking credit cards as their main form of payment for touch-less, non-contact service. We found a credit card processing bank that is offering free reviews of credit card processing rates and fees. If they can't beat your current rates and fees, they will pay you $1,000*. Who couldn't use an extra $1,000 right now? U.S. Bank Payment Solutions says they are confident that they can beat most rates because they are a direct servicer, no middleman to pay. We also found they don't even require you to have a bank account with their bank.

Some other expenses to consider reviewing are insurance premiums, security services and payroll services. Many business service providers are offering some of their regularly priced services at no cost or deeply discounted, you just need to ask.

First Choice Business Brokers is helping business owners arrange for their credit card processing rate and fee reviews at no cost.

We want to help you save every $ you can!

*Meet or Beat terms and conditions may apply.

There is no obligation, you have nothing to lose by having a review of your current credit card processing service rates and fees.

Today’s HOT Small Business Sales Market!

duda@fcbb.com — Fri, 09 Jun 2023 04:53:32 GMT

Economy makes buying a reality

Record high sales reported by BizBuySell national website

The Market is Hot: Retiring Baby Boomers and Rising Revenues Fuel Record Small Business Sales

BizBuySell.com's Second Quarter 2018 Insight Report examines the transactions and demographics behind the record levels of small businesses changing hands

San Francisco, CA - BizBuySell.com , the Internet's largest business-for-sale marketplace, reported today a record number of small businesses changing hands in the first half of 2018. The growth can largely be attributed to a growing number of Baby Boomers exiting their business as well as improving business financials. The full results are included in BizBuySell's Q2 2018 Insight Report, which aggregates statistics from business-for-sale transactions reported by participating business brokers nationwide.

A total of 5,383 businesses were reported sold in the first two quarters of 2018, putting the year on pace to surpass 2017's record-high of 9,919 transactions. In Q2 alone, 2,705 businesses changed hands, an increase of 6.7 percent over the same time last year and the most of any quarter since BizBuySell began tracking data in 2007.

fcbb-el-paso-tx-272

A Strong Business but a Modest Multiple

Dependency Makes Buyers Nervous

Why Monopoly Control Drives Value

The Takeaway for Owners

Recent articles for you

How to Double Your Chances of a Premium Acquisition Offer

From Operator to Owner

Recent articles for you

Why Imperfections in Your Business Don’t Make It Unsellable

Blake Hutchison on Why Imperfections Can Be to an Acquirer’s Advantage

How PetCoach Turned an Imperfection into a Selling Point

Your Business Has Value—Even if It’s Not Perfect

Recent articles for you

Is Your Industry Next for a Roll-Up? Here’s How to Tell—and What to Do

How to Know if Your Industry Is Ripe for a Roll-Up

Fragmentation

Market Size

Growth Potential

Precedent Transactions

Scalability

Timing

Should You Sell or Lead the Roll-Up?

Selling to a Roll-Up

Leading the Roll-Up

The Wave Won’t Wait

Recent articles for you

Supplier Dependence: The Silent Killer of Business Valuations

Why Supplier Risk Hurts Valuation

Adi Gullia’s Diversification Example

The Impact on Valuation

Practical Steps to Lower Supplier Risk

Conclusion

﻿

Recent articles for you

The Power of Working on, Not in, Your Business

Not Getting Taken Advantage Of

A Transformative Exit

Recent articles for you

From Reseller to Brand Builder: Luke Peters’ $80M Success

Finding a Quiet Corner of the Market

The Value of a Brand

1.Commanding Higher Prices

2.Increasing Customer Loyalty

3.Acquirers Pay a Premium for Differentiated Brands

Lasko Acquires Luke’s $80 Million Business

﻿

Recent articles for you

Listening & Leveling: How Customer Feedback Turned a $50 Idea into a 7-Figure Business

William Brown’s Journey: From $50 to Seven Figures

Applying Listening & Leveling to Your Business

Recent articles for you

Why a Strong Moat Made Boondockers Welcome an Acquisition Target

How Boondockers Welcome Built a Moat

The Sale to Harvest Host

Recent articles for you

THE DANGER OF MARKET TIMING THE SALE OF YOUR BUSINESS

Recent articles for you

WHAT YOUR BIRTH CERTIFICATE SAYS ABOUT YOUR EXIT PLAN

Recent articles for you

SEVEN POWERFUL RATIOS TO START TRACKING NOW

Recent articles for you

Copy of Four ways to protect your turf

Recent articles for you

Four ways to protect your turf

Get certified

Create an army of defenders

Get your customers to integrate

Become a verb

Recent articles for you

Prevention is better than cure

Recent articles for you

Planning to Sell? How to answer THE most important question

Recent articles for you

The C-word and 7 Others to Avoid at Work

Recent articles for you

Does Your Business Have Curb Appeal?

Recent articles for you

Is Now the Time To Sell Your Business?

Recent articles for you